Cat. No.

I539-E1-02

USER’S MANUAL

DeviceNet Communications Unit

MODEL 3G3MV-PDRT2
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi-function Compact Inverters)
DeviceNet Communications Card
MODEL 3G3RV-PDRT2
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverters)
 Thank you for choosing a 3G3MV/3G3RV Series Inverter and DeviceNet Communications
Unit. This manual describes the specifications and operating methods of the DeviceNet Com-
munications Unit used for exchanging data between an Inverter and a Programmable Control-
ler. Specifically, it describes the operation methods, communications methods, and data
setting methods of the 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit and 3G3RV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications Card. Proper use and handling of the product will help ensure
proper product performance, will lengthen product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.
For details about the 3G3MV Inverter and DeviceNet communications system, refer to the fol-
lowing reference manuals.
Inverter Manuals
DeviceNet Manuals

1.To ensure safe and proper use of the OMRON Inverters, please read this USER’S MANUAL
(Cat. No. I539-E1) to gain sufficient knowledge of the devices, safety information, and precau-
tions before actual use.
2.The products are illustrated without covers and shieldings for closer look in this USER’S MAN-
UAL. For actual use of the products, make sure to use the covers and shieldings as specified.
3.This USER’S MANUAL and other related user’s manuals are to be delivered to the actual end
users of the products.
4.Please keep this manual close at hand for future reference.
5.If the product has been left unused for a long time, please inquire at our sales representative.

NOTICE
1.This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products. You
should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.
2.“PLC” in this manual refers to the SYSMAC CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, and CV-series
Programmable Controllers that can be connected to a DeviceNet System. (C200HS Program-
mable Controllers support only the remote I/O function.)
3.Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your OMRON rep-
resentative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
4.The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt to open the
cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the
product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
5.We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare
for the system into which the product is being installed.
• Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
• Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned
off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
6.Inverter and Option Unit wiring and Digital Operator operations must be performed by some-
body with a specialist knowledge of electrical systems.
7.The individual life expectancies of the Inverter's internal components must be considered. Per-
form maintenance, such as Unit replacement, appropriate for the operating conditions.
8.Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product per-
formance.

Items to Check Before Unpacking

Check the following items before removing the product from the package:
• Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?
• Has the product been damaged in shipping?
• Are any screws or bolts loose?
• Have all accessories been delivered together with or attached to the product?
 USER’S MANUAL

DeviceNet Communications Unit

MODEL 3G3MV-PDRT2
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi-function Compact Inverters)
DeviceNet Communications Card
MODEL 3G3RV-PDRT2
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverters)
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.

!DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

!Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. The abbreviation “PC,” however, is used in
some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.

Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.

 OMRON, 2003
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
■ General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the
operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the
product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion sys-
tems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines,
and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the sys-
tems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with
double safety mechanisms.

■ Transportation, Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Precautions

!WARNING Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal cov-
ers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Leave them mounted in place
while power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock, mal-
function, or damage to the product.

!WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel.

Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

!WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the
power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover. Not doing so
may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the
cables. Doing so may result in electrical shock, operation stoppage, or burning.

!WARNING Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety. Equipment damage
may result. This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for
communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation.

!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit. Doing either of these may result
in electrical shock, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifi-
cations.
 • Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

!Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire
or malfunction.

!Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.

!Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage
to the product.

!Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result
in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.

!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

■ Operation and Adjustment Precautions

!Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter's settings. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

!Caution Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety. Equipment damage
may result. This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for
communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation.

!Caution Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings
before starting operation. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the
product.
■ Reference Manuals
Information on connected devices is required to operate the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card.
Refer to the following manuals for information on related products.

Inverter Manuals
Name Cat. No.
SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi-function Compact Inverters I527
User’s Manual
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV High-function General-purpose I532
Inverters User’s Manual
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High-function General-purpose I516
Inverters User’s Manual

Note Refer to the user’s manual for the Inverter for information on Inverter operation.

DeviceNet Manuals
Name Cat. No.
DeviceNet Operation Manual W267
DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual (Version 2.@) W382
CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Unit Operation Manual W380
DeviceNet DRT2 Series Slaves Operation Manual W404

Note Refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual for details on the DeviceNet network.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-

INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.

In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.

At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.

The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:

• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.

Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.

NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.

It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.

PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
 Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Functions and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 Comparison to Earlier Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-4 DeviceNet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-5 DeviceNet System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Chapter 2. Example System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-3 Setting and Wiring Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-4 Starting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-5 Checking Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Chapter 3. Setup and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 Nomenclature and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-2 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-3 Communications Line Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-4 Conformity to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Chapter 4. SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Chapter 5. Remote I/O Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 Overview of Remote I/O Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Switching the Remote I/O Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-3 Basic Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-4 Standard Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-5 Special Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-6 Control Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-7 Unit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Chapter 6. Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 Overview of Message Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-3 Overview of Messages and Responses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6-4 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-5 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-6 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-7 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
 Table of Contents
Chapter 7. Configurator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-1 Basic Configurator Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Smart Slave Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-3 Edit Device Parameters Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7-4 Monitor Device Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7-5 Maintenance Information Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63

Chapter 8. Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 Communications Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 Message Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3 Special Remote I/O Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-4 Inverter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-5 Inverter Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Chapter 9. Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 Message Communications Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-3 Special Remote I/O Programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Chapter 10. Appendices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-2 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10-4 3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
10-6 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1

 Chapter 1

Functions and System

Configuration
1-1 Functions
1-2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions
1-3 Comparison to Earlier Models
1-4 DeviceNet Features
1-5 DeviceNet System Configuration
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-1 Functions

The 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit is a DeviceNet communications interface Unit

for the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi-function Compact Inverters. The 3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Com-
munications Card is a DeviceNet communications interface card for the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and
3G3FV High-function General-purpose Inverters.
The DeviceNet Communications Unit and Card are dedicated communications interface devices that
make it possible for the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV, 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and 3G3FV Inverters to communicate
with OMRON PLCs. Installing a DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card in the SYSDRIVE Inverter
allows a variety of operations to be performed from the Programmable Controller, such as monitoring
RUN/STOP and operating conditions and changing set values.

Note When a DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card is used, the RS-422/485 of the Inverter cannot
be used for communications.

■ Easy Communications
The following two functions can be used simultaneously in DeviceNet communications between the
CPU Unit of a PLC and the Inverter.
• Remote I/O Communications
I/O is automatically transferred between a Slave (SYSDRIVE Inverter) and the CPU Unit without any
special programming in the CPU Unit. (Automatically transmits Inverter control inputs such as RUN or
STOP from a PLC to the Inverter and returns operation status of the Inverter or output frequency monitor
data from the Inverter to the PLC.)
• Message Communications
Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a DeviceNet (Master) Unit is
mounted and Slaves (SYSDRIVE Inverters) by executing specific instructions (such as CMND and IO-
WR, depending on the model of PLC used) from the program in the CPU Unit. (Allows some parameter
setting and monitoring, Inverter output frequency, output voltage, or output current. If the remote I/O
communications is not performed, Inverter control data such as RUN or STOP can be input through this
message communications function.)
Remote I/O communications for the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card are performed using
either 4 or 8 words allocated in the I/O Area of the PLC. The Inverter can be controlled using remote
I/O communications because the basic control I/O functions, frequency setting functions, and output
frequency monitoring functions are assigned to remote I/O. This allows the Inverter to be controlled
through simple I/O processing.

■ Communications with CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, and CVM1/CV-

series PLCs
The DeviceNet communications system is supported by CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z) and
CVM1/CV-series Programmable Controllers. More than twice as many Inverters can be connected in
comparison to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems to support even larger control systems.
Note 1. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the system depends on the type
of DeviceNet (Master) Unit used, whether the message function is used, and the number of
words used by remote I/O communications. See 1-5 DeviceNet System Configuration for
further details.

1-2
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
Note 2. The CS Series includes the CS1G-CPU@@H, CS1H-CPU@@H, CS1G-CPU@@(-V1), and
CS1H-CPU@@(-V1) Programmable Controllers. The CJ Series includes the CJ1G-
CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H, CJ1M-CPU@@, and CJ1G-CPU@@ Programmable Controllers.
The CVM1/CV Series includes the CV1000, CV2000, and CVM1 Programmable Control-
lers.
Note 3. C200HS PLCs support only remote I/O communications; they do not support message com-
munications.

■ Multi-vendor Network
The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that
devices (Masters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Net-
work. The DeviceNet Communications Unit supports the DeviceNet AC/DC drive object.

■ Choice of Communications Functions

The DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card has various functions to choose from to suit the Inverter
applications.
• Supported Master Communications Methods
The DeviceNet Unit/Card supports 4 DeviceNet I/O connection methods: Poll, Bit Strobe, Cyclic, and
Change of State (COS). It is possible to set another connection method to be used simultaneously in
addition to the regular Poll connection. The COS method is a function that sends with a high priority
status only when there has been a change in the status of the Unit’s ON/OFF data, so the communica-
tions volume is normally zero. The COS communication method is ideal for applications such as error
or alarm notifications.
• Remote I/O Communications
• Basic Remote I/O: These are the basic remote I/O functions defined in DeviceNet Specification.
• Standard Remote I/O: These are the factory settings for the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card.
These settings are for DeviceNet compatibility.
• Special Remote I/O: These functions provide compatibility with earlier models (3G3MV-PDRT1-
SINV1 and 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1).
• Control I/O Remote I/O: These remote I/O functions support the functions and arrays that control
the I/O signals of SYSDRIVE Inverters. (These are proprietary OMRON functions and are not part
of the DeviceNet specifications.)
• Unit Status: These 16 bits of data (a proprietary OMRON function) include information on the In-
verter’s fault code and the status of the monitoring functions. We recommend using this remote I/O
function with the COS communications method.
• Multi-function Input Monitor: This information is the result of a logical OR between the Inverter’s ter-
minal block and the control I/O remote I/O’s multi-function input signals. This function can be used
to monitor references to the various Inverter functions. Also, if a terminal block signal is set not to
function in the Inverter’s parameters, the Inverter’s terminal block can be used for sensor inputs to
the ladder program.
• Message Communications
Inverter control and monitoring are possible with DeviceNet explicit messages. (Messages conforming
to the DeviceNet AC/DC driver specifications can be used.)
The Parameter Read message (Class 64), which is a special OMRON function, can be used to read the
current value register in the Inverter. Message communications operate independently of the remote I/
O functions, so message communications and data that is not allocated to remote I/O can be used si-
multaneously with the remote I/O functions.

1-3
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
■ Applicable to Various System Configurations
Remote I/O communications and message communications are available as communications func-
tions. Normal control inputs are controlled by the remote I/O communications function. When neces-
sary, the message communications function is used to monitor each Inverter. It is possible to control
the selection of either the communications control input or local control input.

Note When connecting the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10
Thin Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.

■ System Overview
Master Unit
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Message communications function
CVM1-DRM21-V1
CMND(490) Reading Inverter output
current

3G3MV, 3G3RV, 3G3PV,

or 3G3FV Inverter

Remote I/O function

Output (PLC to Inverter)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Right- 0 Net.Ref. Net.Ctrl. Reset Reverse/ Forward/
n most Stop Stop
Left-
most 1 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
n+1
Right-
most
Left-
2
3
Rotational speed reference rightmost bytes
Rotational speed reference leftmost bytes
Communications Unit
most
(For 3G3MV Inverters)
Input (Inverter to PLC) 3G3RV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications
Card
(For 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and
3G3FV Inverters)
Note: T-branch wiring using
Thin Cables
Power
Switch supply Motor
Run Reverse

Forward Stop

Selection of either the communications control

input or local control input is possible using
Net.Ctrl./Net.Ref.

1-4
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions

As a Smart Slave, the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card (3G3MV-PDRT2 or 3G3RV-PDRT2) is

equipped with new Smart Slave functions. This chapter introduces the Smart Slave functions. Refer
to 7-2 Smart Slave Functions for more details and setting/monitoring procedures.

■ Average Power Monitor Function

This function monitors the power that the Inverter supplies each hour and determines the cumulative
power usage from the hourly average. The amount of power used by the system can be obtained
without using special sensors or performing any calculations. In addition, monitoring the power
usage can help reduce energy usage and identify power consumption problems in the system.
The average power can be easily monitored from a Configurator, Programmable Terminal (NS
Series), or other operator interface.

■ Warning Torque Detection Function

This function can detect equipment errors by monitoring the output current.
Problems in the load can be detected in the Inverter’s current (torque) level. The function provides
advanced warning of an increased load caused by deterioration in the mechanical system (such as a
loose chain, low bearing oil, or worn-out equipment), so preventative maintenance can be per-
formed.

Note This function generates a warning (alarm), so operation will continue.

■ Current Trace Function

This function traces (samples and records) the output current waveform to the motor. Troubleshoot-
ing can be performed easily, without connecting measuring equipment. The Configurator can be
used to set the current trace’s trigger setting, set the sampling cycle, and display the current wave-
form.

■ Operating Time Monitor Function

This function can perform a high-speed calculation in the Slave (independent of the ladder program)
to determine the time required for an input to go ON after a particular signal or reference goes ON.
The Slave can report (through the Unit status flags) when the operating time exceeds the SV set in
the Slave.

■ Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function

This function totals the time that one of the Inverter’s control I/O terminals is ON. For example, if the
RUN output’s ON time is totaled, it is possible to calculate the Inverter’s operating time and monitor
equipment operating time without using the ladder program.

1-5
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
Note The input from the Inverter’s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet com-
munications, so the input is considered ON when either input source is ON. For example, when
either the RUN/STOP signal is input from the control terminal block or the input is being
received from DeviceNet communications, the corresponding multi-function input terminal is
considered as ON and the ON time is added.

■ Contact Operations Monitor Function

This function counts the number of times that one of the Inverter’s control I/O terminals goes ON/
OFF. The number of ON/OFF operations can be useful in maintenance, e.g., it can indicate when a
connected device needs to be replaced.

Note The input from the Inverter’s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet com-
munications, just as it is in the Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function.

■ Conduction Time Monitor Function

Totals and records the time that power is supplied to the Slave’s internal circuit power supply. The
Slave can report (through the Unit status flags) when the cumulative ON time reaches the SV set in
the Slave. The DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card has three set values that can be set indepen-
dently for the following three time monitoring functions.
• Main Unit operating time
• Fan operating time
• Electrolytic capacitor operating time
Since the fan operating time and electrolytic capacitor operating time are used to indicate when
those parts need to be replaced, these monitoring times can be reset to zero (with an operation in
the Configurator’s Device Monitor Window).

■ Baud Rate Auto-detection

In earlier Slaves it was necessary to set the baud rate with a DIP switch on the Slave, but it isn’t nec-
essary to set the baud rate for Smart Slaves. The baud rate is automatically set to match the Mas-
ter’s baud rate.

■ Network Power Supply Voltage Monitor Function

The network power supply values (present value, maximum value, and minimum value) can be
recorded in the Slave. In addition, the Slave can report (through the Unit status flags) when the volt-
age drops below the SV (monitor voltage) set in the Slave.

■ Unit Comment Function

An user-defined name can be set for each Unit and the names can be stored in the Slaves.

■ Connected Device Comment Function

User-defined names can be set for the motor connected to the Inverter and devices connected to
control I/O terminals, and those names can be stored in the Inverter.

1-6
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
■ Communications Error Log Monitor Function
The error status (communications error source code and communications power supply voltage at
the time) for the last four communications errors can be recorded in the Slave.

■ Last Maintenance Date (Maintenance Function)

The date of the last maintenance can be written in the Unit.

■ Parameter Setting Function

The Inverter’s user parameters can be set with the Configurator. There are two ways to set the
parameters, as follows:
• Several of the major parameters can be displayed and set.
• An individual parameter’s Instance/Attribute can be specified and set.

1-7
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-3 Comparison to Earlier Models

The following table shows the functions that have been added to the DeviceNet Communications
Unit/Card (3G3MV-PDRT2 and 3G3RV-PDRT2), which are not available in the earlier DeviceNet
Communications Unit/Card (3G3MV-PDRT1-SIN@ and 3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN@).
Refer to the Chapter in the “Reference” column for more details on each function.

■ Function Comparison Table

Category Function New Unit/Card Earlier Unit/Card Reference
(@-PDRT2) (@-PDRT1-SIN@)
Remote I/O I/O allocation Basic I/O Supported Supported Chapter 5
Standard I/O Supported Supported
Advanced I/O Supported Supported
Control I/O Supported Supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Unit Status Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Multi-function Supported Not supported
Input Monitor (Advanced Func-
tion)
DeviceNet Connection type Poll Supported Supported Chapter 5
Master con- Bit strobe Supported Not supported
nectivity
Change of state Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Cyclic Supported Not supported
Connection path switching Supported Supported
(Selecting I/O allocation in Master’s
parameters)
Default connection path switching Supported Supported
(Selecting the I/O allocation in the (Advanced Func-
Slave when power goes ON) tion)
Baud rate auto-detect Supported Not supported Chapter 7
(Baud rate set automatically.)
Inverter Parameter settings Supported Supported See note.
(Advanced Func-
tion)

1-8
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

Category Function New Unit/Card Earlier Unit/Card Reference

(@-PDRT2) (@-PDRT1-SIN@)
Smart Slave Average Power Monitor Function Supported Not supported Chapter 7
functions (Advanced Func-
tion)
Warning Torque Detection Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Current Trace Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Operating Time Monitor Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Contact Operations Monitor Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Conduction Time Monitor Function Supported Not supported
(Advanced Func-
tion)
Network Power Supply Voltage Monitor Supported Not supported
Function
Unit Comment Function Supported Not supported
Connected Device Comment Function Supported Not supported
Communications Error Log Monitor Supported Not supported
Function
Last Maintenance Date (Maintenance Supported Not supported
Function)

Note Refer to 7-3 Edit Device Parameters Window for details on setting parameters with the Config-
urator.
refer to 5-5 Special Remote I/O Operation for details on setting parameters with special remote
I/O.
Refer to 6-7 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex for details on setting parameters
with message communications.
Refer to Chapter 10 Appendices for reference data such as register numbers, which are
required when setting parameters. The information is organized by Inverter series.

■ Comparison of Installation Specifications

The installation conditions for the 3G3MV-PDRT2 have changed in comparison to those for the
3G3MV-PDRT1-SINV(1). Observe the following precautions when changing models.
• Install the Unit into a metal panel.
The EMC immunity of the 3G3MV-PDRT2 is somewhat less than that of the 3G3MV-PDRT1-
SINV(1). Refer to 3-4 Conformity to EC Directives for information on electromagnetic wave coun-
termeasures.
• The installation dimension at the bottom has been increased by 7 mm.

1-9
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
The 3G3MV-PDRT2 is equipped with a connector for DeviceNet connection rather than a terminal
block. The dimension of the connector that extends below the case must be added.

■ Inverter Software Versions

Supported software versions are listed in the following table.
Model Software version Release date Description
3G3MV Series, VSP010027 (S0027) June 2003 Supports all functions.
3.7 kW and less and higher Current trace function and warning torque
detection function use increments of 0.01 A.
VSP010026 (S0026) June 2002 Supports all functions.
VSP010025 (S0025) June 2001 Current trace function and warning torque
VSP010024 (S0024) September 2000 detection function are use increments of
0.1 A for detection and display.
3G3MV Series, VSP010105 (S0105) September 2002 Supports all functions.
5.5 kW and more VSP010104 (S0104) May 2001 Current trace function and warning torque
detection function are use increments of
0.1 A for detection and display.
3G3RV Series VSF105081 (S5081) November 2001 Supports all functions.
and higher Current trace function and warning torque
detection function are use increments of
0.1 A for detection and display.
3G3PV Series VSE102014 (S2014) July 2002 Supports all functions.
VSE102013 (S2013) March 2001 Current trace function and warning torque
detection function are use increments of
0.1 A for detection and display.
3G3FV Series VSG101114 (S1114) September 2002 It is not possible to force-switch the com-
VSG101113 (S1113) September 2000 mand right from the network. Specifically,
even if netref and netctrl (see Chapter 5
VSG101043 (S1043) September 1998 Remote I/O Functions) are turned ON, the
command right will not be switched to the
network. Use parameters b1-02 and b1-01
to set the command right.
There are no restrictions to other functions.

1-10
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-4 DeviceNet Features

■ System Configuration Example

Master by other
OMRON Master Unit company OMRON Master Unit OMRON Configurator

DeviceNet Network

OMRON Configurator

OMRON Slaves OMRON Slaves

Slaves by other company

DeviceNet Network

Slaves by other company Slaves by other company

OMRON Slaves

■ Multi-vendor Network
The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that
devices (Masters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Net-
work. Therefore, a wide range of field-level applications can be supported by combining valve
devices, sensors, and other devices.

■ Simultaneous Remote I/O and Message Services

Remote I/O communications to constantly exchange I/O data between the PLC and Slaves can be
executed simultaneously with message communications, to send/receive DeviceNet (Master) Unit
data as required by the application. Therefore, a DeviceNet Network can be installed to flexibly han-
dle applications that require both bit data and message data. Message communications can be
achieved either by using OMRON's FINS commands or by using DeviceNet explicit messages.

1-11
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
■ Connect Multiple PLCs to the Same Network
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable connection of more than one Master to the
Network, allowing message communications between PLCs and between multiple groups of PLCs
and Slaves. This allows the DeviceNet Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while
reducing wiring.

■ Handle Multi-point Control and Line Expansions with Multi-layer

Networks
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable mounting more than one DeviceNet (Master)
Unit to a single PLC, allowing control of many more points. This feature can easily handle line expan-
sions and other applications.

■ Free Remote I/O Allocation

A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable flexible allocation of I/O, i.e., in any area and
in any order. This allows I/O allocations that suit the application to simplify programming and enable
effective usage of PLC memory areas.

■ Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds

A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to set the communications cycle time, enabling usage
of Slaves with slow response times.

■ Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods

Use a multi-drop trunk line, T-branch multi-drop lines, or daisy-chain drop lines. All three connection
methods can be combined to flexibly construct a Network that meets the needs of the application.

Note For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Unit of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.

1-12
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-5 DeviceNet System Configuration

1-5-1 System Configuration

DeviceNet is a multi-bit, multi-vendor network that combines controls and data on a machine/line-
control level and that conforms to DeviceNet open field network specifications.
Two types of communications are supported: 1) Remote I/O communications that automatically
transfer I/O between Slaves and the CPU Unit of a PLC without any special programming in the CPU
Unit and 2) Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a DeviceNet
(Master) Unit is mounted and Slaves by executing specific instructions (such as CMND and IOWR,
depending on the model of PLC used) from the program in the CPU Unit.
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable following. This allows the support of an even
larger control system.
• I/O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I/O communications.
• More than one DeviceNet (Master) Unit can be mounted to a single PLC.
• More than one DeviceNet (Master) Unit can be connected in a single Network.

■ Fixed Allocation: Configuration without a Configurator

DeviceNet Master Unit
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1
CVM1-DRM21-V1

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV,
3G3RV, 3G3PV, or
3G3FV Inverter
Slave Slave Slave
3G3MV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications
Unit (For 3G3MV Inverters)
3G3RV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications
Card
(For 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and
3G3FV Inverters)

CS/CJ-series PLCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

CV-series PLCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
C200HX/HG/HE PLCs: 51 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
C200HS PLCs: 33 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

Note 1. The DeviceNet (Master) Unit occupies one node of the DeviceNet Network.
Note 2. If C200HS PLCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.
Note 3. If one node uses more than one word, the maximum number of nodes will be reduced by
one node for each extra word that is used. (The above numbers of nodes assume that each
node is allocated one I/O word.)

1-13
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
■ Free Allocation: Configuration with a Configurator
DeviceNet Master Unit
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1
CVM1-DRM21-V1
3G8F5-DRM21-E (ISA Board) or
SG8E2-DRM21-EV1 (PC Card)
Configurator

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV,
3G3RV, 3G3PV, or
3G3FV Inverter
Slave Slave Slave
3G3MV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications
Unit
(For 3G3MV Inverters)
3G3RV-PDRT2
DeviceNet Communications
Card (For 3G3RV, 3G3PV,
and 3G3FV Inverters)

64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

Slave Slave Slave

Configurator

64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

Note 1. The DeviceNet (Master) Unit and Configurator each occupy one node of the DeviceNet Net-
work.
Note 2. If C200HS PLCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.
Note 3. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the Network will be limited by the
maximum number of control points of the PLC used.

1-14
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-5-2 Configurator Overview

The Configurator is a software application run on an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer and is used
to support a DeviceNet communications system. Connection to the Network is achieved either via a
serial communications port (peripheral bus or Host Link) or by connecting the computer directly to
the DeviceNet using a hardware interface. The Configurator occupies one node on the DeviceNet
Network, but has no specific functions on the network itself. The Configurator provides the following
functions.
• Free Allocation of Remote I/O
The remote I/O allocations in the PLCs can be changed from the Configurator. I/O can be flexibly allo-
cated for each node within the specified I/O areas.
• More than One DeviceNet (Master) Unit per Network
Slaves can be set for each DeviceNet (Master) Unit from the Configurator enabling communications be-
tween multiple groups of PLCs and Slaves. The maximum number of nodes connected to one Network
remains at 64.

Note One Slave can be connected to no more than one DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

• More than one DeviceNet (Master) Unit per PLC

Remote I/O can be allocated for each Slave of the DeviceNet (Master) Unit from the Configurator, so
more than one DeviceNet (Master) Unit can be mounted to the same PLC.

Note In allocating Remote I/O for each DeviceNet (Master) Unit, be careful not to allow any dual
allocation.

■ Configurator Specifications
Dedicated interface --- 3G8F5-DRM21-E 3G8E2-DRM21-EV1
Software WS02-CFDC1-E Packaged with the Interface
Personal computer Desktop model or Desktop model (ISA Notebook model
Notebook model Board) (PCMCIA Card)

1-15
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
Dedicated interface --- 3G8F5-DRM21-E 3G8E2-DRM21-EV1
Operating Compatible Windows 95, 98, ME, Windows 95, 98, ME, Windows 95, 98, 2000,
environ- OS NT 4.0, 2000, or XP or NT 4.0 or XP
ment Minimum com- IBM PC/AT or compatible (OS requirements may be stricter than the fol-
puter require- lowing.)
ments CPU: 166 MHz Pentium min.
Memory: 32 MB min.
Hard disk: 15 MB min. free space
Connec- Dedicated Sold separately ISA Board PCMCIA Card
tion interface
method Serial Connect from the computer’s COM port through a CS/CJ-series PLC.
(This connection is possible when a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master)
Unit is being used.)
Ethernet Connect from the computer’s Ethernet port through a CS/CJ-series
PLC’s Ethernet.
(This connection is possible when a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master)
Unit is being used.)
Relation to Network Using a dedicated interface: Connect directly to DeviceNet.
• Operates as one node on the Network, requires one node address,
and only one Configurator can be connected to the Network.
• The Configurator can be disconnected from the Network after remote I/
O has been allocated.
Using a serial or Ethernet connection:
• Possible only when a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is being
used.
• A DeviceNet node address is not required. (Connects through the
DeviceNet (Master) Unit.)
• A node address is not allocated, so the Configurator can be connected
or disconnected freely. (There are some limitations compared to a
direct DeviceNet connection through a dedicated interface. For exam-
ple, the refreshing interval for PV monitoring is much slower that it is
with a direct connection.)

1-5-3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications

Item Specifications
Communications protocol DeviceNet
Supported connections (com- • Remote I/O
munications) Master/Slave connection (Poll, Bit-strobe, COS, or Cyclic)
• Explicit messages
Explicit connection
Both conform to DeviceNet specifications.
Connection forms Combination of multi-drop and T-branch connections (for trunk and drop
lines)
Baud rate 500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, or 125 Kbps (switchable)
Communications media Special 5-wire cables (2 signal lines, 2 power lines, and 1 shield line)
• Thick Cable: DCA2-5C10 (100 m)
• Thin Cable: DCA1-5C10 (100 m)

1-16
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

Item Specifications
Communications distances Baud rate Network length Drop line length Total drop line
length
500 Kbps 100 m max. 6 m max. 39 m max.
250 Kbps 250 m max. 6 m max. 78 m max.
125 Kbps 500 m max. 6 m max. 156 m max.
Communications power supply 24 V DC ±1%, supplied externally
(Slave power supply: 11 to 25 V DC)
Recommended power supply: OMRON S82H Series or S82J Series
Maximum number of nodes 64 nodes
Maximum number of Masters Without Configurator:1
With Configurator: 63
Maximum number of Slaves Without Configurator:63
With Configurator: 63
Error control CRC check

1-5-4 Inverters
The maximum number of Inverters that can be connected to one Network depends on the PLC
model that is used, the remote I/O functions of the Inverter, and whether message communications
are used or not. (Use the message communications function for setting some parameters and for
monitoring the output current.) The differences between models are provided in the following tables.

■ CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet (Master) Units

● Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocations

Applicable PLC CS Series CJ Series
DeviceNet (Master) Unit CS1W-DRM21(-V1) CJ1W-DRM21
Supported communications Remote I/O and messages
Maximum number of Slaves 63
per DeviceNet (Master) Unit

1-17
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
Applicable PLC CS Series CJ Series
Maximum number of controlled 2,048
points per DeviceNet (Master)
Unit
Allocation areas Select one of the following settings, using the software switch (Fixed Area
Setting 1, 2, or 3 Switch) in the words allocated to the DeviceNet (Master)
Unit in the CIO Area:
1. OUT: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263; IN: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363 (default)
2. OUT: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463; IN: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
3. OUT: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663; IN: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address
order only.
• 8-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word (1 node address)
• 16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word (1 node address)
• Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words (multiple node
addresses)
Maximum Without 4 words remote I/O: 32
number of explicit mes- 6 words remote I/O: 21
Inverters sages
8 words remote I/O: 16
With explicit 4 words remote I/O: 32
messages 6 words remote I/O: 21
8 words remote I/O: 16

● Communications with Configurator: Free Allocations

Applicable PLC CS Series CJ Series
DeviceNet (Master) Unit CS1W-DRM21(-V1) CJ1W-DRM21
Supported communications Remote I/O and messages
Maximum number of Slaves 63
per DeviceNet (Master) Unit

1-18
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

Applicable PLC CS Series CJ Series

Maximum number of controlled Using Settings in Words Allocated in DM Area: 16,000 points (IN: 500 words
points per DeviceNet (Master) × 1 block; OUT: 500 words × 1 block
Unit Using Configurator: 32,000 points (IN: 500 words × 2 blocks; OUT: 500
words × 2 blocks
Allocation areas CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
WR: W000 to W511
HR: H000 to H511
DM: D00000 to D32767
EM: E00000 to E32767
Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order.
The following limitations apply:
• Using Settings in Words Allocated to DeviceNet (Master) Unit in DM
Area
The following limitations apply when allocating words using settings in the
DM Area.
• Words are allocated in 2 blocks (OUT 1, IN 1). Each block consists of
sequential words.
• Words for each slave are allocated inside the allocated words in order of
node number. (It is not necessary to allocate words to unused node num-
bers.)
• The leftmost byte of a word cannot be allocated to an 8-point Slave.
• Using the Configurator
Using the Configurator allows much wider allocation than using settings in
the DM Area.
• Words are allocated in 4 blocks (OUT 1, OUT 2, IN 1, IN 2). Each block
consists of sequential words.
• Words for each slave can be allocated inside the allocated words in any
order.
• Limitations That Apply to Both Methods
The following limitations apply when allocating words using either settings
in the DM Area or using the Configurator.
• The maximum that can be allocated in one block is 500 words.
For Slaves with more than 8 points, the first byte cannot be specified as
the leftmost byte (7 to 15).
• The same Slave cannot be used for more than one DeviceNet (Master)
Unit.
Words are allocated to Slaves as follows:
• 8-point Slaves: Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of a word.
• 16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word.
• Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words (for Slaves
with an odd number of bytes, the last byte will be the rightmost byte).
Maximum number of Inverters 63
(using one DeviceNet (Master)
Unit only)
Maximum number of Inverters Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the
with more than one DeviceNet number of words allocated to the Inverters (4 to 8 words).
(Master) Unit The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit, so it cannot be allocated for
remote I/O for Inverters.

1-19
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
■ C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet (Master) Units

● Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocation

Applicable PLC CVM1/CV Series CS Series and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE
DeviceNet (Master) Unit CVM1-DRM21-V1 C200HW-DRM21-V1
Supported communications Remote I/O and mes- Remote I/O and mes- Remote I/O
sages sages
Maximum number of Slaves 63 50 32
per DeviceNet (Master) Unit
Maximum number of controlled 2,048 1,600 1,024
points per DeviceNet (Master)
Unit
Allocation areas OUT: CIO 1900 to CIO OUT: IR 050 to IR 099 OUT: IR 50 to IR 81
1963 IN: IR 350 to IR 399 IN: IR 350 to IR 381
IN: CIO 2000 to CIO
2063
Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address
order only.
• 8-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word
• 16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word
• Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words
Maximum Without 4 words remote I/O: 32 4 words remote I/O: 25 4 words remote I/O: 16
number of explicit mes- 6 words remote I/O: 21 6 words remote I/O: 16 6 words remote I/O: 10
Inverters sages
8 words remote I/O: 16 8 words remote I/O: 12 8 words remote I/O: 8
With explicit 4 words remote I/O: 32 4 words remote I/O: 25 ---
messages 6 words remote I/O: 21 6 words remote I/O: 16
8 words remote I/O: 16 8 words remote I/O: 12

● Communications with Configurator: Free Allocation

Applicable PLC CVM1/CV Series CS Series and C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE
DeviceNet (Master) Unit CVM1-DRM21-V1 C200HW-DRM21-V1
Supported communications Remote I/O and mes- Remote I/O and mes- Remote I/O
sages sages
Maximum number of Slaves 63 63 63
per DeviceNet (Master) Unit
Maximum number of controlled 6,400 (100 words × 4 Without messages: 1,280 (total of 4 blocks)
points per DeviceNet (Master) blocks) 4,800
Unit With messages: 1,600

1-20
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

Applicable PLC CVM1/CV Series CS Series and C200HS

C200HX/HG/HE
Allocation areas Core I/O Area: IR Area 1: IR 000 to IR 235
CIO 0000 to CIO 2555 IR Area 2: IR 300 to IR 511
CIO 0000 to CIO 2427
for CV500/CVM1-
CPU01(-V@)
CPU Bus Link Area: CS Series HR Area:
G008 to G255 HR: H000 to H099 HR 00 to HR 99
CIO: 1000 to 1063 LR Area:
C200HX/HG/HE LR 00 to LR 63
HR Area: HR 00 to HR
99
LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: CS Series DM Area:
D00000 to D24575 DM: D00000 to D05999 DM 0000 to DM 5999
D00000 to D08191 for C200HX/HG/HE
CV500/CVM1-CPU01 (- DM: DM 0000 to DM
V@) 5999
(DM 0000 to DM 4095
for C200HE-CPU11-
(Z)E)
Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order using
the Configurator.
The following limitations apply:
• The allocation areas are in 4 blocks (OUT 1, OUT 2, IN 1, and IN 2). Each
block consists of sequential words.
• 100 words max. per block.
• For Slaves with more than 8 points, the first byte cannot be specified in
leftmost bits (7 to 15).
Words are allocated to Slaves as follows:
• 8-point Slaves: Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of 1 word
• 16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word
• Slaves with more than 16-points: Allocated multiple words (For Slaves with
an odd number of bytes, the last byte will be the rightmost byte)
Maximum Without 63 4 remote I/O words: 63 4 words remote I/O: 20
number of explicit mes- 6 remote I/O words: 50 6 words remote I/O: 13
Inverters sages 8 remote I/O words: 37 8 remote I/O words: 10
(using one With explicit 63 4 remote I/O words: 25 ---
DeviceNet messages 6 remote I/O words: 16
(Master) Unit 8 remote I/O words: 12
only)
Maximum number of Inverters Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the
with more than one DeviceNet number of words allocated to the Inverters (4 or 6 words).
(Master) Unit Note 1. The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit, so it cannot be allo-
cated for remote I/O for Inverters.
Note 2. If the CPU Bus Link is used with a CVM1/CV-series PLC, the CPU
Bus Link Area will be used for the CPU Bus Link Therefore, the CPU
Bus Link Area cannot be allocated to Inverters for use with
DeviceNet if the CPU Bus Link is used.

1-21
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1

1-22
 Chapter 2

Example System Startup

2-1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples
2-2 Preparations
2-3 Setting and Wiring Hardware
2-4 Starting Communications
2-5 Checking Operation
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples

The examples shown here provide the basic operating procedures for DeviceNet.

2-1-1 Basic Procedures

The following list outlines the basic application procedures. For details on settings and connections,
refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit. For further details on Slave Units, refer
to the operation manual(s) for the Slave Units.

Preparing the Units

1.Select the appropriate Units. Refer to 2-2-1 Selecting Units.
2.Determine the appropriate wiring method. Refer to 2-2-2 Wiring.
3.Determine the appropriate method for supplying communications power. Refer to 2-2-3 Commu-
nications Power Supply.

Setting and Wiring Hardware

1.Separate and lay the cables.
2.Mount the DeviceNet (Master) Unit and specify the correct settings. Refer to 2-3-1 Mounting and
Setting the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.
3.Mount the Slave Units and specify the correct settings. Refer to 2-3-2 Mounting and Setting
Slaves.
4.Mount other devices to be connected to the Network. Refer to 2-3-3 Mounting Connecting Devic-
es.
5.Connect the cables. Refer to 2-3-4 Connecting Cables.
6.Wire the I/O cables. Refer to 2-3-4 Connecting Cables.

Starting Communications
1.Create the I/O tables. Refer to 2-4-1 Creating I/O Tables for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.
2.Start up the system. Refer to 2-4-2 Starting the System.
3.Create and register the scan list. Refer to 2-4-3 Creating and Registering Scan Lists.

Checking Operations
1.Check the status of the indicators on the Unit. Refer to 2-5-1 Indicator Status.
2.Check that data is reading and writing properly. Refer to 2-5-2 Reading and Writing Data.

Note The examples provided in this section show the minimum settings needed to operate the sys-
tem. If details on other settings for actual operation are required, refer to the operation manual
for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit and the operation manual(s) for the Slave Units.

2-2
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-1-2 System Configuration Example

The following diagram shows the operating procedure using a system configuration example.
The system configuration shown here uses Thin Cables.
The following diagram is simplified, so it does not include the separate I/O power supply that must be
provided to the Output Unit (or Expansion Output Unit).
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
DeviceNet Master Unit;
(Node 63) S82K-05024 24 VDC
Power Supply
(100 VAC, 50 W)
Communications
power supply
DRT2-OD16 Remote I/O
DCN1-1C Terminal
T-branch Tap 16 transistor outputs;
DRT2-ID16 Remote XWT-OD08 Remote I/O
I/O Terminal; Terminal Expansion Unit;
16 transistor inputs; DCN1-3C DCN1-1C 8 transistor outputs;
(Node 01) T-branch Tap T-branch Tap (Node 05)

DRT2-OD16 Remote
I/O Terminal;
16 transistor outputs;
(Node 02)

3G3MV-A2001 SYSDRIVE Inverter

3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
Communications Unit
Occupies 2 input words (32 input bits)
Terminating Resistor + 2 output words (32 output bits).
(Node 03)

2-3
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-2 Preparations

2-2-1 Selecting Units

Select the following Units as shown in 2-1-2 System Configuration Example.
DeviceNet (Master) Unit:CS1W-DRM21
Slave Units: DRT2-ID16
DRT2-OD16
3G3MV-PDRT2 + 3G3MV-A2001
DRT2-OD16 + XWT-OD08
There is a complete line of OMRON DeviceNet (Master) Units and Slave Units available that are
compatible with DeviceNet. Select Units that suit the needs of the system.

2-2-2 Wiring
Either Thick Cables or Thin Cables can be used to wire a DeviceNet Network.
Flexible branching of cables is possible by using either T-branch Taps or multi-drop connections.
Restrictions on the maximum network length and total branch line length depend on the baud rate
and type of cable used. For details on network configurations and specifications, refer to the
DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267).
Here, Thin Cables are used and T-branch connection are used to connect Slaves to the trunk line, as
shown in 2-1-2 System Configuration Example.

2-4
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-2-3 Communications Power Supply

Each node (Master or Slave) must be supplied with a 24-V DC power supply for proper DeviceNet
communications.
The communications power, however, can be supplied by communications cables and does not
require separate wiring.
For systems that have a short maximum network length, power can be supplied to all nodes by using
one communications power supply.
Various conditions, constraints, and measures affect how the communications power is supplied. In
the examples shown here, the power is supplied from one communications power supply, and com-
munications cables are connected using T-branch Taps.
For details on methods of supplying communications power, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Man-
ual (W267).

Note Refer to 3-2-5 Making Multi-drop Connections when using Thick Cables and multi-drop con-
nections for wiring.

2-5
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-3 Setting and Wiring Hardware

Use the following procedures to mount, set, and wire the hardware.

2-3-1 Mounting and Setting the DeviceNet (Master) Unit

■ Settings
The components, functions, and switch settings for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21
DeviceNet (Master) Unit mounted to a CS/CJ-series PLC are shown as an example in the following
diagram.
For information on switch settings, refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

■ CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
DRM21 CS
MS
Indicators
NS

UNIT
No. 210FE Unit No. switch
6543
DCB

A987 This rotary switch sets the single-digit hexadecimal

NODE unit number of the Master on the DeviceNet network.
ADR 1 0 9 10 9
87

32
87
32

X101 X100
65 4 65 4
Node address switches
1 DR0 These rotary switches set the double-digit decimal
1 2 3 4

2 DR1
3 ESTP node address of the Unit.
4 HOLD
ON
DIP switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate
Pins 3: Continue/stop remote I/O communications
for error (for Master functions)
Pin 4: Hold/clear I/O for communications error
(for Slave functions).
Communications connector
This connector is connected to the Network
communications cable. Communications power is
also supplied through this connector. An XW4B-
05C1-H1-D Parallel Connector with Screws is
provided as the node connector.

2-6
Example System Startup Chapter 2
■ CJ1W-DRM21
DRM21
MS
Indicators
NS
Unit No. switch
UNIT
3456
This rotary switch sets the single-digit hexadecimal
EF 2
789A
01

BCD NO.

23 23
unit number of the Master on the DeviceNet network.
01
456

01
456

789 789

ON
Node address switches
4 HOLD These rotary switches set the double-digit decimal node address of the Unit.
1 2 3 4
ON

3 ESTP
2 DR1
1 DR0 DIP switches
These pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Baud rate
Pins 3: Continue/stop remote I/O communications for error
(for Master functions)
Pin 4: Hold/clear I/O for communications error (for Slave functions)
Communications connector
This connector is connected to the Network communications
cable. Communications power is also supplied through this
connector. An XW4B-05C1-H1-D Parallel Connector with
Screws is provided as the node connector.

■ Mounting
• The CS-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is mounted to the Backplane of the PLC in the same way as
other Units are normally mounted.
• CJ-series DeviceNet (Master) Units need no Backplane, so connect the Units together by joining
the connectors. For details on mounting DeviceNet (Master) Units to PLCs, and PLCs to control
panels, refer to the applicable PLC Operation Manual.

2-3-2 Mounting and Setting Slaves

■ Settings
The following example shows Slave settings. For details on how to set Slaves, refer to the explana-
tion in the Slave’s operation manual.
• DRT2-ID16 Remote I/O Terminals (transistor inputs)
Node address: 01
• DRT2-OD16 Remote I/O Terminals (transistor outputs)
Node address: 02
• 3G3MV-A2001 SYSDRIVE Inverter
3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit
Node address: 03
• DRT2-OD16 Remote I/O Terminals (transistor outputs)
XWT-OD08 Remote I/O Terminal Expansion Unit
Node address: 05

■ Mounting
Refer to the Inverter’s operation manual for details on mounting the Inverter.

2-7
Example System Startup Chapter 2
2-3-3 Mounting Connecting Devices
The following connecting devices require being mounted:
• T-branch Taps: Secure to the control panel with screws, or mount to a DIN track.
• Terminal-block Terminating Resistors: Secure to the control panel with screws.

2-3-4 Connecting Cables

■ Connecting Communications Cables

Connect the DeviceNet (Master) Unit and T-branch Taps, T-branch Taps and T-branch Taps, and T-
branch Taps and Slaves using Thin DeviceNet Communications Cables, as shown in the following
diagram.
When a Terminating Resistor is installed in the T-branch Tap, connect it to
the last T-branch Tap in the Network. The T-branch Tap must be no further
than 6 m from the final node.
CS Rack
24-V DC power supply
Communications
power supply

T-branch Tap

T-branch Tap T-branch Tap

Remote I/O Terminal Remote I/O Terminal

Remote I/O Terminal

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter +

DeviceNet Communications Unit
Terminating Resistor

If a Terminal-block Terminating Resistor is required, connect it to the end of an extension

cable (1 m max.) that is connected to the final node.

Use the following procedure to connect the cables. Refer to the DRT2 DeviceNet Slaves Operation
Manual (W404) for details.
1.Prepare the communications cables and attach the connectors to the cables.
2.Connect the communications cable connectors to the node connectors on the DeviceNet (Master)
Unit, T-branch Taps, and Slaves.

2-8
Example System Startup Chapter 2
■ Wiring the Remote I/O Terminal
Connect the I/O power supply for I/O devices and the I/O signal lines to the Remote I/O Terminals.
Attach M3 crimp terminals to the power lines and I/O signal lines and then connect them to the termi-
nal block.

■ Wiring the Inverter

Connect the power supply (200 VAC) to the Inverter.
When required, connect an I/O power supply for I/O devices and the I/O signal lines to the Inverter.

Note Refer to the Inverter’s operation manual for details on wiring the terminal block.

2-9
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-4 Starting Communications

After setting and wiring the hardware, turn ON the communications power supply, the internal power
supply of each node, and the I/O power supply, and then start communications using the following
procedure.

2-4-1 Creating I/O Tables for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit

I/O tables must be created in the CPU Unit to distinguish between the different Slaves mounted to
the PLC. Turn ON the PLC to which the DeviceNet (Master) Unit is mounted, connect the Peripheral
Devices to the PLC, and create the I/O tables. After the I/O tables have been created, turn OFF the
power to the PLC.
The following example shows the procedure for creating I/O tables using a Programming Console.
For details on creating I/O tables, refer to the operation manual for the Peripheral Device being used.
Turn ON the power to the
Master Unit

PROGRAM Switch the CPU Unit of

the Master Unit to
PROGRAM mode.

<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD!

CLR MONTR CLR

000000 CT00

CH
FUN SHIFT
*DM

00000IOTBL ?
?-?U=

CHG

00000IOTBL WRIT
????

9 7 1 3 WRITE

00000IOTBL WRIT
9713

WRITE

00000IOTBL WRIT
OK

0 CLR

2-10
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-4-2 Starting the System

Turn ON the communications power supply and the power to other nodes in the following order.
1.Turn ON the communications power supply.
2.Turn ON the power to each Slave.
3.Turn ON the power to the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

Note The power supplies listed above can all be turned ON simultaneously. The external I/O power
supply can be turned ON at any time.

2-4-3 Creating and Registering Scan Lists

Scan lists are lists that register the information that is transferred between DeviceNet (Master) Units
and Slaves. The DeviceNet (Master) Unit compares the scan list with the status of the Slave currently
being communicated with, so communications with the Slave are always being checked.
For details on scan lists and remote I/O communications, refer to the operation manual for the
DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

Note When a scan list is disabled, communications are possible with all Slaves on the DeviceNet
Network with fixed allocations. Without scan lists, however, the DeviceNet (Master) Unit cannot
check if there is an error in a Slave.
For normal operations, always enable the scan lists.

■ Precautions

● User I/O Allocations

The user can allocate any words for Slave I/O for the DeviceNet I/O Areas (IN Area, OUT Area) in the
DeviceNet (Master) Unit.
When user allocations are used, scan lists must be created with a DeviceNet Configurator and regis-
tered in the DeviceNet (Master) Unit. The scan list is enabled as soon as it is registered, and remote
I/O communications start according to the scan list.
For details, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual (W267) and the DeviceNet Configurator Opera-
tion Manual (W382).

● Fixed I/O Allocations

Slave I/O is allocated in the DeviceNet I/O area (IN Area, OUT Area) in the DeviceNet (Master) Unit
in the same order as the Slave node addresses.
When fixed allocations are used, the scan lists are automatically created and registered using the
DeviceNet (Master) Unit's software switches. The scan list is enabled as soon as it is registered, and
remote I/O communications start according to the scan list. When scan list is enabled, the mode is
called the scan list-enabled mode.
The registered scan lists can be cleared using the software switches. When scan lists are cleared
(disabled), the mode is called the scan list-disabled mode.

2-11
Example System Startup Chapter 2
■ Creating and Registering Fixed Allocation Scan Lists
The method of creating and registering scan lists for fixed allocation using Programming Console
and a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is explained here. For details on operating Peripheral
Devices, refer to the operation manual for the Peripheral Device being used with the PLC. For details
on creating scan lists, refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

● Creating and Registering Scan Lists

Use the following procedure to create, register, and enable the scan lists.
In the following example, n = 1500 + (25 × unit number).

Clearing and Creating Scan Lists

Switch the operating mode switch to PROGRAM mode.
Enable the DeviceNet (Master) Unit functions. Set the DeviceNet (Master) Unit function enable
switch (bit 06 of word n) from OFF to ON.
Clear the scan lists. Set the scan list clear switch (bit 01 of word n) from OFF to ON.
Select the fixed allocation areas 1 to 3. Set the DeviceNet (Master) Unit's setting switch for fixed allo-
cation areas 1 to 3 (bit 00 of word n) from OFF to ON.
Enable the scan lists. Set the scan list enable switch (bit 00 of word n) from OFF to ON.
Switch the operating mode switch to RUN or MONITOR mode.

Checking the Normal Slave Table

Monitor the normal Slave table (words n+20 to n+23) and confirm that the corresponding bits are ON.
In the normal Slave table, the corresponding bits will be ON for the nodes that are communicating
properly.

Note With this Chapter’s example system configuration, a value of 002E in word n+20 indicates nor-
mal operation.

2-12
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-5 Checking Operation

Use the procedures provided here to check that I/O communications are operating normally.

2-5-1 Indicator Status

I/O communications are operating normally if the MS and NS indicators for all nodes are lit green,
and the 7-segment indicator on the front panel of the DeviceNet (Master) Unit is displaying the node
address of the DeviceNet (Master) Unit as shown in the following diagram, and the scan list is
enabled. The following example shows a node address of 63 for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit.
Master Unit
7-segment Display

ON: Slave function operation is stopped.

OFF: Scan list enabled.
Master Unit node address 63
When an error has occurred, the display
alternates between the error code and the
node address where the error occurred.

2-5-2 Reading and Writing Data

Connect the Peripheral Device for the PLC to the DeviceNet (Master) Unit, write the DeviceNet (Mas-
ter) Unit's OUT Area and read the IN Area, and check that the data are the same in the Slaves.
Refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet (Master) Unit for details on OUT Area and IN Area
addresses and how to allocate Slave I/O.

■ I/O between Remote I/O Terminals

Create ladder programs in the PLC of the DeviceNet (Master) Unit, and check that when the switch
on the DRT2-ID16 Input Terminal turns ON, the indicator on the DRT2-OD16 Output Terminal is ON.
Master Unit

DRT2-ID16 Remote I/O

Terminal, 16 transistor
inputs (Node 01)
Switch 1 (bit 00)

330100 320200
DRT2-OD16 Remote I/O Terminal,
16 transistor outputs (Node 02)
Indicator (bit 00)

2-13
Example System Startup Chapter 2
■ Example IN Area and OUT Area
The following diagram shows the IN and OUT Area allocations for this Chapter’s example system
configuration when fixed I/O allocation is used for remote I/O communications.
Word OUT Area Word IN Area Fixed allocation
3200 Not used 3300 Not used (Node 0)
3201 Not used 3301 DRT2-ID16 (node 1) Node 1
3202 DRT2-OD16 (node 2) 3302 Not used Node 2
3203 3G3MV-PDRT2 3303 3G3MV-PDRT2 Node 3
3204 (node 3) 3304 (node 3) (Node 4)
3205 DRT2-OD16 (node 5) 3304 Not used Node 5
3206 Not used XWT-OD08 3304 Not used (Node 6)
3207 Not used 3304 Not used (Node 7)
3208 Not used 3304 Not used (Node 8)
3209 Not used 3304 Not used (Node 9)

When shipped, the Inverter’s default communications setting is “Standard Remote I/O”, so the follow-
ing functions are allocated to the node 3 Inverter.

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd 3203 Right- 0 Net Ref- Net Con- Fault Reverse/ Forward/
most erence trol Reset stop stop
Left- 1
most
Wd 3204 Right- 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd 3303 Right- 0 At Refer- Refer- Control Inverter During During Alarm Fault
most ence ence From Net Ready reverse forward (minor
From Net run run fault)
Left- 1
most
Wd 3304 Right- 2 Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)
most

Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

2-14
Example System Startup Chapter 2
■ Verification Procedure
Use the following procedure to operate the Inverter and verify proper operation.
The operational check is performed with the Inverter’s forward reference. Thoroughly confirm the
safety of the equipment before operating the system.

Note Refer to the preceding page for details on the contents of each word.

000000 CT00
Monitor word 3303.

CLR SHIFT CH 3 3 0 3 MONTR

03303 0010
Display word 3203 in the same window.

SHIFT CH 3 2 0 3 MONTR

03203 0000
03303 0010 Write the value 0060 (Net Ctrl. = 1 and Net Ref. = 1) to word 3203 to enable the network.

CHG 0 0 6 0 WRITE

03203 0060 Change word 3303 (Ref. From Net = 1 and Ctrl. From Net = 1) to confirm rights to the
communications reference.
03303 0070 A frequency of 0.00 will be displayed in the data display on the front of the Inverter.
Display word 3204.

03204 0000
Input 50.00 Hz (5,000 decimal = 1388 hexadecimal) to word 3204 to change the
03303 0070 frequency reference.
CHG 1 3 8 8 WRITE

A frequency of 50.00 will be displayed in the data display on the front of the Inverter.
03204 1388 Verify the frequency.
03303 0070
Return to the display of word 3203.

03203 0060 Input the forward reference (Net Ctrl. = 1, Net Ref. = 1, and RUN/STOP = 1) to word
03303 0070 3203 to input the forward reference.

CHG 0 0 6 1 WRITE

03203 0060 The “During forward run” flag will go ON in word 3303.
03303 0074
Turn OFF the forward reference and reverse reference in word 3203 (Net Ctrl. = 1,
Net Ref. = 1, Forward/Stop = 0, Reverse/Stop = 0) to input the stop reference.

CHG 0 0 6 0 WRITE

03203 0060 The “During forward run” flag will go OFF in word 3303. Verify that operation stops.
03303 0070

2-15
Example System Startup Chapter 2

2-16
 Chapter 3

Setup and Wiring

3-1 Nomenclature and Settings
3-2 Installation and Wiring
3-3 Communications Line Noise Prevention
3-4 Conformity to EC Directives
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-1 Nomenclature and Settings

3-1-1 Names of Parts

● 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit

MS MS indicator
NODE ADR NS NS indicator
×10 ×1
4 5 6 4 5 6

Node address setting pins

2 3

7 8

2 3

7 8

9 0 1 9 0 1

Shield grounding wire

Connector terminal block (TC)

3-2
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
● 3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card

(Green) MS indicator
(Red)
Terminal block (TC)
(Green) NS indicator
(Red)

4 5 6 4 5 6

2 3

7 8

2 3

7 8
9 0 1 9 0 1

Node address setting switches (× 10) (× 1)

Shield grounding wire

3-1-2 Terminal Block

The following table provides details of the terminal block, which connects to the communications line.
Sticker color Code Cable color Details
Black V− Black Communications power supply ground.
Blue CAN L Blue Communications data low side.
--- SG (Shield) Shield connection.
White CAN H White Communications data high side.
Red V+ Red Communications power supply, 24 V DC.

3G3MV-PDRT2 Terminal Block 3G3RV-PDRT2 Terminal Block

Black Blue White Red Black Blue White Red

3-3
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
3-1-3 Operation Indicators
The DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card has 2 operation indicators that show the status of the
power and communications as described in the following table.
Indicator Display Meaning
Color Status
MS Green Lit Power is being supplied and the Unit/Card is operating normally.
Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations for communications are incom-
plete.
Red Lit A fatal error (hardware error) has occurred in the Unit/Card.
Flashing A non-fatal error, such as a switch setting error, has occurred.
--- Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter.
The Unit/Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied
to it.
NS Green Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating normally.
(Online and communications connection established.)
Flashing The Network is normal, but the communications connection with the Master
Unit is not established.
Red Lit A fatal communications error has occurred.
A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address
duplication or Bus OFF. (These errors make communications impossible.)
Flashing A non-fatal communications error has occurred due to communications time-
out.
--- Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred (offline). For example, the Network
does not exist, power is not supplied to the Unit, or the baud rates do not
match.

3-1-4 Node Address Settings

A unique number (called a node address) is assigned to each Master/Slave in order to manage com-
munications in the network.
There are two ways to set the node addresses. The node addresses can be set with the rotary
switches on the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card or from the Configurator.

■ Setting the Node Address with the Rotary Switches

4 5 6 4 5 6
2 3

7 8

2 3

7 8

9 0 1 9 0 1

Node address setting (×1)

Node address setting (×10)

Set the 10s digit with the left switch and the 1s digit with the right switch (up to node address 63).
When the node address is set to a value between 64 and 99, the node address can be set from the
Configurator. (See Configurator setting procedure below.)

Note The Unit/Card reads the node address setting on the rotary switches when the power is turned
ON.

3-4
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
■ Setting the Node Address from the Configurator
1.Double-click the icon of the corresponding Slave (Inverter) in the Network Configuration Window,
or click the right mouse button over the icon and select Change Node Address.

2. A Node Address Setting Window will be displayed. Input the desired node address.

3.Click the OK Button.

Note Any node address between 0 and 63 can be set as long is it is not duplicated in another Master
or Slave in the network. If the node address is duplicated in another node in the network, an
error will occur and the Slave will not be able to participate in network communications.

3-5
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-2 Installation and Wiring

!WARNING Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal cov-
ers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Leave them mounted in place
while power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock, mal-
function, or damage to the product.

!WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel.

Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

!WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the
power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover. Not doing so
may result in electrical shock.

!WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the
cables. Doing so may result in electrical shock, operation stoppage, or burning.

!WARNING Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety. Equipment damage
may result. This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for
communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation.

!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit. Doing either of these may result
in electrical shock, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.

• Locations subject to direct sunlight.

• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifi-
cations.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.

!Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire
or malfunction.

3-6
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
!Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.

!Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage
to the product.

!Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result
in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

!Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.

!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the
following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.

• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.

3-2-1 3G3MV DeviceNet Communications Unit Installation

!Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Unit, always turn OFF the power to the
SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to turn OFF.

■ Mounting Procedure
1.Turn OFF the main circuit power supply for the Inverter, wait for at least one minute from the time
the LED indicator or the CHARGE indicator goes out, and remove the front cover of the Inverter
along with the Operator.

FREF FOUT IOUT MNTR

F/R LO/RE PRGM

RUN MIN MAX

CN1 FREQUENCY

STOP
DIGITAL OPERATOR
RESET PJVOP140
CN2

(1)

RUN
SYSDRIVE
3G3MV INVERTER ALARM

200V 3PHASE NPIT31297-404-1 1.5kW

WARNING - Risk of electric shock.

Read manual before installing.
Wait 1 minute for capacitor discharge after
disconnecting power supply.
To conform to requirements, make sure
to ground the supply neutral for 400V class.
'
AVERTISSMENT - Risque de decharge
electrique. '

Lisez manuel avant d'installer.

'
Attendez 1 minute apres d'etachment ' '
d'electricite,
juscequ'a' les condensateurs sont decharges.
' '
'
Pour repondre aux exigences , s'assurer que~
le neutre est a' la masse pour la serie
' 400V.

3-7
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
2.Wire the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals of the Inverter. (When the Communi-
cations Unit is mounted, the terminal block of the Inverter will be covered. Therefore, be sure to
complete wiring for the Inverter terminals first.)
3.When the Operator of the Inverter is removed, it will be possible to see a block secured at three
places underneath. Using pliers or another appropriate tool, loosen the fixings, and remove the
block. The connector for Optional Unit connections will become visible. At this point, ensure that
dirt or foreign objects do not enter the connector.
(3) Using pliers, cut sections indicated with “X.”

CN1

CN2

(2) Wire the main circuit terminals

and control circuit terminals.

4.Mount the mounting base (included as an accessory) onto the screw-holes originally used for hold-
ing the Operator and the terminal cover to the body of the Inverter, and using the screws provided
as accessories, secure the mounting base.
(4) Mounting base

CN1

CN2

5.On the opposite side of the DeviceNet Communications Unit, there is a ground terminal that con-
nects to the shield wire for the Communications Cable. Connect this ground terminal to the FG
terminal of the Inverter.

3-8
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

DeviceNet CN1
Communications
MS
Unit CN2
NODE ADRNS

(5) Wire shield grounding wire to the Inverter’s

FG terminal.

Note: Cut the shield grounding wire to the proper

length before wiring.

6.After aligning the positions of the DeviceNet Communications Unit connector and the Inverter con-
nector, push the frames of the Inverter and the Unit together until they click.
7.Tighten the fixing screws on the upper part of the DeviceNet Communications Unit, to the mount-
ing base attached in step 4.
8.Wire the communications cables, and set the Unit’s node address.
9.Attach the Operator and the terminal cover to the front side of the DeviceNet Communications
Unit, and secure them by tightening the screw in the center.
10.Attach the MS and NS stickers (on the provided sheet of DeviceNet indicators labels) over the
RUN and ALARM labels on the front cover. (The LED indicator functions have changed from RUN
to MS and from ALARM to NS.)

■ Connecting Communications Cables

This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the
DeviceNet Network.
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors.

Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Unit of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables.
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.

1.Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering, being careful not to damage the shield weaving un-
derneath. Do not remove more than about 30 mm; removing too much of the covering can result
in short circuits.

3-9
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
Approx. 30 mm

2.Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines, power lines, and the shielding wire. The
shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines, but it is harder than the weaving.
Shielding wire

3.Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines. Strip the
covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals. Twist together
the wires of each of the signal and power lines.

Strip to match the crimp terminals

4.Attach the solderless crimp terminals to the stripped wire ends and apply electrical tape or heat-
shrink tubing to the terminal shaft.
Verify that the each wire is being connected to the correct contact and insert the signal lines, power
lines, and shield wire into the connector holes. The following diagram shows the proper order of
insertion (red, white, shield, blue, and black, top to bottom).
In connectors without set screws, it isn’t necessary to tighten set screws as it was in earlier mod-
els. Press the orange button while inserting each wire fully into the connector. After inserting the
wire, release the orange button and pull lightly on each wire to verify that it is properly installed in
the connector.

Red (V+)
White (CAN H)

Shield

Blue (CAN L)

Black (V−)

3-10
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
The Master and Slave Unit connectors have colored stickers that correspond to the wire colors.
When wiring, the sticker color and wire color can be compared to verify that the wiring is correct.
The following table shows the cable colors.
Sticker color Code Cable color Details
Black V− Black Communications power supply ground.
Blue CAN L Blue Communications data low side.
--- SG (Shield) Shield connection.
White CAN H White Communications data high side.
Red V+ Red Communications power supply, 24 V DC.

■ Wiring the Inverter

● 3G3MV Series
When the DeviceNet Communications Unit is installed, the Inverter’s main circuit and control circuit
terminals will be inaccessible, so always wire the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals
in advance according to the directions in the User’s Manual.

3-2-2 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation

!Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Card, always turn OFF the power to the
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to
turn OFF.

■ Mounting Procedure
1.Turn OFF the Inverter, wait for at least 5 minutes, remove the front cover of the Inverter, and check
that the CHARGE indicator is not lit.
2.Mount the Optional Card to the option C area.
3.The 3G3RV and 3G3PV has a securing latch for option C and option D, so the securing latch must
be removed.
4.Insert the provided spacers into the spacer holes on the mounting base of the Inverter.
5.After properly engaging the connectors of the Optional Card and control circuit board, insert the
spacers to the spacer holes of the Optional Card, and press the Optional Card until the spacers
click.
6.If a 3G3RV or 3G3PV is being used, replace the securing latch that was removed in step 3.
7.Connect the shield grounding wire of the Optional Card to FG terminal 12 (E) on the control circuit
board of the Inverter.
8.Press the top of the connector 2CN and check that the apexes of the triangular marks on both
sides match.

3-11
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
Option A Control Circuit
Board
7CN
Connector 4CN
for option A area

Make sure that the Option C

apexes of the black Connector
triangular marks match 2CN for
option C area

Securing
latch (3G3RV
only)
Connector 3CN
Squeeze and pull to remove. for option D area

Front View Side View

Note When the DeviceNet Communications Card is mounted, other Optional Cards cannot be
mounted in the C area.

■ Communications Cable Wiring

This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the
DeviceNet Network.
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors.

Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables.
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.

1.Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering, being careful not to damage the shield weaving un-
derneath. Do not remove more than about 30 mm; removing too much of the covering can result
in short circuits.
Approx. 30 mm

2.Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines, power lines, and the shielding wire. The
shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines, but it is harder than the weaving.
Shielding wire

3.Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines. Strip the
covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals. Twist together
the wires of each of the signal and power lines.

3-12
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

Strip to match the crimp terminals

■ DeviceNet Communications Card Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

1.Loosen the terminal screws using a thin flat-blade screwdriver.
2.Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3.Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0.22 to 0.25 N·m.
Note 1. Separate the DeviceNet communications cables from the main circuit wiring and other pow-
er lines.
Note 2. Do not solder the ends of the electric wires. Doing so may cause contact failure.
Note 3. If straight crimp terminals are not used, strip the electrical wires to a length of 5.5 mm.
Note 4. Do not tighten the screws with a torque exceeding 0.5 N·m. Doing so may damage the ter-
minal block. If the screws are too loose, however, malfunctions or short circuits may result.
Thin flat-blade screwdriver

Terminal block (TC)

Strip to 5.5 mm
(if straight crimp
terminal is not used).

Wire Straight crimp

terminal or
unsoldered cable

Black Blue White Red

3-13
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
■ Inverter Wiring

● 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Series
Keep the DeviceNet wiring separated from the main circuit wiring as much as possible. Do not wire
them together.

3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters of 5.5 kW or Less

3G3FV Inverters of 15 kW or Less
Remove the plastic knockout on the side of the Inverter. Remove the knockout with snips and wire
through this side hole.

3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters of 7.5 kW or More

3G3FV Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
• Route the DeviceNet communications line along the left side of the DeviceNet Communications
Card and wire it to the Card.
• Do not bundle the control wiring and main circuit wiring together.

DeviceNet
Communica- Operator
tions Card
DeviceNet
communications
line wiring

Control wiring Main circuit wiring

3-14
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-2-3 Connecting Communications Cables to T-branch Taps

To allow for easier maintenance, use a T-branch Tap or T-branch wiring to connect the DeviceNet
Communications Unit. This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector
attached to a T-branch Tap.
There are two kinds of T-branch Taps, one makes a single branch and the other makes three
branches, but the cable connections are the same for both. The connectors indicated by asterisks in
the following diagrams have the least resistance and these connectors should be used for the trunk
line connections. When using a T-branch Tap on a drop line, connect the longest drop line to these
connectors.

● DCN1-1C T-branch Tap

* Use for trunk line of
longest drop line.

● DCN1-3C T-branch Tap

* Use for trunk line of
longest drop line.

● T-branch Tap Connectors

The required number of connectors (on cable side) for T-branch Taps are supplied with the product.
Name Plug with Screw Flange
Model XW4B-05C1-H1-D
Manufacturer OMRON
Specifications One per terminal opening, with set screws

3-15
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
Align the cable connector with the socket on the T-branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and
fully insert the connector into the socket. Tighten the set screws to secure the connection. Tighten
the screws to a torque of 0.3 N·m.

Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply
when connecting it to the T-branch Tap. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.

3-2-4 Connecting Terminating Resistors

Terminating resistors must be connected at each end of the trunk line. Use the methods described
here to connect the Terminating Resistors.

● T-branch Tap Terminating Resistor

A Terminating Resistor is included with the T-branch Tap. Insert the Terminating Resistor into the T-
branch Tap as shown in the following diagram. The Terminating Resistor can face in either direction.

● Terminal-block Terminating Resistor

21 max.

DRS1-T
Model DRS1-T
Specifications 121 Ω±1%, 1/4W
20 Manufacturer OMRON
41 max. 20 max.

A Terminating Resistor is built into the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. To connect the cable to
the Terminating Resistor, attach standard M3 crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw
the terminals to the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Tighten to a torque of 0.5 N·m.

3-16
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

6.0 mm max. 6.0 mm max.

Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply
when connecting it to the terminal block. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.

3-2-5 Making Multi-drop Connections

■ Using the Connector Provided with Unit (with Thin Cable)

When connecting thin cable with the multi-drop method, it is possible to insert two wires with the
same color into the same hole as shown in the following diagram.

Example: Connector without Set Screws

Insert the two wires into the same crimp terminal, as shown below.
Inserting two power
supply wires

Crimp terminal Cables

We recommend the following Phoenix Contact crimp terminals and crimping tool.
Crimp terminal Crimping Tool
Model: AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH (part number 3200933) Model: UD06 (part number1204436)

3-17
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
■ Thick Cables and Multi-drop Connections Using Multi-branch Parallel
Connectors
Multi-drop connections are possible when using 3G3MV-PDRT2 with an Inverter (except 5.5-kW or
7.5-kW models), by using the following connectors.
XW4G-05C4-TF-D XW4B-05C4-TF-D

(Without set screws) (With set screws)

Note These connectors cannot be used with the following models. Use the T-branch Connectors
shown in 3-2-3 Connecting Communications Cables to T-branch Taps instead.

• 3G3MV Series (5.5-kW and 7.5-kW models)

• 3G3RV Series
• 3G3FV Series

3-2-6 Supplying Communications Power through T-branch Tap

When supplying the communications power supply through a T-branch Tap, attach the power supply
cables V+ and V- lines just like the communications lines. When there is a communications power
supply at just one point, connect the shield wire and ground line (100 Ω max.) at the same time as
shown in the following diagram.
T-branch Tap or
Power Supply Tap
V−
CAN H
Shield Communications cable
CAN L
V+
Communications
power supply
FG FG
Communications
power supply

Ground to 100 Ω max.

Ground to 100 Ω max.
Ground to 100 Ω max.
(at one point only).

3-18
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-2-7 Recommended Products

● Recommended Crimp Terminals

We recommend the following crimp terminals.
Phoenix Contact AI Series AI-0.5-8WH-B (part number 3201369)
Insert cable and crimp.

Crimp terminal Cable

1.0 mm dia.
8

14

2.6 mm dia.

We recommend the following crimp tool: Phoenix Contact ZA3

● Screwdriver for Set Screws

We recommend the following screwdriver for connectors with set screws: OMRON XW4Z-00C
Tip dimensions
Side view Front view

0.6 mm 3.5 mm

3-19
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-3 Communications Line Noise Prevention

3-3-1 Communications Line Noise

The communications line sends and receives high-speed pulse signals, and checks whether the data
is correct by checking the sequence of the signals. If the amount of noise on the communications line
is too great, the interference will alter the communications signal data, and communications will be
impossible. Communications lines are more sensitive and require higher speeds than normal I/O
lines, so be sure that noise does not interfere with communications. Use the preventative noise coun-
termeasures described here when configuring the system to ensure smooth system start up.

3-3-2 Grounding the Network

■ Grounding the Network

The DeviceNet Network must be grounded at only one location so that a ground loop is not created.
The ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network. Connect the
cable shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a
ground of 100 Ω max., as shown in the following diagram.
Power Supply Tap

CAN H CAN H
Shield Shield
Communications cable
CAN L CAN L

Ground terminal

FG
Communications
power supply

Ground (100 Ω max.)

If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same Network, ground only the
one nearest the center of the Network. Do not connect the shield wire at the other power supplies.
Note 1. Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one location in the Network.
Note 2. Always ground to 100 Ω or less.
Note 3. Always use a separate ground. Never use the same ground as for Inverters or other drive
system devices.

3-20
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
■ Grounding the DeviceNet Communications Unit
The DeviceNet Communications Unit should be grounded according to DeviceNet recommendations
installing a noise filter as shown in the following diagram. The ground is normally wired to the ground
terminal ( ).

Note If the cable grounded to the Inverter is not sufficient and is receiving noise interference, discon-
nect the grounding cable.

Shield

3-3-3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention

The communications power supply is the most important power supply in a DeviceNet Network. The
following measures will prevent noise in the communications power supply.
• Use the recommended power supply (S82H/S82J) made by OMRON for communications.
• Use an independent power supply for communications.
• Make sure to install a noise filter on the primary AC input side of the communications power supply.
• Always use a control system power supply for the primary AC side of the communications power
supply that is not shared with power devices, such as Inverters or motors.
If noise interference remains in cables for which noise countermeasures have been implemented, the
following countermeasures may be effective.

● Communications Cable Shielding

Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it. This will filter the noise that
flows from the ground to the communications cable and will filter the noise current that flows in the
shielding wire.

● Communications Power Supply

Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it. This will also filter the noise that
flows from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise cur-
rent that flows in the shielding wire. The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and
the capacitor as shown below. The ground (FG) terminal must be suspended and the control panel
for the power supply itself must be insulated.

3-21
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
Switching Power Supply Configuration
Switching power supply

Power
AC power supply AC input supply DC output
circuit

Casing

Suspending the Communications Power Supply

S82J power supply

DC power
supply

Insulating material (such as

S82Y-@@N (Mounting Tool) baked board or acrylic board)

When using S82J power supply When using other power supplies

3-3-4 Noise Prevention Wiring

• To prevent inductive noise, do not wire the communications line, PLC power lines, and other power
lines near to each other. Keep the power lines for Inverters, motors, regulators, and contactors, the
communications lines, and the PLC power lines separated from each other by at least 300 mm.
Also, provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines and power lines.
Suspended duct Floor duct
Low-voltage
cableCommunications (1) (2)
cable (1)
Communications line
PLC I/O Line (2)
Control cable 300 mm min.

PLC Power Line

General control circuit line
Shielding
Power cable 300 mm min. (1) Communications line
(1) (2) SYSMAC I/O Line
Power lines (2) Power line

Ground (100 Ω max.)

• Do not install communications lines and PLC power lines onto the control panel on which high-volt-
age devices are mounted.
• Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment (such as casings), the communications
cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible.

3-22
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
• Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point.
• If the same ground is used for the communications cables and communications power supply, there
is a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line. In
order to avoid this, be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for the communications
cables and the communications power supply are located as far from each other as possible.

!Caution Connect the communications signal lines (V+, CAN H, shield, CAN L, and V−) so
that they do not come into contact with each other.

If noise is generated, check the wiring.

• Communications may be performed even if the V+ and CAN H, or V− and CAN L, are in contact
with each other, but differential operation will not be performed, reducing resistance to noise.
• If the shield wire comes into contact with any of the signal lines, a high level of noise will be
superimposed on the line, reducing resistance to noise.

3-3-5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices

• Install surge suppressors on devices that generate noise, particularly devices that have an induc-
tive component such as motors, transformers, solenoids, and magnetic coils.
Surge suppressor Surge suppressor
(Installed next to device) (Installed next to device)

DC input type Device (such as a motor) AC input type Device (such as a motor)

• If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device, installing a ferrite core directly next to the device's
contactors, such as a contactor may be effective.
Ferrite core 0443-164151
Nisshin Electric Co, Ltd.

Device (such as a motor)

• Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply.
• When there are two or more communications power supplies, the communications power cables
can be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Supply Tap near the center of the communi-
cations cable. Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place.

3-23
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
When there is only one power supply
T-branch Tap or Power Supply Tap

Master

PS Slave

When there are two or more power supplies

Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap

Master

PS Slave PS Slave PS

3-24
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3

3-4 Conformity to EC Directives

This section explains the concepts relating to and methods for complying with EC Directives for
DeviceNet Communications Units and DeviceNet Communications Cards. The applicable directives
are the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive.

■ Concepts

● EMC Directive
OMRON products that comply with EC Directives are electrical components that are built into and
used in manufacturing equipment. They also conform to related EMC standards (see the following
note) so that the devices or machines into which they are built can more easily conform to the EMC
standards. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards. It is the respon-
sibilities of the customer, however, to confirm whether the products conform to the standards in the
system used by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON products that comply with EC Directives will vary depend-
ing on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel in which the
OMRON products are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that
products and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.

Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:

EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61800-3
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61000-6-3
(EM61000-6-3 radiated emission: 10-m regulations)

● Low Voltage Directive

Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC or 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the
required safety standards (EN50178).

■ Conformity to EC Directives
The following countermeasures must always be implemented to conform to EC Directives when
using DeviceNet Communications Units or DeviceNet Communications Cards.

3-25
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
● 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit
Mount the Unit in a metal control panel, as shown in the diagram. Detailed precautions are given
below.

EMC-compliant
input noise
filter

3G3MV-PDRT

3G3MV
ZCAT3035-1330
Inverter
Clamp Filter
(manufactured
by TDK)

AC power
supply Motor
PLC with DeviceNet master

L1L2 L3 PE

Control Panel
3-phase Metal Mounting
noise filter Plate

Grounding
L1 L2 L3
E
faces
SYSDRIVE
3G3MV INVERTER

RUN

ALARM

MV-series
Inverter
RST UVW

Shielded
Grounding faces cable

IM Motor cable
3 (20 m max.)

Wiring Diagram for Inverter

• Remove any coating on the footprints of EMC filter, Inverter, and metal mounting plate in order to
ensure a metal contact between grounding faces.
• Mount the inverter on top of an EMC-compliant input noise filter and attach any Option Units.
• Use a shielded cable for the Inverter power supply line and connect via the EMC-compliant input
noise filter with the shortest cable length possible. Ground the shield at both ends of the cable.

3-26
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
• Use the shortest ground wire possible. For 400-V Inverters, ground the neutral point on the power
supply. Ground the metal control panel (and doors) at the same time.
• Use a shielded cable for the cable between the Inverter and motor as well. Keep the cable as short
as possible (20 m max.) and ground the shield at both ends of the cable. It is effective to mount a
clamp filter right next to the Inverter's output terminals.
• Use a conductive cable clamp to directly ground the shield to the ground plate.
• Ground the motor frame directly and connect the ground from the motor directly to the EMC-compli-
ant input noise filter.
• Use a ZCAT3035-1330 Clamp Filter on the communications cable, wind the cable in a loop around
it, and keep it away from the control panel.
• Use conductive packing on the doors of the control panel to increase shielding.
• Do not mount any wireless or other devices designed to generate electromagnetic waves.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply for communications.
• The Inverter's control terminals have only basic insulation. Further insulation must be provided if
the terminals are wired to a device that will ultimately come in contact with people.
Grounding the Shield

Ground plate
Cable clamp
(conductive) Shield mesh

3-27
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
● 3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card
Mount the DeviceNet Communications Card as shown in the diagram. Detailed precautions are given
below.
R S T PE
Remove any coating on
the grounding faces.

Mains
Inverter
Filter

Load
R S T U VW

Wiring length:
40 cm max.

Metal Plate

Remove any coating on

the grounding faces.
Wiring length:
20 m max.
IM

• Remove any coating on the footprints of EMC filter, Inverter, and metal mounting plate in order to
ensure a metal contact between grounding faces.
• Attach Option Units to the Inverter.
• Use a shielded cable for the Inverter's power supply line and connect via the EMC-compliant input
noise filter with the shortest cable length possible. Ground the shield at both ends of the cable.
• Use the shortest ground wire possible. For 400-V Inverters, ground the neutral point on the power
supply.
• Use a shielded cable for the cable between the Inverter and motor as well. Keep the cable as short
as possible (20 m max.) and ground the shield at both ends of the cable. It is effective to mount a
clamp filter right next to the Inverter's output terminals.
• Use a conductive cable clamp to directly ground the shield to the ground plate.
• Directly ground the motor frame.
• Use a ZCAT3035-1330 Clamp Filter on the communications cable, wind the cable in a loop around
it, and keep it away from the control panel.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply for communications.

3-28
 Chapter 4

SYSDRIVE Inverter
Settings
4-1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings
4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings
4-3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings

In order to perform DeviceNet communications, it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter
according to the application.

Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Unit when the power is
turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them.

4-1-1 Run Command Selection

Con- Register Name Content Setting Setting Default Write
stant number range unit setting during
(hex) operation
n003 0103 Run com- Selects the run/stop command 0, 1, 2, 1 0 No
mand source input method for the Inverter. 3
selection (Becomes valid when the
Remote mode is selected from
Local/Remote.)
0: Run/stop commands from
the Digital Operator are valid.
1: Terminal block (multi-func-
tion input) run commands are
valid.
2: RS-422/485 communica-
tions run commands are valid.
3: Run commands from the
Optional Unit (DeviceNet Com-
munications Unit) are valid.
Note In Local mode, run com-
mands are restricted to
those performed using
the operation keys of the
Digital Operator.

Perform the above setting according to the source of the run commands (forward operation, reverse
operation, STOP) in the application. When run commands (forward operation, reverse operation,
STOP) are always to be made from DeviceNet communications, set to “3."

■ Switching of Run Commands from DeviceNet Communications

There is a switching signal, “Net. Ctrl.,” for run commands from the standard remote I/O of the
DeviceNet Communications Unit. The input method for run commands can be changed in the follow-
ing way using the “Net. Ctrl.” signal.

Net. Ctrl. = 1 (ON)

Enables run commands from DeviceNet communications (remote I/O run commands become valid)
regardless of the setting in n003.

4-2
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4
Net. Ctrl. = 0 (OFF)
Enables the run command setting in n003.

4-1-2 Frequency Reference Selection

Con- Register Name Content Setting Setting Default Write
stant number range unit setting during
(hex) operation
n004 0104 Frequency Selects the frequency refer- 0 to 9 1 0 No
reference ence input method for the
source selec- Inverter. (Becomes valid when
tion the Remote mode is selected
from Local/Remote.)
0: Digital Operator frequency
settings are valid.
1: Frequency reference 1
(n024) is valid.
2: Frequency reference control
terminal (0 to 10-V voltage
input) is valid.
3: Frequency reference control
terminal (4 to 20-mA current
input) is valid.
4: Frequency reference control
terminal (0 to 20-mA current
input) is valid.
5: Pulse train reference control
terminal is valid.
6: Frequency reference from
RS-422/485 communications is
valid.
7: Multi-function analog voltage
input (0 to 10 V) is valid. (Used
when two analog inputs are
required for PID control. Nor-
mally not used.)
8: Multi-function analog current
input (4 to 20 mA) is valid.
(Used when two analog inputs
are required for PID control.
Normally not used.)
9: Frequency reference from
the Optional Unit (DeviceNet
Communications Unit) is valid.

Perform the above setting according to the source of the frequency reference in the application.
When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used, set to “9." If
this setting is performed, frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications.
However, frequency references 2 to 16 and the inching frequency can be set from DeviceNet com-
munications or the Digital Operator regardless of the setting of n004.

4-3
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4
■ Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications
There is a switching signal, “Net. Ref.,” for frequency references (speed references) from the stan-
dard remote I/O of the DeviceNet Communications Unit. The input method for frequency references
can be changed in the following ways using the “Net. Ref.” signal.

Net. Ref. = 1 (ON)

Enables frequency references from DeviceNet communications (remote I/O frequency references
become valid) regardless of the setting in n004.

Net. Ref. = 0 (OFF)

Enables the frequency reference setting in n004.

4-4
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-1-3 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units

Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies (speeds) used in
DeviceNet communications. The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the num-
ber of motor poles.
Con- Register Name Content Setting Setting Default Write
stant number range unit setting during
(hex) operation
n035 0123 Frequency Sets the units for the frequency 0 to 1 0 No
reference set- reference and frequency moni- 3999
ting and dis- tor that are set and referred to
play units by the Digital Operator.
0: Hz units
1: 0.1% units (max. frequency
is 100%)
2 to 39: r/min units (Set the
number of motor poles)
40 to 3999: Optional Unit set-
tings. (Specifies the value used
to set and display the maxi-
mum frequency.

@@@@
Set a value without
the decimal point.
Set the position of
the digit where the
decimal point is to
be displayed starting
from the rightmost
digit.
Example: To display the maxi-
mum frequency as
“50.0,” specify
“1500."

Note 1. Only the following parameters and monitor items will change for this setting.
Parameters
n024 to n032: Frequency references 1 to 8 and inching frequency command
n120 to n127: Frequency references 9 to 16
Monitor Items
U-01: Reference frequency monitor
U-02: Output frequency monitor
Note 2. The settings are valid in either Local or Remote mode.

4-5
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings

In order to perform DeviceNet communications, it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter
according to the application.

Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power
is turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply
them.

4-2-1 Frequency Reference Selection

• Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter. Select the method suitable for
the application.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
b1-01 0 Digital Operator Value set in d1-01 used. 1
1 Control circuit Set using analog input from control cir-
terminals cuit terminals.
2 RS-422/485 Set via RS-422/485 communications.
communications
3 Optional Card Set using DeviceNet Communications
Card.
4 Pulse input Set using pulse input from control circuit
terminals.

• When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used, set to “3."
If this setting is performed, frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communica-
tions. However, parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are
used for 3G3RV Inverters' frequency references 2 to 16 and inching frequency reference (d1-02 to
d1-17) regardless of the setting of b1-01.

■ Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications

There is a switching signal, “Net. Ref.,” for frequency references (speed references) from the stan-
dard remote I/O of the DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for frequency references
can be changed in the following ways using the “Net. Ref.” signal.

Net. Ref. = 1 (ON)

Enables frequency references from DeviceNet communications (remote I/O frequency references
become valid) regardless of the setting in b1-01.

Net. Ref. = 0 (OFF)

Enables the frequency reference setting in b1-01.

4-6
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-2-2 Inverter Operation Command Selection

• Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter. Select the method suit-
able for the application.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
b1-02 0 Digital Operator RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital 1
Operator
1 Control circuit Operation command input from control
terminals circuit terminals
2 RS-422/485 Operation commands received via RS-
communications 422/485 communications
3 Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet
Communications Card

• When operation commands (forward, reverse, stop) from the DeviceNet communications are to be
always used, set to “3."

■ Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications

There is a switching signal, “Net. Ctrl.,” for operation commands from the standard remote I/O of the
DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for operation commands can be changed in the
following ways using the “Net. Ctrl.” signal.

Net. Ctrl. = 1 (ON)

Enables operation commands from DeviceNet communications (remote I/O operation commands
become valid) regardless of the setting in b1-02.

Net. Ctrl. = 0 (OFF)

Enables the operation command setting in b1-02.

4-7
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4
4-2-3 DeviceNet Communications Settings
The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications. Set these
parameters according to the desired application.
Parameter Name Contents Setting Default
No. Operator display range setting
F6-01 Communications fault opera- Select the Inverter operation per- 0 to 3 1
tion formed when a communications
Comm Bus Flt Sel fault is detected.
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-
02 deceleration time/fault detec-
tion
1: Coasts to a stop/fault detection
2: Decelerates to a stop using the
C1-09 emergency stop time/
fault detection
3: Continues operating/alarm
detection (See note.)
F6-02 Communications external fault Select the detection method used 0, 1 0
input: detection method for the communications external
EFO Detection fault input from communications
(DeviceNet Communications
Card).
0: Faults always detected.
1: Faults detected only while run-
ning (i.e., when Run Com-
mands are input)
F6-03 Communications external fault Select the Inverter operation per- 0 to 3 1
input: operation formed when there is a communi-
EFO Fault Action cations external fault (EFO) input
from communications (DeviceNet
Communications Card).
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-
02 deceleration time/fault detec-
tion
1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
2: Decelerates to a stop using the
C1-09 emergency stop time/
fault detection
3: Continues operating/alarm
detection
F6-04 Not used Do not set. --- 0
Trace Sample Tim

Note If F6-01 is set to 3 (continues operating), the Inverter will continue operating when a communi-
cations fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before. Be sure to take
any steps necessary to ensure safety, such as installing a limit switch or an emergency stop
switch.

4-8
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-2-4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units

• Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies (speeds) used in
DeviceNet communications.
• The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the number of motor poles.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
o1-03 0 0.01 Hz units 0
1 0.01% units (max. frequency is 100%)
2 to 39 r/min units (Set the number of motor poles.)
40 to 39,999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum fre-
quency.
@@@@@
Set a 4-digit value without the decimal point.
Set the position of the digit where the decimal
point is to be displayed starting from the
rightmost digit.
Example: To display the maximum frequency as “200.0" specify
“12000."

4-9
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings

In order to perform DeviceNet communications, it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter
according to the application.

Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power
is turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply
them.

4-3-1 Frequency Reference Selection

• Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter. Select the method suitable for
the application.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
b1-01 0 Digital Operator Value set in d1-01 used. 1
1 External termi- Set using analog input from control cir-
nals cuit terminals.
2 Not used (Do not set.)
3 Optional Card Set using DeviceNet Communications
Card.

• When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used, set to “3."
If this setting is performed, frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communica-
tions. However, parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are
used for frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching frequency reference (d1-02 to d1-09) regard-
less of the setting of b1-01.

■ Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications

There is a switching signal, “Net. Ref.,” for frequency references (speed references) from the stan-
dard remote I/O of the DeviceNet Communications Card. This function cannot be used with the
3G3FV.
When it is necessary to switch frequency references from DeviceNet communications, change the
setting in parameter b1-01 with an explicit message (Class 64 hex, Instance 01 hex, Attribute 03
hex).

4-10
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-3-2 Inverter Operation Command Selection

• Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter. Select the method suit-
able for the application.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
b1-02 0 Digital Operator Operation commands from the Digital
Operator
1 External termi- Control circuit terminals (sequence input)
nals
2 Not used (Do not set.)
3 Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet
Communications Card

• When operation commands (forward, reverse, stop) from the DeviceNet communications are to be
always used, set to 3."

■ Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications

There is a switching signal, “Net. Ctrl.,” for operation commands from the standard remote I/O of the
DeviceNet Communications Card. This function cannot be used with the 3G3FV.
When it is necessary to select the operation command from DeviceNet communications, change the
setting in parameter b1-02 with an explicit message (Class 64 hex, Instance 01 hex, Attribute 04
hex).

4-3-3 DeviceNet Communications Settings

The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications. Set these
parameters according to the desired application.
Parameter Name Contents Setting Default
No. Operator display range setting
F9-01 Communications external fault Select the type of input used for the 0, 1 0
input: input type communications external fault input
EFO Selection from communications (DeviceNet
Communications Card).
0: N.O. input (external fault
detected when 1)
1: N.C. input (external fault
detected when 0)
F9-02 Communications external fault Select the detection method used 0, 1 0
input: detection method for the communications external
EFO Detection fault input from communications
(DeviceNet Communications
Card).
0: Always detect.
1: Detect during operation (i.e.,
when operation commands are
input).

4-11
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4
Parameter Name Contents Setting Default
No. Operator display range setting
F9-03 Communications external fault Select the Inverter operation per- 0 to 3 1
input: operation formed when there is a communi-
EFO Fault Action cations external fault input from
communications (DeviceNet Com-
munications Card).
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-
02 deceleration time/fault detec-
tion
1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
2: Decelerates to a stop using the
C1-09 emergency stop time/
fault detection
3: Continues operating/alarm
detection
F9-04 Not used Do not set. --- 0
Trace Sample Tim
F9-05 Torque reference/torque limit When operating in flux vector con- 0, 1 0
selection from communications trol mode, this setting enables or
Torq Ref/Lmt Sel disables torque reference and
torque limit values input from com-
munications (DeviceNet Communi-
cations Card). (See note 1.)
0: Torque reference/torque limit
from communications disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque limit
from communications enabled.
F9-06 Communications fault opera- Select the Inverter operation per- 0 to 3 1
tion formed when a communications
BUS Fault Sel fault is detected.
0: Decelerates to a stop using C1-
02 deceleration time/fault detec-
tion
1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
2: Decelerates to a stop using the
C1-09 emergency stop time/
fault detection
3: Continues operating/alarm
detection (See note 2.)

Note 1. Be sure to set F9-05 to 0 when using flux vector control. If used with the default setting (1),
the torque reference/torque limit will be interpreted as zero and there will be no torque output
unless there is a torque reference/torque limit from control I/O remote I/O.
Note 2. If F9-06 is set to 3 (continues operating), the Inverter will continue operating when a com-
munications fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before. Be sure
to take any steps necessary to ensure safety, such as installing a limit switch or an emer-
gency stop switch.

4-12
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-3-4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units

• Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies (speeds) used in
DeviceNet communications.
• The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the number of motor poles.
Parameter Set value Contents Default
No. setting
o1-03 0 0.01 Hz units 0
1 0.01% units (max. frequency is 100%)
2 to 39 r/min units (Set the number of motor poles.)
40 to 39,999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum fre-
quency.

@@@@@
Set a 4-digit value without the decimal point.
Set the position of the digit where the decimal
point is to be displayed starting from the
rightmost digit.

Example: To display the maximum frequency as “200.0" spec-

ify “12000."

4-13
SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4

4-14
 Chapter 5

Remote I/O Functions

5-1 Overview of Remote I/O Functions
5-2 Switching the Remote I/O Function
5-3 Basic Remote I/O
5-4 Standard Remote I/O
5-5 Special Remote I/O Operation
5-6 Control Remote I/O Operation
5-7 Unit Status
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
!Caution Be sure to set the switches correctly and check the settings before starting opera-
tion. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the product

!Caution Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety. Equipment damage
may result. This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for
communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation.

!Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter’s settings. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

5-1 Overview of Remote I/O Functions

This section provides an overview of the remote I/O functions, which provide communications
between the Inverter (SYSDRIVE 3G3MV, 3G3RV, or 3G3FV) and the Master.

5-1-1 Overview of Remote I/O Functions

The following table lists the four remote I/O functions that are supported. Use the remote I/O func-
tions most suitable for your application. Also, the Inverter’s status can be monitored easily by attach-
ing the status flags (16 bits) to each function and allocating them in the Master. The Unit status flags
can also be allocated independently in the Master.

Note Refer to 5-7 Unit Status for details on the Unit status.

Function Description
Basic remote I/O This remote I/O function is compatible to DeviceNet remote I/O function.
The basic remote I/O function is more limited than the standard remote I/O function.
Standard remote I/O This remote I/O function is the factory setting in the DeviceNet Communications
Unit/Card. General Inverter control can be performed with this remote I/O function.
Special remote I/O This remote I/O function is a proprietary OMRON format, not the remote I/O format
specified by DeviceNet.
The special remote I/O function can be used to read/set all of a 3G3MV, 3G3RV, or
3G3FV Inverter’s parameters and take advantage of all of the Inverter’s functions.
Control I/O remote I/O This remote I/O function is a proprietary OMRON format, not the remote I/O format
specified by DeviceNet.
The control I/O remote I/O function’s features and arrangement match the Inverter’s
control terminal I/O signals, so it can be used for communications with the Inverter’s
multi-function inputs. There are also default settings in which the Unit status (16 bits)
or multi-function input monitor data (8 bits) is attached to this remote I/O function for
allocation in the Master (data connection path setting)

5-2
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-1-2 Selecting the Remote I/O Function

Select the desired remote I/O function with the DeviceNet Configurator or an Explicit message. Refer
to 5-2 Switching the Remote I/O Function for details on switching the remote I/O function from the
Configurator.

■ Selecting with the Default Connection Path

With the Slave’s “default connection path” setting, any remote I/O function can be selected from a
pull-down menu (see the following table). Use this method to set the remote I/O function when the
Master is a CVM1/CV-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit, C200HX/HG/HE or C200HS DeviceNet (Mas-
ter) Unit, or another company’s DeviceNet (Master) Unit.

Default Connection Path List

Basic remote I/O
Standard remote I/O
Special remote I/O
Control I/O remote I/O
Control I/O remote I/O + Unit status
Control I/O remote I/O + Multi-function input monitor

■ Selecting with the Connection Path

The remote I/O function can be switched with the Master’s “connection path” setting.
The data allocated to a POLL or COS connection can be selected from a pull-down list (see the fol-
lowing table). In a POLL connection, input data and output data must be allocated in pairs.

Connection Path List

Remote I/O function IN/OUT Data
Basic remote I/O IN 46 hex: Basic Speed Control Status
OUT 14 hex: Basic Speed Control Command
Standard remote I/O IN 47 hex: Standard Speed Control Status
OUT 15 hex: Standard Speed Control Command
Special remote I/O IN 96 hex: Special I/O Response
OUT 64 hex: Special I/O Command
Control I/O remote I/O IN 97 hex: Extended Control Status
OUT 65 hex: Extended Control Command
Control I/O remote I/O + IN 98 hex: Extended Control Status + Unit Status
Unit status OUT 65 hex: Extended Control Command
Control I/O remote I/O + IN 99 hex: Extended Control Status + Multi-function Input Monitor
Multi-function input monitor OUT 65 hex: Extended Control Command
Unit status IN 9A hex: Unit Status
Multi-function input monitor IN 9B hex: Multi-function Input Monitor

Note It is possible to use remote I/O communications combinations that do not exist in the Slave’s
default connection paths (such as standard remote I/O + Unit status or special remote I/O +
Unit status) by selecting one more of the IN data elements and adding a COS connection.

5-3
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
■ Setting with an Explicit Message
The remote I/O function can also be switched by sending an explicit message.
If the DeviceNet Configurator is used, the settings are easier to perform because of the customized
settings windows, but in some cases explicit messages may be preferred. Refer to Chapter 6 Mes-
sage Communications and 10-2 Objects for details.
Example
The default connection path can be changed by setting one of the following values for Class 94 hex,
Instance 01 hex, Attribute 64 hex and then resetting the power supply.
Data Default connection path
0 Basic I/O
1 Standard I/O
2 Special I/O
3 Extended Control I/O
4 Extended Control I/O + Unit status
5 Extended Control I/O + Multi-function Input Monitor

5-4
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-2 Switching the Remote I/O Function

To use remote I/O operations other than the default setting (standard remote I/O), it is necessary to
switch the remote I/O operation. There are two ways to switch the remote I/O function with the
DeviceNet Configurator.
• Open the Slave’s Edit Device Parameters Window in the Configurator, select the desired remote I/O function
from the pull-down list (default connection path setting), and download the settings.
• Open the Master’s Edit Device Parameters Window in the Configurator and set the connection path in the
Advanced setting Window.

5-2-1 Switching with the Default Connection Path (Slave)

Use the following procedure to switch the Slave’s remote I/O function with the Configurator.

■ Procedure
1.Select the desired Slave’s icon in the Configurator, right click, and select Parameters/Edit from
the popup menu to open the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Click the General Tab and execute the Upload operation to read the Slave’s parameters.
3.On the General Tab Page, select the desired remote I/O function pattern from the Default Connec-
tion Path List.

Default Connection Path

4.Execute the Download operation. (The Download operation downloads all of the data together, in-
cluding the Inverter’s parameters and settings other than those on the General Tab Page.)
5.Click the Reset Button to reset the Slave and enable the new setting.

5-5
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
5-2-2 Switching with the Connection Path (Master)
Use the following procedure to switch the Master’s remote I/O function with the Configurator. In this
example, the remote I/O function is set to Control I/O remote I/O + Unit status.

■ Procedure
1.Locate the Master in the Network Configuration Window and either double-click the Master or
right-click and select Parameters/Edit from the pop-up menu to display the Edit Device Parame-
ters Window. Select the desired Slave from the General Tab Page.
2.Click the Button to move the desired Inverter to the Register Devices List.

Note The Register/Unregister Button can be clicked at this point to allocate data with the remote
I/O function selected in the Slave. The following steps explain how to allocate data freely, so
steps 3 to 10 are not required if data will be allocated automatically. Proceed to step 11 (Down-
load) if using automatic allocation.

3.Select the desired Inverter from the General Tab Page and click the Advanced Setup Button.

5-6
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

4.Click the Connection Tab of the Advanced Setting Window and select User Setup.
5.Select Use Poll Connection and Use COS connection.
6.Set Extended Control Status (Control I/O remote I/O) for the IN data and Extended Control Com-
mand (Control I/O remote I/O) for the OUT data as the poll connection’s connection paths.
7.Set Unit Status for the IN data as the COS connection’s connection path.

Note When a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is being used, set the COS connection’s OUT
data to the same setting set for the poll connection’s OUT data. If the connection paths do not
match, it will not be possible to select both Use Poll Connection and Use COS Connection.

Reference
The following connection path settings will be allocated automatically if you select the connection but
leave the connection path settings blank.
Connection OUT (PLC → Inverter) IN (PLC ← Inverter)
Poll Slave’s default connection path setting Slave’s default connection path setting
Bit-strobe Not allocated. Slave’s default connection path setting
COS Not allocated. Unit Status 154 decimal (9A hex)
Cyclic Not allocated. Unit Status 154 decimal (9A hex)

8.Click the OK Button to close the Advanced Settings Window.

5-7
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
9.Click the I/O Allocation (IN) Tab and display the Edit I/O Allocate Window.
In the Poll settings, set Block: 1 and Allocated: 3300 (user-set).
In the COS settings, set Block: 2 and Allocated: 3500 (user-set).

10.Set the I/O Allocation (OUT) settings in the same way.

Set Block: 1 and Allocated: 3200 (user-set).

11.Return to the General Tab Page and click the Download Button.
12.When the download has been completed, restart with the new settings.

Reference
• When Auto allocation as is registered is selected on the Master’s General Tab Page, a message will
appear every time that connection path settings are changed. The message will indicate that the
present I/O allocation was cleared because the connection was changed. When making connection
path settings, clear the Auto allocation as is registered check box before registering the Slaves.
• When connection settings are changed, a warning mark may be displayed by the Inverter Slave’s
icon. In this case, click the Get I/O Size from the Scan List Button on the I/O Information Tab Page
of the Inverter Slave’s Property Window and edit the information so that the I/O information for the
Slave’s icon matches the Master’s scan list. (For details, refer to 7-1-3 Network Connection Precau-
tions.)

5-8
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-3 Basic Remote I/O

Basic remote I/O is the basic built-in DeviceNet remote I/O function.
The basic remote I/O function is more limited than the standard remote I/O function.

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 20 Decimal (14 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Fault Forward/
most Reset stop
Left- 1
most
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 70 Decimal (46 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 During Fault
most forward
run
Left- 1
most
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)
most

Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

■ Bit and Data Functions

● Output Bit Details

Name Meaning
Forward/stop 0: Stop, 1: Forward
Fault Reset 0: ---, 1: Fault reset

5-9
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Output Data Details
Word address n+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed reference data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed reference x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
(Setting range: 0 to the rotational speed at maximum frequency)

* The speed scale is assigned with the message function. For instructions on how to
change it, refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications.
* The units for the rotational speed reference are set in n035/o1-03 (frequency reference
setting and display units).
* Setting example (providing a reference of 1,800 r/min):
When the speed scale value is “0" and the number of motor poles is set in n035/o1-03
(so units are r/min):
1,800 r/min → 1,800 x20 → 1,800 → 0708 hex

Note 1. In this manual, the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo-
cation for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV, so “n035/o1-03” indicates a parameter location of
n035 for the 3G3MV and parameter location of o1-03 for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV.
Note 2. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number
of motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting
and display units) when using DeviceNet (open network).
Note 3. If the setting in not within the proper range, the previous data will be retained and the des-
ignated rotational speed will not be entered.

● Input Bit Details

Name Meaning
Fault 0: Normal, 1: Fault
During forward run 0: Stopped, 1: Running forward

● Input Data Details

Word address m+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed monitor data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed monitor x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
* The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to
change it, refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications.
* The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in n035/o1-03 (frequency reference set-
ting and display units)
* Data conversion example:
When the speed scale value is “0" and the number of motor poles is set in n035/o1-03,
and the read data is 03E8 hex:
03E8 hex → 1,000 → 1,000/20 → 1,000 r/min

5-10
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Note Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number of
motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting and
display units) when using DeviceNet (open network).

5-11
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-4 Standard Remote I/O

Standard remote I/O is the factory setting for the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card.
General Inverter control can be performed with this remote I/O function.

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 21 Decimal (15 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Net Ref- Net Con- Fault Reverse/ Forward/
most erence trol Reset stop stop
Left- 1
most
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 71 Decimal (47 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 At Refer- Refer- Control Inverter During During Alarm Fault
most ence ence From Net Ready reverse forward
From Net run run
Left- 1
most
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)
most

Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

■ Bit and Data Functions

● Output Bit Details

Name Function
Forward/stop 0: Stop, 1: Forward
Reverse/stop 0: Stop, 1: Reverse
Fault Reset 0: ---, 1: Fault reset
Net Control 0: Specified in n003/b1-02, 1: Device Net
(See notes 1 and 2.)
Net Reference 0: Specified in n004/b1-01, 1: Device Net
(See notes 1 and 3.)

5-12
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Note 1. In this manual, the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo-
cation for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV, so “n003/b1-02” indicates a parameter location of
n003 for the 3G3MV and parameter location of b1-02 for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV.
Note 2. Net Control is used to change the run command as follows (cannot be changed while the
Inverter is running):
0: The run command input method specified by the run command source selection
(n003/b1-02) is used.
1: Operate by DeviceNet regardless of the setting in n003/b1-02 (according to the run com-
mand in word n, bits 0 and 1). (This setting is invalid in the 3G3FV Inverters.)
Note 3. Net Reference is used to specify the frequency reference as follows (cannot be changed
while the Inverter is running):
0: The frequency reference input method specified by the frequency reference source selec-
tion (n004/b1-01) is used.
1: Operate by DeviceNet regardless of the setting in n004/b1-01. (Operates with rotational
speed reference in word n+1.) (This setting is invalid in the 3G3FV Inverters.)

● Output Data Details

Word address n+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed reference data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed reference x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
(Setting range: 0 to the rotational speed at maximum frequency)
* The speed scale is assigned with the message function. For instructions on how to
change it, refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications.
* The unit for the rotational speed reference is set in n035/o1-03 (frequency reference
setting and display units)
* Setting example (providing reference of 1,800 r/min):
When the speed scale value is “0" and the number of motor poles is set in n035/o1-03
(so unit is r/min):
1,800 r/min → 1,800 x20 → 1,800 → 0708 hex

Note 1. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number
of motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting
and display units) when using DeviceNet (open network).
Note 2. If the setting in not within the proper range, the previous data will be retained and the des-
ignated rotational speed will not be entered.

● Input Bit Details

Name Function
Fault 0: Normal, 1: Fault
Alarm (Minor Fault) 0: Normal, 1: Alarm (minor fault)
During forward run 0: Stop/reverse, 1: During forward run (See note 1.)
During reverse run 0: Stop/forward, 1: During reverse run (See note 2.)
Inverter Ready 0: Preparing, 1: Ready
Control From Net 0: Not DeviceNet (n003/b1-02), 1: Device Net (See note 3.)
Reference From Net 0: Not DeviceNet (n004/b1-01), 1: DeviceNet (See note 4.)
At Reference 0: Accelerating or Decelerating, 1: At reference

5-13
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Note 1. Forward Operation indicates either forward run status or DC braking (DC injection) status.
This bit turns ON even for DC braking (DC injection) during reverse run.
Note 2. Reverse Operation indicates reverse output status. This bit does not turn ON for DC braking
(DC injection).
Note 3. Control From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 5 (Net Control) for DeviceNet com-
munications.
Note 4. Reference From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 6 (Net Reference) for DeviceNet
communications.

● Input Data Details

Word address m+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed monitor data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed monitor x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
* The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to
change it, refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications.
* The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in n035/o1-03 (frequency reference set-
ting and display units)
* Data conversion example:
When the speed scale value is “0” and the number of motor poles is set in n035/o1-03],
and the read data is 03E8 hex:
03E8 hex → 1,000 → 1,000/20 → 1,000 r/min

Note Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number of
motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting and
display units) when using DeviceNet (open network).

5-14
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-5 Special Remote I/O Operation

The special remote I/O function is a proprietary OMRON format, not a remote I/O format specified by
DeviceNet.
This remote I/O function can be used to read/set all of a 3G3MV, 3G3RV, 3G3PV, or 3G3FV Inverter’s
parameters and take advantage of all of the Inverter’s functions.

5-5-1 Overview of Special Remote I/O

Special remote I/O operations utilize DeviceNet remote I/O, and can directly write to and read from
internal Inverter registers. Basically, the register numbers for the various functions shown on this and
subsequent pages are specified for writing or reading. Once data has been written, it is retained until
it is changed by the next write operation.

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 100 Decimal (64 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Function code (write/read code)
most
Left- 1 Register number leftmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)
most
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Register number rightmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)
most
Left- 3 Register data leftmost byte (data to write to specified register)
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4 Register data rightmost byte (data to write to specified register)
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 150 Decimal (96 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 Function code (returns transmitted code)
most
Left- 1 Register number leftmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
most
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Register number rightmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
most
Left- 3 Register data leftmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)
most
Wd m+2 Right- 4 Register data rightmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)
most

Note 1. Special remote I/O outputs and inputs are paired. When using special remote I/O, be sure
to set them together.
Note 2. Special remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set
for this product.

5-15
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Note 3. The 16-bit data (register number and register data) is set in two words for each setting.
Note 4. Be careful of the order of the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the 16-bit data. The order is
reversed from that of basic and standard remote I/O.

■ Function Codes
The special remote I/O function codes are shown in the following table. Note that they are different
from the explicit message service codes.
Function code (hex) Content
10 Data writing
03 Data reading
00 No execution (data wrapping only; no internal processing takes place.)

■ Setting Data for Operations and Parameters

Read data and write data to be set for operations and parameters are calculated as shown below
and then transmitted in hexadecimal.
• Convert to hexadecimal values with the operation/parameter minimum setting value as 1.
• Negative numbers are expressed as two's complements.
• If the original data is already displayed in hexadecimal, it is transmitted as is.
• Set bits that are not used to “0.”
• Do not perform data settings for unused registers.
Example 1: Setting a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0.01 Hz.:
60/0.01 = 6000 → 1770 hex
Example 2 (for 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters): Setting a frequency reference bias (voltage, ter-
minal 13) of −50% when the minimum setting unit is 0.1%:
50/0.1 = 500 → 01F4 hex
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
Bit reversal

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
+1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 = FE0C Hex

Example 3: Setting a value of 1F hex in the multi-function input:

Send the value 1F hex.

■ Enabling Parameter Settings with the ENTER Command

Always send an ENTER command when setting (writing) data in parameters. New data written to the
parameters will be enabled as operating data after the Inverter receives the ENTER command. (In
the 3G3MV, the new settings will be enabled after the parameters are received.)

5-16
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
When two or more parameters are being set (written), send the ENTER command just one time after
all of the parameters have been set. All of the parameters that have been set will be enabled when
the ENTER command is sent.
Command Send format Inverter operation Remarks
ENTER command Function code: 10 hex When the ENTER command is Supported by all
that writes param- Register number: FFFD hex received, the last string of Inverter software.
eters to EEPROM Send data: 0000 hex parameter settings data that was Use this command
received is stored in EEPROM when you want the
and enabled as operating data. data to be retained
(EEPROM can be overwritten up even after the power is
to 100,000 times.) turned OFF.
ENTER command Function code: 10 hex When the ENTER command is Supported by all
that does not write Register number: FFDD hex received, the last string of Inverter software.
parameters to Send data: 0000 hex parameter settings data that was With the 3G3MV, the
EEPROM received is enabled as operating settings data is
data but it is not stored in enabled immediately
EEPROM. after it is received, so it
When the power is turned OFF, is not necessary to
the settings data is cleared and send an ENTER com-
returned to the original values. mand.

Note 1. In Inverters other than the 3G3MV, the parameter data will not be enabled unless the EN-
TER command is sent. In some cases, it will not be possible to start the Inverter.
Note 2. The ENTER command is required for the parameters (register numbers 0100 and higher).
Values such as the run command and frequency reference (register numbers 0000 to 000F)
are stored in the RAM area only, so that data is enabled without an ENTER command.

■ Special Remote I/O Responses

When data is written and read using special remote I/O, the responses shown in the following table
are returned. Check that the input data and output data match when handling communications.
Fault code Name Content Countermeasure
--- Normal comple- The function code and register number at ---
tion response the time of transmission are placed at the
beginning, and returned with the data
amount (when data is written) or the read
data (when data is read) attached.
01 hex Function code A code other than 03 hex/08 hex/10 hex Check and correct the
error has been set as a function code. function code.
02 hex Register number The specified register number has not been Check and correct the reg-
error registered. ister number.
An attempt was made to read an ENTER
command register.
21 hex Data setting error An upper or lower limit for the write data Check the display for the
setting range was exceeded. Digital Operator and cor-
Invalid data has been set that would cause rect the invalid data.
an operation error (OPE1 to OPE9).

5-17
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Fault code Name Content Countermeasure
22 hex Writing mode error during Inverter operations, a write-request Perform write operations
message was received for a parameter that after stopping the Inverter.
is read-only during operation.
An ENTER command was received during
Inverter operations.
A read-requested message was received Perform write operations
during UV detection. after clearing the UV (main
An ENTER command was received during circuit undervoltage) error.
UV detection.
during F04 (initial memory error) detection, After constant initialization
a write-request message other than con- has been performed, turn
stant initialization, was received. the power supply OFF and
ON again.
A write-request message was received for Check and correct the reg-
a read-only register. ister number.

Note When a communications error occurs, the MSB (most significant bit) of the function code will
be set to “1” in the response.

5-5-2 Special Remote I/O Communications Timing

With special remote I/O communications, it is possible to use all of the SYSDRIVE
3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3FV functions, such as frequency setting, control input setting, error monitoring,
output frequency monitoring, and so on. These functions are utilized by setting the register numbers
and connecting to the various Inverter functions. To use these functions properly, be sure to use the
following method to handle the data and provide a program for switching the communications pro-
cessing.

■ Matching Function Codes and Register Numbers

• In the remote I/O outputs (PLC to Inverter), set the function code, register number, and set data for
the function to be executed.
• Compare (CMP) the function codes and register numbers of the set remote I/O outputs and the
remote I/O inputs (Inverter to PLC). If they agree, proceed to the next process.

Note If data is repeatedly written to the same register number, it cannot be handled. Be sure to keep
performing processes with different function codes or register numbers. If it is necessary to
write repeatedly to the same register number, then alternately write to and read from that regis-
ter. (Handling data is made possible by changing function codes.)

5-18
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
■ Handling Illustration
Function code
register number 10 Hex 10 Hex 03 Hex 03 Hex
0002 Hex 0001 Hex 0024 Hex 002C Hex
Processing Frequency reference writing Inverter run command writing Output frequency monitoring Inverter status reading
contents

Transmission
completed signal

Function code/Register number compar ison (CMP)

5-5-3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function

Refer to the following sections for tables showing each Inverter’s functions and the parameter regis-
ter numbers.
• 3G3MV: 10-4 3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.
• 3G3RV: 10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.
• 3G3FV: 10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.

5-19
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-6 Control Remote I/O Operation

The control I/O remote I/O function is a proprietary OMRON format, not a remote I/O format specified
by DeviceNet.
This remote I/O function’s features and arrangement match the control terminal I/O signals of the
3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters, so it can be used for communications with the Inverter’s
multi-function inputs. There are also default settings available in which the Unit status (16 bits) or
multi-function input monitor data (8 bits) is attached to this remote I/O function for allocation in the
Master (data connection path setting).

5-6-1 Control I/O Remote I/O Operation

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 101 Decimal (65 Hex)

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverters

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4
most
Left- 5
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6
most
Left- 7
most

5-20
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4 Torque reference/torque limit, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference/torque limit, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6 Torque compensation bias, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Torque compensation bias, leftmost byte
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 151 Decimal (97 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 Fault Alarm Inverter At refer- During During Zero During
most (minor ready ence reset reverse speed run
fault) input run
Left- 1 P lock Multi- Multi- Multi- Local/re Power Opera-
most comple- function function function mote interrup- tion fault
tion (See output 2 output 1 contact tion
note 4.) output recovery
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Output frequency monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Output frequency monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+2 Right- 4 Torque reference monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+3 Right- 6 Output current monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Output current monitor, leftmost byte
most

Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. Control remote I/O inputs and outputs are paired. When using control remote I/O, be sure
to set them together.
Note 3. Control remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set
for this product.
Note 4. The P lock function (position lock or zero-servo function) is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter
operating with flux vector control. This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes.

5-21
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
■ Bit and Data Functions

● Output Bit Details

Name Function
Forward/stop 0: Stop, 1: Forward
Reverse/stop 0: Stop, 1: Reverse
Multi-function input @ 0: ---, 1: Function set for multi-function input @
External fault input 0: ---, 1: External fault (EFO) (See note 1.)
Fault reset 0: ---, 1: Reset
Multi-function contact 0: Turn OFF (open) multi-function contact output.
output 1: Turn ON (close) multi-function contact output.
(See note 2.)
Multi-function output @ 0: Turn OFF (open) multi-function output @.
1: Turn ON (close) multi-function output @.
(See note 2.)

Note 1. The function set with the multi-function input selection parameters can be used by operating
multi-function input @.
3G3MV: The functions set in n052 to n056 (function selection for multi-function inputs 3 to 7) can be
used.
3G3RV/3G3PV:
The functions set in H1-01 to H1-05 (function selection for multi-function inputs 1 to 5) can
be used. (Multi-function input 6 is not used.)
3G3FV: The functions set in H1-01 to H1-06 (function selection for multi-function inputs 1 to 6) can
be used.
Note 2. The multi-function contact output and multi-function output @ will be enabled when the fol-
lowing parameters are set, so that the outputs in the Inverter’s control terminals can be con-
trolled from communications.
3G3MV: Enabled when parameters n057 to n059 (function selection for multi-function outputs 1 to 3)
are set to 18 (12 hex) to specify communications output.
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV:
Enabled when parameters H2-01 to H2-03 (function selection for the multi-function contact
output and multi-function outputs 1 and 2) are set to F (not used).

5-22
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Output Data Details
Word Signal name Content
n+1 Frequency reference Specifies the Inverter output frequency from communications.
(3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV/ • Setting unit: 0.01 Hz (See note 2.)
3G3FV)
• Setting range: 0 to maximum frequency in Hz (See note 3.)
Example: To set the frequency reference to 60.00 Hz:
60.00 Hz/(0.01 Hz) = 6000 decimal = 1770 hex → Set
as 1770 hex.
n+2 Torque reference/torque Specifies the torque reference or torque limit for the Inverter output.
limit (3G3FV) (See notes 4 and 5.)
The torque limit/torque reference is only enabled when flux vector
control is set.
• Whether torque reference or torque limit is specified depends on
the Inverter's control mode.
Speed control: torque limit Torque control: torque reference
• Setting unit: 0.1% (100% = motor rated torque)
• Setting range: −300.0% to 300.0% (See note 6.)
Example: To set the torque reference to 10%:
10%/(0.1%) = 100 decimal = 64 hex → Set as 64 hex.
n+3 Torque compensation bias Specifies the torque compensation bias when using torque control.
(3G3FV) (See note 4.)
Torque compensation bias is only available when performing torque
control in flux vector control mode. It is used separately from torque
control to compensate for mechanical torque loss.
• Setting unit: 0.1% (100% = motor rated torque)
• Setting range: −300.0% to 300.0% (See note 6.)
Example: To set the torque compensation bias to 100%:
100.0%/(0.1%) = 1000 decimal = 3E8 hex → Set as
3E8 hex.)

Note 1. In this manual, the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo-
cation for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV, so “n035/o1-03” indicates a parameter location of
n035 for the 3G3MV and parameter location of o1-03 for the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV.
Note 2. The data setting unit can be changed with n35/o1-03 (frequency reference setting/display
unit).
Note 3. Data that exceeds the upper or lower setting range limits will be considered faulty and ig-
nored by the Inverter, and the previous data will be maintained.
Note 4. This function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters, which are equipped with flux vector con-
trol mode. It cannot be used with the 3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters.
Note 5. When not using either the torque limit of the torque reference, set F9-05 (torque refer-
ence/torque limit selection from communications) to 0 (disabled). If this setting is not dis-
abled and “0” is sent as data, the torque limit/torque reference will be set to 0, and there will
be no torque output (i.e., the motor will not operate).
Note 6. Although the setting range for torque reference/torque limit is −300.0% to 300.0%, the
torque actually output depends on the motor characteristics. For a general-purpose motor,
take the range to be −200.0% to 200.0%.

5-23
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Input Bit Details
Name Function
During run 1: During run
Zero speed 1: Zero speed
During reverse run 1: During reverse run
During reset input 1: During reset input
At reference 1: At reference
Inverter ready 1: Inverter ready
Alarm (minor fault) 1: Alarm (minor fault)
Fault 1: Fault
Operation fault 1: Operation fault
Power interruption 1: Recovered from a momentary power interruption
recovery
Local/remote 1: Remote mode
Multi-function contact 1: Function specified in n057/H2-01 (See note 1.)
output
Multi-function output 1 1: Function specified in n058/H2-02 (See note 1.)
Multi-function output 2 1: Function specified in n059/H2-03 (See note 1.)
P lock completion 1: Position lock engaged (See note 2.)

Note 1. The function set in the multi-function output selection parameter is enabled.
3G3MV: The function set in parameter n057 to n059 (function selection for multi-function outputs 1
to 3) is enabled.
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV:
The function set in parameter H2-01 to H2-03 (function selection for the multi-function con-
tact output and multi-function outputs 1 and 2) is enabled.
Note 2. The P lock function (position lock or zero-servo function) is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter
operating with flux vector control. This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes.

5-24
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Input Data Details
Word Signal name Content
m+1 Output frequency monitor Gives the frequency being output by the Inverter.
(3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV/ • Monitor unit: 0.01 Hz (See note 1.)
3G3FV)
Example: Output frequency when the monitor value is 1388 hex:
1388 hex = 5000 decimal × (0.01 Hz) = 50.00 Hz
m+2 Torque reference monitor Gives the torque reference value inside the Inverter (See note 2.)
(3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV/ • Monitor unit: 0.1% (100% is motor rated torque)
3G3FV)
Example: Torque reference for monitor value of 1F4 hex:
1F4 hex = 500 decimal × (0.1%) = 50% (relative to
motor rated torque)
m+3 Output current monitor Gives the value of the current being output by the Inverter
(3G3MV/3G3RV/3G3PV/ • 3G3MV Monitoring units:
3G3FV) 0.01 A (when the content of n179 is 0027 or higher)
0.1 A (when the content of n179 is 0026 or lower)
• 3G3RV/3G3FV Monitoring units:
0.01 A (for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 7.5 kW max.)
0.1 A (for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 11 kW min.)
Example: Output current for 0.4-kW 3G3RV Inverter with monitor
value of C8 hex:
C8 hex = 200 decimal × (0.01 A) = 2.00 A

Note 1. The data setting units can be changed in parameter n35/o1-03 (frequency reference set-
ting/display unit).
Note 2. The torque reference monitor is valid only if open-loop vector control (sensor-less vector
control) or flux vector control is set.

5-6-2 Control I/O Remote I/O + Multi-function Input Monitor

This remote I/O setting attaches the 8-bit multi-function input monitor data to the control I/O remote
I/O function described in 5-6-1 Control I/O Remote I/O Operation.
The multi-function input monitor allows the ON/OFF status of the Inverter’s control input terminals to
be monitored at the Master. For example, if a particular multi-function input terminal is set to “Not
used” in the parameters, a sensor or other input device can be connected to that terminal and the
signal can be used in the PLC’s ladder program.

Note The bits in the multi-function input monitor will be turned ON not only when the terminal’s sig-
nal is ON, but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I/O. (The terminal’s
ON/OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I/O.)

5-25
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 101 Decimal (65 Hex)

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4
most
Left- 5
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6
most
Left- 7
most

SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4 Torque reference/torque limit, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference/torque limit, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6 Torque compensation bias, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Torque compensation bias, leftmost byte
most

5-26
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 153 Decimal (99 Hex)
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 Fault Alarm Inverter At refer- During During Zero During
most (minor ready ence reset reverse speed run
fault) input run
Left- 1 P Multi- Multi- Multi- Local/re Power Opera-
most lock/com function function function mote interrup- tion fault
pletion output 2 output 1 contact tion
(See output recovery
note 4.)
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Output frequency monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Output frequency monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+2 Right- 4 Torque reference monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+3 Right- 6 Output current monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Output current monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+4 Right- 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0
most

Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. Control remote I/O inputs and outputs are paired. When using control remote I/O, be sure
to set them together.
Note 3. Control remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set
for this product.
Note 4. The P lock function (position lock or zero-servo function) is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter
operating with flux vector control. This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes.
Note 5. The output words (PLC to Inverter) allocated for the “control I/O remote I/O + multi-function
input monitor” function are the same as the output words allocated for the regular control I/O
remote I/O function. Just one byte is added to the allocated input words (Inverter to PLC).

■ Bit and Data Functions

The functions of all allocated output bits and data (PLC to Inverter) as well as input bits and data
(Inverter to PLC) in input words m through m+3 are the same as the regular control I/O remote I/O
function. Refer to 5-6-1 Control I/O Remote I/O Operation for details on these functions.
Only the functions of the inputs in input word m+4 are different, so those functions are described
here.

5-27
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
● Input Bit Details (Inputs 0 to 7)
Name Function
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
Input 0 Status of terminal S1 Status of terminal S1 Status of terminal 1
(multi-function input 1) (Forward/Stop) (Forward/Stop)
(See note 3.)
Input 1 Status of terminal S2 Status of terminal S2 Status of terminal 2
(multi-function input 2) (Reverse/Stop) (Reverse/Stop)
(See note 3.)
Input 2 Status of terminal S3 Status of terminal S3 Status of terminal 3
(multi-function input 3) (multi-function input 1 selection) (multi-function contact input 1)
Input 3 Status of terminal S4 Status of terminal S4 Status of terminal 4
(multi-function input 4) (multi-function input 2 selection) (multi-function contact input 2)
Input 4 Status of terminal S5 Status of terminal S5 Status of terminal 5
(multi-function input 5) (multi-function input 3 selection) (multi-function contact input 3)
Input 5 Status of terminal S6 Status of terminal S6 Status of terminal 6
(multi-function input 6) (multi-function input 4 selection) (multi-function contact input 4)
Input 6 Status of terminal S7 Status of terminal S7 Status of terminal 7
(multi-function input 7) (multi-function input 5 selection) (multi-function contact input 5)
Input 7 Status of terminal 8
(multi-function contact input 6)

Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. The bits in the multi-function input monitor will be turned ON not only when the terminal’s
signal is ON, but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I/O. (The termi-
nal’s ON/OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I/O.)
Note 3. Setting n50 to n56 to 27 to 33 enables using the terminals for sending notification to the PLC.
3G3RV/3G3FV Inverter DeviceNet
3G3MV Inverter DeviceNet Unit Communications Card
Inverter control Inverter control
MFI 1 (n50) TBI 1 (forward/stop)
MFI 2 (n51) TBI 2 (reverse/stop)
MFI 3 (n52) MFI 3 (H1-01)
MFI 4 (n53) MFI 4 (H1-02)
Terminal MFI 5 (n54) Terminal MFI 5 (H1-03)
Block MFI 6 (n55) Block MFI 6 (H1-04)
inputs MFI 7 (n56) inputs MFI 7 (H1-05)
Word m+4 MFI 8 (H1-06) (See note 2.) Word m+4
S1 Input 0 S1 (1) Input 0
S2 Input 1 S2 (2) Input 1

S3 OR Input 2 S3 (3) OR Input 2

S4 OR Input 3 S4 (4) OR Input 3
S5 OR Input 4 S5 (5) OR Input 4
S6 OR Input 5 S6 (6) OR Input 5
S7 OR Input 6 S7 (7) OR Input 6
S8 (8)* OR Input 7
Control I/O remote I/O
Control I/O remote I/O
word n word n
Bit 2 (MFI 3 selection) Bit 2 (MFI 1 selection)
Bit 3 (MFI 4 selection) Bit 3 (MFI 2 selection)
Bit 4 (MFI 5 selection) Bit 4 (MFI 3 selection)
Bit 5 (MFI 6 selection) Bit 5 (MFI 4 selection)
Bit 6 (MFI 7 selection) Bit 6 (MFI 5 selection)
Bit 7 (MFI 6 selection)

Note 1: MFI = Multifunction input, TBI = Terminal Block input

Note 2: 3G3FV only

5-28
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Reference
The multi-function input monitor can be set together with the control I/O remote I/O function as a
default connection path in the Slave (Instance ID: 153 decimal (99 hex)). In addition, when a CS/CJ-
series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is being used, the multi-function input monitor can be used with other
remote I/O functions by allocating the following Instance to a COS connection.

Instance ID: 155 Decimal (9B Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd M Right- 0 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 Input 0
most

5-29
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-7 Unit Status

This section explains the Unit status information, which is allocated in the Master when remote I/O
communications are used and can be used to easily monitor the Unit’s status. Refer to 5-2 Switching
the Remote I/O Function for details on allocating unit status to the Master. Refer to 7-2 Smart Slave
Functions for details on making settings such as each functions threshold value.

Note When using the control I/O remote I/o function, there is a default setting available (a default
connection path setting), which attaches the unit status (16 bits) to the remote I/O.

5-7-1 Unit Status

This section explains the I/O format (allocated words) and bit/data functions when the unit status is
allocated to a COS connection.

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 154 Decimal (9A Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd M Right- 0 Con- Opera- Warning Cooling Inverter Network
most nected tion time torque fan/elec- unit power
compo- over flag detected trolytic mainte- voltage
nent flag capaci- nance drop flag
mainte- tor main- flag
nance tenance
flag flag
Left- 1 Error flag Inverter detected fault code
most

Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. Outputs (PLC to Inverter) cannot be allocated.

5-30
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
■ Bit and Data Details

● Input Bit Details

Name Function
Network power volt- 0: Normal The network power supply voltage is higher than the preset threshold
age drop flag voltage (present value > threshold value).
1: Fault The network power supply voltage is less than or equal to the preset
threshold voltage (present value ≤ threshold value).
Inverter unit mainte- 0: Normal The Inverter’s operating time is less than the preset threshold voltage
nance flag (operating time < threshold value).
1: Fault The Inverter’s operating time is greater than or equal to the preset thresh-
old voltage (operating time ≥ threshold value).
Cooling fan/electro- 0: Normal The operating time of either the fan or the electrolytic capacitor is less
lytic capacitor mainte- than the preset threshold voltage (operating time < threshold value).
nance flag 1: Fault The operating time of either the fan or the electrolytic capacitor is greater
than or equal to the preset threshold voltage (operating time ≥ threshold
value).
Warning torque 0: Normal The output torque is less than the preset threshold voltage (output cur-
detected flag rent < threshold value).
1: Fault The output torque is greater than or equal to the preset threshold voltage
(output current ≥ threshold value).
Operation time over 0: Normal The operating time is less than the preset threshold voltage (operating
flag time < threshold value).
1: Fault The operating time is greater than or equal to the preset threshold volt-
age (operating time ≥ threshold value).
Connected compo- 0: Normal The value monitored by the “cumulative ON time monitor function” or
nent maintenance flag “number of contact operations monitor function” is less than the preset
threshold voltage (maintenance counter < threshold value).
1: Fault The value monitored by the “cumulative ON time monitor function” or
“number of contact operations monitor function” is greater than or equal
to the preset threshold voltage (maintenance counter ≥ threshold value).
Error flag 0: Normal A fault is not detected in the Inverter.
1: Fault A fault was detected in the Inverter. (This flag operates together with the
Inverter detected fault code.)

● Input Data Details (Inverter Detected Fault Code)

When an fault has occurred in the Inverter, the fault code will be reported in bits 0 to 6 of the leftmost
byte. At the same time, the error flag will be turned ON.
The following table lists the fault codes and corresponding faults.
Fault Applicable Inverters Operator Meaning
code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display
(hex) 3G3PV
00 Yes Yes Yes Inverter normal
01 --- Yes Yes PUF Fuse open
02 Yes Yes Yes UV1 Undervoltage (main)
03 Yes Yes Yes UV2 Control power supply fault
04 --- Yes Yes UV3 Undervoltage (MC failure in the 3G3RV)
05 Yes --- Yes SC Short circuit

5-31
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Fault Applicable Inverters Operator Meaning
code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display
(hex) 3G3PV
06 Yes Yes Yes GF Ground fault
07 Yes Yes Yes OC Overcurrent
08 Yes Yes Yes OV Main circuit overvoltage
09 Yes Yes Yes OH Overheat (Inverter overheating for 3G3MV/3G3RV)
0A --- Yes Yes OH1 Overheat (Inverter overheating for 3G3RV)
0B Yes Yes Yes OL1 Motor overload
0C Yes Yes Yes OL2 Inverter overload
0D Yes Yes Yes OL3 Overtorque detection 1
0E --- Yes Yes OL4 Overtorque detection 2
0F --- Yes Yes RR Braking transistor failure
10 Yes Yes Yes RH Braking resistor overheating
11 Yes Yes Yes EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
12 Yes Yes Yes EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
13 Yes Yes Yes EF5 External fault (Terminal 5)
14 Yes Yes Yes EF6 External fault (Terminal 6)
15 Yes Yes Yes EF7 External fault (Terminal 7)
16 --- --- Yes EF8 External fault (Terminal 8)
17 --- --- Yes FAN Cooling fan faulty
18 --- Yes Yes OS Overspeed
19 --- Yes Yes DEV Speed deviation
1A --- Yes Yes PGO PG is disconnected
1B Yes Yes Yes PF Main circuit voltage error
1C Yes Yes Yes LF Output phase loss
1D --- Yes --- OH3 Motor overheat 1
1E Yes Yes Yes OPR Operator disconnection
1F --- Yes Yes ERR EEPROM write failure
20 --- Yes --- OH4 Motor overheat 2
21 Yes Yes Yes CE RS-422A/RS-485 communications error
22 Yes Yes Yes BUS Communications error
25 --- Yes Yes CF Control fault
26 --- --- Yes SVE Zero servo error
27 Yes Yes Yes EFO External fault
28 Yes Yes Yes FBL PID feedback reference lost
29 Yes Yes --- UL3 Undertorque detection 1
2A --- Yes --- UL4 Undertorque detection 2
2B --- Yes --- OL7 Overload during HSB
Variable Yes Yes Yes CPF@@ Hardware error

Note A “Yes” in the Applicable Inverters column indicates that the Inverter supports the correspond-
ing function; a “---” in the column indicates that the Inverter does not support the function.

5-32
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-7-2 Control I/O Remote I/O + Unit Status

This remote I/O setting is a default connection path setting, which attaches the 16-bit Unit status data
to the control I/O remote I/O function described in 5-6-1 Control I/O Remote I/O Operation. This sec-
tion explains the I/O format when the unit status is attached to the control I/O remote I/O.
For details on the function of specific input and output bits/bytes, refer to 5-6-1 Control I/O Remote
I/O Operation or 5-7-1 Unit Status.

■ I/O Format (Allocated Words)

● Outputs (PLC to Inverter) Instance ID: 101 Decimal (65 Hex)

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4
most
Left- 5
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6
most
Left- 7
most

SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Right- 0 Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Multi- Reverse/ For-
most function function function function function function stop ward/sto
input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p
Left- 1 Multi- Multi- Multi- Fault External
most function function function reset fault
output 2 output 1 contact input
output

5-33
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n+1 Right- 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+2 Right- 4 Torque reference/torque limit, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference/torque limit, leftmost byte
most
Wd n+3 Right- 6 Torque compensation bias, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Torque compensation bias, leftmost byte
most

● Inputs (Inverter to PLC) Instance ID: 152 Decimal (98 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd m Right- 0 Fault Alarm Inverter At refer- During During Zero During
most (minor ready ence reset reverse speed run
fault) input run
Left- 1 P Multi- Multi- Multi- Local/re UV Opera-
most lock/com function function function mote detected tion fault
pletion output 2 output 1 contact
(See output
note 4.)
Wd m+1 Right- 2 Output frequency monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 3 Output frequency monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+2 Right- 4 Torque reference monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 5 Torque reference monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+3 Right- 6 Output current monitor, rightmost byte
most
Left- 7 Output current monitor, leftmost byte
most
Wd m+4 Right- 0 Con- Opera- Warning Cooling Inverter Network
most nected tion time torque fan/elec- unit power
compo- over flag detected trolytic mainte- voltage
nent flag capaci- nance drop flag
mainte- tor main- flag
nance tenance
flag flag
Left- 1 Error flag Inverter detected fault code
most

Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. Control remote I/O inputs and outputs are paired. When using control remote I/O, be sure
to set them together.
Note 3. Control remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set
for this product.

5-34
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5
Note 4. The P lock function (position lock or zero-servo function) is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter
operating with flux vector control. This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes.
Note 5. The output words (PLC to Inverter) allocated for the “control I/O remote I/O + Unit status”
function are the same as the output words allocated for the regular control I/O remote I/O
function. Just one word is added to the allocated input words (Inverter to PLC).

Reference
When a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet (Master) Unit is being used, we recommend allocating the Unit sta-
tus to a COS connection instead of using the default connection path setting. during normal opera-
tion, the status of the flags in the Unit status will not change, so allocation to a COS connection is
more efficient. If the Unit status is set in the default connection path, there input data occupies 5
words so the communications speed will be slower.

5-35
Remote I/O Functions Chapter 5

5-36
 Chapter 6

Message
Communications
6-1 Overview of Message Communications
6-2 Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC
6-3 Overview of Messages and Responses
6-4 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex
6-5 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex
6-6 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex
6-7 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-1 Overview of Message Communications

■ Message Communications Operations

Message communications enable data to be exchanged as required between nodes (i.e., between
Masters or between Masters and Slaves) on a DeviceNet Network. For example, the accumulated
data from a given PLC can be read from another PLC, and constants from various Slaves can be
changed from a PLC. To use message communications, however, both nodes involved in the data
exchange must support message communications.
DeviceNet Master Unit Message communications function
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
CJ1W-DRM21 Reading Inverter
CMND (490)
output current

3G3MV, 3G3RV, or
3G3FV Inverter

FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN
MIN
STOP FREQUENCMAX
Y
RESET DIGITAL

OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATOR

LOT NO: 8Y1

SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3
PJVOP-140

INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation
SYSDRIV
3G3MV
INVERT
E RUN
ER

INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001
200V 3PH
ALARM
ASE
NPIT31
297-404
WARNING

INSTALLATION CATEGORY
-1
0.1kW
Rea - Ris
d man
ual befo
k of elec
Wait 1
minute re insta tric sho
disconne for capa lling. ck.
To conf cting pow citor
er supp discharge
to grou orm to after
nd requ ly.

MADE IN JAPAN
AVERTISthe supply neut
irements

MASS:0.6kg
,
ral for make sure

PRG:
Lisez SMENT - Risq
manuel
400V
ue de class.
Atten avan electriqu '
decharg
dez t e. e
juscequ'a' 1 minute d'installe
' r.
Pour repo les cond apres d'eta
'
' ensateurs chment
le neut ndre' aux sont dech d'ele
'
ctric '
re est exig
arge' ite,
'
a la mas ences
se pour , s'ass s.
la serie urer que~
- '
400V.

3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
Communications Unit (for 3G3MV Inverters)
3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications
Card (for 3G3RV/3G3FV Inverters)
Note: T-branch wiring using Thin Cables

Note When the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card is used, the RS-422/RS-485 of the Inverter
cannot be used for communications.

■ Types of Message Communications

DeviceNet message communications are broadly divided into the two categories described below. Of
these two categories, the Inverter's DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card supports explicit mes-
sages.
• Explicit Messages
Explicit messages are defined by DeviceNet. The class, instance, and attribute are specified for
executing message communications. The messages are the same for all Inverter products, so
messages can be exchanged in the same way with masters made by other manufacturers.
• FINS Messages
Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between DeviceNet nodes (Masters and
Slaves) that support FINS messages. (FINS commands are actually sent and received using
DeviceNet explicit messages.)

Note Message communications are supported by CV-series, CS/CJ-series, and C200HX/HG/HE

PLCs, but not by C200HS PLCs.

6-2
Message Communications Chapter 6
■ Overview of Explicit Messages
Explicit messages are sent and received as described below. Basically explicit message communi-
cations are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units.

Explicit Message Communications Frame

Header Node Service Class Instance Attribute Data Footer
address code

Item Content
Header The header indicates the beginning of an explicit message and that the frame is an
explicit message request/response. It is set automatically for DeviceNet, so there is no
particular need to be concerned with it.
Node address Request: Set the node address of the Slave/Master to be requested.
Response: The node address of the responding Slave/Master is set.
Service code Request: Set the code of the requested service (read/write, etc.).
Response: The MSB (most significant bit) of the requested service code is changed to
“1” and returned.
Class Function classification (major Indicates the classification of a function defined by
classification) DeviceNet. To specify a function, specify these three
Instance Instance classification (minor codes.
classification)
Attribute Attribute (Set values are
assigned for each function.)
Data Request: Set the data to be written.
Response: Read-requested data or fault message are attached.
Footer This is the part that indicates the end of the explicit message and executes the CRC
check. It is set automatically for DeviceNet, so there is no particular need to be con-
cerned with it.

6-3
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-2 Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC

This section explains how to send and receive messages using a CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-
DRM21 DeviceNet Unit.

■ Using CMND(490)
With a CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit, CMND(490) is used to send explicit
messages. To send an explicit message, it is necessary to place FINS command “2801” in front and
to send the command to the Master Unit. The Master Unit that receives the command converts the
command data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node. When sending an
explicit message, it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with CMND(490).

S
D
C

● S: Beginning Command Storage Word

Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit.
Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table.
Word Bits
address 15 to 8 7 to 0
S Command data (Set explicit message FINS command “2801.")
S+1 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code
Address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63) Write: 10 Read: 0E
S+2 Class ID code (Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function.)
Set within 0001 to 002A, 0064, or 0094 to 0097 (hex) with Inverter's DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit.
S+3 Instance ID code (Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function.)
S+4 Attribute ID code Attached data (for writing)
(Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant
function.)
--- Attached data (for writing)

● D: Beginning Response Storage Word

Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages.

6-4
Message Communications Chapter 6
● C: Beginning Control Code Word
Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message
communications. The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master
Units. Preset the data in consecutive words.
Word Bits
address 15 14 to 8 7 to 0
C Number of command data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the amount of data from the beginning S word.
C+1 Number of response data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word.
C+2 Network address: 0000 to 007F hex (0 to 127)
(A setting of 0000 hex indicates the local network.)
When using CMND(490) with the CS/CJ Series, a network address must be set for each
DeviceNet Master Unit. The network address is edited using the routing table edit function of
a Peripheral Device (except for the Programming Console).
C+3 Command destination node address: 00 to 3F hex Command destination Unit address
(0 to 63) Set Master Unit (FE) or Master Unit's
Node address of the Master Unit unit number, 10 to 1F hex (0 to 15).
(The local node is specified if C+2 is set to 0000
hex and this byte is set to 00 hex.)
C+4 Response Communications port number: 0 to 7 Number of retries: 00 to 0F hex (0 to
Set the communications port used for 15)
DeviceNet. Set the number of times to resend for
error response.
C+5 Response monitor time:
0000 hex → 2 s
0001 to FFFF hex → 0.1 to 6553.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages.

Note Set “0” in word C+4 bit 15 to require a response or “1” to not require a response. Responses
are required for explicit messages, so set “0.”

■ Message Timing
When executing CMND(490), an AND condition must be set that requires both the PLC's Network
Communications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit's Message Communications Enabled Flag to be
ON.
Network
Execution Communications Online status
condition Enabled Flag (or Message Communications Enabled Flag)

S
D
C

■ Message Response Read Timing

Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each
communications port.

6-5
Message Communications Chapter 6
Network Communications
Enabled Flag
Read response processing

■ Communications Flags
Type Name Address Content
Word Bit
PLC flags Network Communications A202 7: Port 7 0: Execution disabled (executing)
Enabled Flag 6: Port 6 1: Execution enabled (not executing)
5: Port 5
4: Port 4
3: Port 3
2: Port 2
1: Port 1
0: Port 0
Network Communications A219 7: Port 7 0: Normal end
Error Flag 6: Port 6 1: Abnormal end
5: Port 5
4: Port 4
3: Port 3
2: Port 2
1: Port 1
0: Port 0
Master Unit Online Flag 25 x Unit 00 0: Offline
status flags number + 1: Online
1511
Message Communications 25 x Unit 12 Indicates the same status as the Online
Enabled Flag number + Flag.
1524 0: Offline
1: Online
This function is compatible with C200HW-
DRM21-V1.

6-6
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-3 Overview of Messages and Responses

When message communications are used, the Inverter's DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card
returns responses as explained below.
Basically, DeviceNet communications are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units. In the case of single-word
data (16 bits), the rightmost bits (least significant) and the leftmost bits (most significant) are
reversed in order due to the following reasons:
• Data on communications line is transmitted in the order of rightmost bits and leftmost bits.
• Data that is internally processed by PLC for issuing commands is transmitted in the order of left-
most bits and rightmost bits.
Therefore, reverse the order for attributes where “Word” is written in the “Size” column in the tables
on subsequent pages and create attached data or read response data.

Note There is no need to take this into consideration for remote I/O because the rightmost bits and
leftmost bits are automatically reversed.

■ Command Format
28 01 32 bytes max.

Command code Destination Service Class ID Instance ID Service Data

(FINS command for node Code
PLC) address Service data (attribute
No. or attribute No. and
write data)

■ Response Format

● Normal Response
28 01 00 00 32 bytes max.

Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Service data
(FINS command for PLC) transmitted node Code (read data)
address

● Error Response
28 01 00 00 94 2 bytes

Command code Completion Number of bytes Destination Service Error Code

(FINS command for PLC) code transmitted node address Code

● Failure or Timeout during Transmission

28 01

Command code Completion code

(FINS command for PLC) (FINS error code)

6-7
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-4 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex

This section provides details on objects. There are fourteen types of objects:
• Identity objects (identification information): Class 01 hex
• Message router objects: Class 02 hex
• DeviceNet objects: Class 03 hex
• Assembly objects: Class 04 hex
• DeviceNet connection objects: Class 05 hex
• Input terminal control objects: Class 08 hex
• Output terminal control objects: Class 09 hex
• Motor data objects: Class 28 hex
• Control supervisor objects: Class 29 hex
• AC/DC drive objects: Class 2A hex
• Inverter parameter objects: Class 64 hex
• Unit parameter objects: Class 94 hex
• Unit manager objects: Class 95 hex
• Equipment manager objects: Class 97 hex
The three types of objects related to Inverters are the motor data, control supervisor, and AC/DC
drive objects. These are explained below and in subsequent sections. For details on the other types
of objects, refer to 10-2 Objects.
Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters. The motors that
can be connected to Inverters are squirrel-cage inductive motors, so the “Motor Type” is always “7.”
The motor's rated current and rated voltage can be set and read.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

6-8
Message Communications Chapter 6
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 28 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Motor Type Indicates the type of motor --- 07 Yes No Byte
to be used. The setting for
a squirrel-cage inductive
motor is 7.
06 Motor Rated The motor's rated current Inverter rated See note Yes Yes Word
Current can be set and read. The output current 1.
setting unit is 0.1 A. (The 10% to 150%
setting unit can be (See note 3.)
changed using the cur-
rent scale in Class 2A,
Instance 1, Attribute 17.)
07 Motor Rated The motor's rated voltage 0 to 255 V 00C8 Yes Yes Word
Voltage can be set and read. The (0 to 510 V) (0190)
setting unit is 1 V. (The (See note 2.) (See note
setting unit can be 2.)
changed using the voltage
scale in Class 2A,
Instance 1, Attribute 1B.)

Note 1. The default setting for the motor's rated current depends on the Inverter model. Refer to the
Inverter’s operation manual for details.
Example: 1.90A (0013 hex) for 200-V class, 0.4 kW
Note 2. The figures enclosed in parentheses in the “Setting range” and “Default” columns are the
values for 400-V class Inverters.
Note 3. The setting range for the Motor Rated Current is the setting range for the 3G3MV. With the
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV, the setting range is 10% to 120% of the Inverter rated output cur-
rent.

6-9
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-5 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex

Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control I/O-related functions. They are
assigned according to their particular control I/O functions, such as forward operation, reverse oper-
ation, error detection, and so on. Be careful when setting up a remote I/O communications connec-
tion. These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I/O, so even if they have been
set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.

■ Support Service Codes

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single
05 Reset attribute: Can be sent to Class 29/Instance 01.
Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns
ON the Fault Reset. Then turns OFF the Fault Reset when Inverter Ready is
output.

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 29 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Forward/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Forward operation
04 Reverse/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Reverse operation
05 Net Control 00: Operate with setting in 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
Local/remote n003/b1-02.
switch 01: Operate by DeviceNet
(See note 1.) (not valid with 3G3FV)
06 State 00 hex: Vendor specific --- 03 Yes No Byte
Inverter status 01 hex: Startup
(See note 1.) 02 hex: Not Ready
03 hex: ready
04 hex: Enabled
05 hex: Stopping
06 hex: Fault_Stop
07 hex: Faulted
07 During forward 00: No Inverter output or --- 00 Yes No Byte
run operating in reverse.
01: Forward operation or
DC braking
(Either DC braking from
reverse operation or oper-
ating forward.)
08 During reverse 00: No Inverter output or --- 00 Yes No Byte
run operating in forward.
01: Operating in reverse
(reverse operation output
status)
Becomes “00” with DC
braking.

6-10
Message Communications Chapter 6
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 09 Inverter Ready 00: Preparing --- 00 Yes No Byte
Initial processing/ not
drive mode/ fault
01: Inverter ready
Inverter can receive run
command.
0A Fault 00: Normal --- 00 Yes No Byte
01: Fault
0B Alarm (minor 00: Normal --- 00 Yes No Byte
fault) 01: Alarm (minor fault)
0C Fault Reset 00: Normal status 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Fault reset
0D Fault code Indicates the contents of --- 0000 Yes No Word
fault that occur. (See the
fault code list on the fol-
lowing page.)
0F Control From 00: Operating with an --- 00 Yes No Byte
Net n003/b1-02 setting other
Run signal input than DeviceNet.
status 01: Operating by
(See note 2.) DeviceNet.
10 DeviceNet Fault 00: Stop operation. 3G3MV: 00, 3G3MV: Yes Yes Byte
mode 01: Continue operation. 01 00
(See note 3.) 02: Maker's specifications 3G3RV: --- 3G3RV:
3G3FV: --- 02
3G3FV:
02
11 Force Fault/Trip 00: Normal operation 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
Communica- 01: Communications
tions external external fault input
fault input
12 Force Status 00: Normal status --- 00 Yes No Byte
Communica- 01: Communications
tions external external fault detected.
fault input status (Inverter stopped with fault
detection.)

Note 1. The following table shows the status of remote I/O output signals and operation indicated by
the content of Attribute 06 (State, i.e., Inverter status).
Setting Status Condition
00 hex Vendor specific A condition other than the ones
below.
01 hex Startup: Preparation not complete (setting con- Inverter Ready signal is OFF.
stants)
02 hex Not ready: Stopped (preparation complete) Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur-
ing Run signal is OFF.
03 hex Inverter ready: Stopped (preparation complete) Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur-
ing Run signal is OFF.
04 hex Enabled: Operating During Run signal (control I/O) is
ON.
05 hex Stopping: Decelerating (Operating with both Ctrl. From Net is ON, During For-
forward and reverse references equal to 0.) ward Run is OFF, During Reverse
Run is OFF, and During Run is ON.
06 hex Fault_Stop: Operating with fault detected Alarm signal is ON.
07 hex Faulted: Fault detected Fault signal is ON.

Note 2. The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running.

6-11
Message Communications Chapter 6
Note 3. A DeviceNet Fault mode can be set from communications in the 3G3MV only; it cannot be
changed from communications in the 3G3RV, 3G3PV, or 3G3FV. Set the fault mode in the
Inverter’s parameters.

● Fault Codes
DeviceNet fault code Operator display Meaning
0000 --- Inverter normal
2120 GF Ground fault
2130 SC Short circuit
2200 OL2 Inverter overload
2220 OL1 Motor overload
2221 OL3 Overtorque detection 1
2222 OL4 Overtorque detection 2
2300 OC Overcurrent
3130 PF Input phase loss
LF Output phase loss
3210 OV Main circuit overvoltage
3220 UV1 Undervoltage (main)
3222 UV3 Undervoltage (MC)
4200 OH Overheat
4210 OH1 Overheat
5110 UV2 Control power supply fault
5120 PUF Fuse open
5300 OPR Operator disconnection
6320 ERR EEPROM write failure
7110 RR Braking transistor failure
7112 RH Braking resistor overheating
7301 PGO PG is disconnected
7310 OS Overspeed
DEV Speed deviation
7500 BUS Communications error
9000 EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
EF5 External fault (Terminal 5)
EF6 External fault (Terminal 6)
EF7 External fault (Terminal 7)
EF8 External fault (Terminal 8)
FF0 Communications external fault

6-12
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-6 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex

AC/DC drive objects are assigned to command-related functions for drive devices such as Inverters
and Servomotors. Command-related data reading and writing, monitor data reading, set data scale
changes, and so on, are all enabled. These functions are shared with similar functions used for
remote I/O, so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote
I/O.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 2A soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 03 At Reference 00: Stopped, accelerating --- 00 Yes No Byte
or decelerating
01: At reference
04 Net Reference 00: Operate with setting in 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
(See note 1.) n004/b1-01.
01: Force DeviceNet oper-
ation (not valid in 3G3FV).
06 Drive Mode Set to parameter n002/A1- 00 to 03 3G3MV: Yes Yes Byte
02. Some Inverters do not 01
support the setting. 3G3RV:
00: Open loop vector 01
([n002/A1-02] = 2) 3G3PV:
01: V/f control ([n002/A1- 01
02] = 0) 3G3FV:
02: V/f control with PG 00
(A1-02 = 1)
03: Flux vector control
(A1-02 = 3)
After changing the set-
ting, the power must be
turned OFF and then ON
again to enable the new
setting.

6-13
Message Communications Chapter 6
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 07 Speed Actual The output frequency --- 0000 Yes No Word
Rotational monitor (U-02/U1-02) can
Speed Monitor be monitored in hexadeci-
(See notes 2 mal with the minimum unit
and 4.) as 1 hex.
The frequency monitor’s
minimum unit can be set
by the frequency refer-
ence setting and display
units in n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set val-
ues.
When r/min units are
being used, a multiplier
can be set in attribute 16
(the Speed Scale setting).
08 Speed Refer- Can be set and read in 0 to max. fre- 0000 Yes Yes Word
ence hexadecimal with the fre- quency
Rotational quency reference mini-
Speed Refer- mum unit as 1 hex.
ence The frequency reference
(See notes 2 minimum unit can be set
and 4.) by the frequency refer-
ence setting and display
units in n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set val-
ues.
When r/min units are
being used, a multiplier
can be set in attribute 16
(the Speed Scale setting).
09 Current Actual Can be referenced in --- 0000 Yes No Word
hexadecimal with the out-
put current monitor U-03/
U1-03 minimum unit as
0.1 A.
Setting the attribute 17
current scale enables a
multiplication factor to be
set.
0F Power Actual Can be referenced in --- 0000 Yes No Word
hexadecimal with the out-
put power monitor U-11/
U1-08 minimum unit as
1 W.
Setting the attribute 1A
power scale enables a
multiplication factor to be
set.

6-14
Message Communications Chapter 6
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 10 Input Voltage Can be referenced in --- 0000 Yes No Word
hexadecimal with the input
voltage setting (200 or
400/E1-01) minimum unit
as 1 V.
Setting the attribute 1B
voltage scale enables a
multiplication factor to be
set.
11 Output Voltage Can be referenced in --- 0000 Yes No Word
hexadecimal with the out-
put voltage monitor U-04/
U1-06 minimum unit as 1
V.
Setting the attribute 1B
voltage scale enables a
multiplication factor to be
set.
12 Accel Time Can be set and read in 0.0 to 2710 hex Yes Yes Word
hexadecimal with the 6,000.0 s (10.0 s)
acceleration time 1 n019/ (0.00 to
13 Decel Time C1-01 and deceleration 600.00 s) 2710 hex Yes Yes Word
time 1 n020/C1-02 mini- (10.0 s)
mum unit as 1 ms.
Depending on the acceler-
ation/ deceleration time
unit n019/C1-10 setting,
numbers below 100 ms or
10 ms are truncated.
Setting the attribute 1C
time scale enables a mul-
tiplication factor to be set.
14 Low Speed Limit Can be set and read in 0 to 109% of 0000 Yes Yes Word
(See notes 2 hexadecimal with the fre- maximum fre-
and 3.) quency reference lower quency
limit n034/d2-02 and the
15 High Speed frequency reference upper 0 to 110% of 0708 hex Yes Yes Word
Limit limit n033/d2-01 minimum maximum fre- (1,800 r/
(See notes 2, 3, unit as 1 ms. quency min)
and 4.)
The minimum unit can be
set by the frequency refer-
ence setting and display
units in n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set val-
ues.
When r/min units are
being used, a multiplier
can be set in attribute 16
(the Speed Scale setting).

6-15
Message Communications Chapter 6
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 16 Speed scale Speed data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
speed data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 1 [r/min] x 1/2a
a: Speed scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
17 Current scale Current data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
current data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 0.1 [A] x 1/2b
b: Current scale set
value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1A Power scale Power data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
power data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 1 [W] x 1/2c
c: Power scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1B Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
voltage data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 1 [V] x 1/2d
d: Voltage scale set
value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1C Time scale Time data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
time data unit value is cal-
culated as follows:
Unit = 1 [ms] x 1/2e
e: Voltage scale set
value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1D Reference From 00: Reference other than --- 00 Yes No Byte
Net DeviceNet (n004/b1-01)
(See note 1.) 01: Operating with
DeviceNet.
64 Electric power Average power value (W) --- 0000 Yes No Long
0000
65 Electric power Power value measure- 00 to 02 00 Yes Yes Byte
time scale ment period (T) (reflected
when power is turned ON)
00: 10 minutes
01: 30 minutes
02: 60 minutes
6F Specific alarm Alarm code of the alarm or --- 0000 Yes No Word
minor fault detected in the
Inverter. For more details,
refer to 8-5 Inverter
Alarms.
70 Specific error Fault code of the fault --- 00 Yes No Byte
detected in the Inverter.
For more details, refer to
8-4 Inverter Faults.

6-16
Message Communications Chapter 6
Note 1. The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running.
Note 2. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is always r/min. The number
of motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting
and display units) when using DeviceNet (open network). After changing the unit setting,
turn the power OFF and then ON again.
Note 3. Cannot be changed during running.
Note 4. If a frequency reference value has been already set and the frequency display unit is
changed via the network, a frequency reference value higher than expected may result after
unit conversion. After changing the frequency display unit, always check the frequency ref-
erence value before starting an operation.

● Communications Data Setting Examples

Example 1: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
conditions set.
Number of poles set in n035/o1-03: 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 0
• Converting frequency to rotational speed:
Frequency x 120 / number of poles = 60 x 120/4 = 1,800 r/min
• Converting rotational speed to minimum unit:
Rotational speed / unit = 1,800 / (1 r/min x 1/20) = 1,800
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 1,800 (decimal) = 0708 (hex)
Example 2: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
condition set.
Frequency setting in n035/o1-03: 0 (Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol.)
• Converting frequency to minimum setting unit:
Frequency / minimum unit = 60 / 0.01 = 6,000
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 6,000 (decimal) = 1,770 (hex)
Example 3: Finding the communications data for setting a one-minute acceleration time with the fol-
lowing condition set.
Time scale (attribute 1C): −3 (FD hex)
• Matching the acceleration time unit:1 minute = 60 seconds = 60,000 ms
• Converting acceleration time to minimum unit:
Acceleration time / unit = 60,000 / (1 ms x 1/2−3) = 7,500
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 7,500 (decimal) = 1D4C (hex)

● Communications Data Reference Example

In this example, the hexadecimal value 0BB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the
following conditions set.
Number of poles set in n035/o1-03: 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 1
• Converting communications data to decimal: 0BB8 (hex) = 3,000 (decimal)
• Converting from minimum unit to r/min:
Communications data x unit = 3,000 x (1 r/min x 1/21) = 1,500 (r/min)

6-17
Message Communications Chapter 6

6-7 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex

Inverter parameters can be read and written using explicit messages. Class 100 decimal (64 hex)
has been provided with instances and attributes corresponding to each parameter in the Inverter.
Send an explicit message to the class, instance, or attribute of the parameter to be set as described
below.

■ Parameter Database
All parameters in the parameter database have been unified to 1-word (16-bit) data. Even settings of
0 and 1 will be treated as 1-word (16-bit) data in explicit messages.

Note When sending or receiving 1-word (16-bit) data in an explicit message, the leftmost and right-
most bytes will be reversed. Accordingly, when reading or writing data, the attribute value will
be in the upper byte, the lower byte will contain the lower byte of the data, and the upper byte
of the data will be in the upper byte of the next word.

• Communications line data is sent and received in the order of lower byte, then upper byte.
• PLC internal processing data, such as when sending commands, are sent and received in the
order of upper byte, then lower byte.

■ Parameter Read and Write Data

Read data and write data for parameters is calculated as shown below and then transmitted in hexa-
decimal.
• Convert to hexadecimal values with the function/parameter minimum setting unit taken as 1.
Example: To set a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0.01 Hz.
60/0.01 = 6000 → 1770 hex
• Negative numbers are expressed as two's complements. (A 3G3MV is used in this example).
Example: To set a frequency reference bias (n061) of -100% when the minimum setting unit is 1%:
100/1 = 100 decimal = 0064 hex, −100% → FF9C hex

0064 Hex = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
Bit reversal
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 = FF9B Hex
+1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 = FF9C Hex

• If the original data is already in hexadecimal, it is transmitted as is.

Note All parameters in the 3G3MV Series are in decimal, so convert them to hexadecimal.

• Set bits that are not used to “0.”

• Do not set data for unused registers.

6-18
Message Communications Chapter 6
■ Using the ENTER Command

● Storing Parameter Data in a 3G3MV Using the ENTER Command

To store the parameter data received in EEPROM, send an ENTER command as shown in the fol-
lowing table. To store a series of data for more than one parameter, send an ENTER command after
completing all the settings.
Data type Transmission Inverter Operation Remarks
ENTER command Write 0000 as the data used Previously received param- Used to store data even
to write to by the function (i.e., the eter setting data is stored in after a power interruption.
EEPROM ENTER command). Use the EEPROM.
following codes: Note: The maximum num-
Class: 100 decimal (64 hex) ber of write opera-
Instance: 255 decimal tions that can be
(FF hex) performed to
Attribute: 253 hex (FD hex) EEPROM is 100,000.
Not writing to ENTER command not sent. Previously received param- If there is frequent rewriting
EEPROM eter setting data is already of data, do not send ENTER
validated as operating data. commands each time
Send ENTER command because of the limit to the
only if storing to EEPROM. number of times EEPROM
can be written. Be sure to
send an ENTER command
once before the power sup-
ply is interrupted.

● Enabling Parameter Data in a 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Using the ENTER Command

To enable parameter data that has been received, send an ENTER command as shown in the follow-
ing table to either store or not store the parameters in EEPROM. To enable a series of data for more
than one transmission, send only one ENTER command after sending all of the data.
Data type Transmission Inverter Operation Remarks
ENTER command Write 0000 as the data used Previously received param- Used to store data even
that writes param- by the function (i.e., the eter setting data is stored in after a power interruption.
eters to EEPROM ENTER command). Use the EEPROM.
following codes: Note: The maximum num-
Class: 100 decimal (64 hex) ber of write opera-
Instance: 255 decimal (FF tions that can be
hex) performed to
Attribute: 253 hex (FD hex) EEPROM is 100,000.
ENTER command Write 0000 as the data used Previously received param- If there is frequent rewriting
that does not write by the function (i.e., the eter setting data is enabled of data, do not send ENTER
parameters to ENTER command). Use the as operating data without commands each time
EEPROM following codes: storing it to EEPROM. because of the limit to the
Class: 100 decimal (64 hex) number of times EEPROM
Instance: 255 decimal (FF can be written. Be sure to
hex) send an ENTER command
Attribute: 221 hex (DD hex) that writes data to EEPROM
once before the power sup-
ply is interrupted.

6-19
Message Communications Chapter 6
■ Parameter Classes, Instances, and Attributes
For details on each Inverter’s functions and the registers allocated to each parameter, refer to 10-4
3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes, 10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers,
Classes, Instances, and Attributes, 10-6 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes, and 10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.

6-20
 Chapter 7

Configurator Settings
7-1 Basic Configurator Operations
7-2 Smart Slave Functions
7-3 Edit Device Parameters Window
7-4 Monitor Device Window
7-5 Maintenance Information Window
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
This chapter describes the Smart Slave functions provided with the 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Com-
munications Unit and 3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card, and the methods for setting
and monitoring these functions using the OMRON Configurator (Ver. 2.34).

Note If using a version of the Configurator earlier than Ver. 2.34, download the update module for the
Configurator from the OMRON homepage and apply as specified.

7-1 Basic Configurator Operations

7-1-1 System Configuration for Smart Slave Functions

The operating methods described in this section are based on a system configuration using a Config-
urator connected and online as shown in the following diagram.

■ Configurator Connected to DeviceNet Network

DeviceNet (Master) Unit
DeviceNet Configurator
3G8F5-DRM21-E ISA Board, or
3G8E2-DRM21-EV1 PC Card

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV,
3G3RV, 3G3PV, or
3G3FV Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN

Slave Slave
MIN

Slave
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
- Risk

3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
Read of elect
manual
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

AVERTISd the supply neutra

ements,
MASS:0.6kg

make
PRG:

Lisez SMENT - Risqu l for 400V sure

class.
manue electr e de decha

Communications Unit (for

'
Attend l avant ique.
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

3G3MV Inverter)

3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
Communications Card (for
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV
Inverter)

7-2
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Configurator Connected to RS-232C Port of the CPU Unit
DeviceNet (Master) Unit
DeviceNet Configurator
WS02-CFDC1-E Software

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV,
3G3RV, 3G3PV, or
3G3FV Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN
MIN

Slave Slave Slave

STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL

OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO

LOT NO: 8Y1

SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3
PJVOP-14 R

INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0

FILE NO: E179149

IP20 OMRON Corporation
SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER

INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001
200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING

INSTALLATION CATEGORY
7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk

3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
manual ofelectric
Wait 1 before shock.
discon minute for capac
installing.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .

MADE IN JAPAN
AVERTISd the supply neutra
ements,

MASS:0.6kg
make

PRG:
Lisez SMENT - Risqu l for 400V sure
class.
manue electr e de decha
'

Communications Unit (for

Attend l avant ique.
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

3G3MV)

3G3RV-PDRT2 DeviceNet
Communications Card (for
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV)

7-1-2 Displaying Windows

The methods for operating the window displays used for setting and accessing the Inverter’s Smart
Slave functions are described here.
• Edit Device Parameters Window
This window is used to set the default connection path and each of the set values for the Smart Slave func-
tions. After setting, the set values are shown in the Inverter by clicking the Download and Reset Buttons.
• Monitor Device Window
This window displays the online information that is always obtained from the Configurator. The present value
can be displayed online or reset from this window.
• Maintenance Information Window
This window displays information specifically related to maintenance. The maintenance information is
refreshed when this window is displayed or when the Update Button is clicked.

Note The methods used to operate each window are described here, but the network configuration
must be created in the Configurator according to the system being used. Refer to the
DeviceNet Configurator Ver. 2.@ Operation Manual (W382).

7-3
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Configurator Window (Example of Main Window)
Icon for switching to the Main Window
Inverter icon
Icon for switching to Maintenance Mode Window

▲▲
▲
Hardware list
▲

Inverters described
▲ ▲

in this manual
(mounted with
DeviceNet
▲

Communications
Unit/Card)

Network Configuration
Window

Note 1. For details on the standard Main Window (white background), and the Maintenance Mode
Window (blue background), refer to the DRT2-series DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual
(W404).
Note 2. The 3G3FV-PDRT2 listing in the Hardware list refers to the 3G3RV-PDRT2 mounted to the
3G3FV-series Inverter. 3G3FV-PDRT2 is not a DeviceNet Communications Card model
number.

■ Displaying the Edit Device Parameters Window

1.From the Main Window, double-click the icon of the corresponding Slave (Inverter) in the Network
Configuration Window, or click the right mouse button over the icon and select Parameter and Ed-
it.
2.From the Maintenance Mode Window, click the icon for the corresponding Slave (Inverter), click
the right mouse button and select Parameter and Edit.
The Edit Device Parameters Window will be displayed.
Example of Operations from the Main Window

7-4
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Click the right mouse button and
select Parameter and Edit.

Edit Device Parameters Window

3.Click each of the tabs, i.e., the General, OUT, IN, Operation Time, Parameter Transmission,
Warning Torque, and Inverter Parameters Tabs, and check the type of information that is dis-
played in each tab page.
4.Click the Cancel Button to close the Edit Device Parameters Window.

Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages.

7-5
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Displaying the Monitor Device Window
1.The operation is the same from both the Main Window and the Maintenance Mode Window.
Click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave (Inverter) in the Network
Configuration Window, and select Monitor. The Monitor Device Window will be displayed.
Monitor Device
Window

2.Click each of the tabs in the window to check the information displayed in each tab page.
3.Click the Close Button to close the Monitor Device Window.

Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages.

■ Displaying the Maintenance Information Window

1.From the Main Window, click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave (In-
verter) in the Network Configuration Window, and select Maintenance Information.
From the Maintenance Mode Window, double-click the icon of the corresponding Slave (Inverter)
in the Network Configuration Window, or click the right mouse button over the icon and select
Maintenance Information. The Maintenance Information Window will be displayed.
Maintenance
Information Window

2.Click each of the tabs in the window to check the information displayed in each tab page.

7-6
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
3.Click the Close Button to close the Maintenance Information Window.

Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages.

7-1-3 Network Connection Precautions

When information is uploaded for the 3G3MV-PDRT2 and 3G3RV-PDRT2 Slaves and the DeviceNet
(Master) Unit that are connected to the network, a warning icon may be displayed under the Slave.
This icon indicates that the I/O size of the Slave and DeviceNet (Master) Unit do not match. If opera-
tion is continued without removing the cause of the warning icon, it will not be possible to see other
detected errors in the Unit status, so always use the following method to match the I/O sizes and can-
cel the warning icon.

■ Operations Using the Configurator

1.Click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave (Inverter) in the Network
Configuration Window and select Property.

2.The Property Window for the 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit will be displayed
(the model name will depend on the type of Inverter used). Click the I/O Information Tab.
Click the Get the I/O Size from the Scan List Button and then close the window.

7-7
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

3.Check that the warning icon has been canceled from the Network Configuration Window.

7-8
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-2 Smart Slave Functions

This section describes the details of Smart Slave functions and the operating procedures used in the
Edit Device Parameters Window that is important for setting the Smart Slave functions. The details
on setting and monitoring these functions from the Configurator are also provided here.

7-2-1 Precautions when Operating the Edit Device Parameters

Window
!Caution To set or change the settings in the Inverter’s Edit Device Parameters Window,
first click the Upload Button, and read the present set values for the Inverter. If the
Download Button is clicked without first clicking the Upload Button, the parameter
constants for the Inverter will be overwritten.

■ Setting and Changing Device Parameters

1.Displaying the Edit Device Parameters Window for the Inverter
Display the Edit Device Parameters Window for the Inverter settings that are to be set or changed
using the method shown in 7-1-2 Displaying Windows.
2.Reading the Inverter’s Present Set Values
Click the Upload Button to read the Inverter’s present set values.

Note If the settings are made without performing this operation, all set values, including the pa-
rameter constants for the Inverter, will be overwritten.
Particularly if the parameter constants have already been set using a Digital Operator or oth-
er device, all the parameter constants will be initialized and set to the default values set in
the Configurator.

Edit Device
Parameters Window

Click the Upload Button.

7-9
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
3.Set the Smart Slave functions.
Refer to the details on Smart Slave functions provided in the following pages, click each of the
Tabs, and set or change the settings, as required.
4.Downloading the Set Values to the Inverter
Click the General Tab, and click the Download Button. All the set values will be sent to the Invert-
er.
5.Resetting the Inverter and Enabling the Set Values
Click the Reset Button to reset the Inverter, and enable the set values.
6.Completing the Operation
Click the OK Button. The Edit Device Parameters Window will close.

Note Details on Smart Slave functions and which windows are used to set or monitor these func-
tions are provided in the following pages. The operating procedure explained here (i.e., dis-
playing the Edit Device Parameters Window, clicking the Upload Button, making the settings,
and clicking the Download Button, Reset Button, and OK Button) is not explained again.

7-2-2 Average Power Monitor Function

■ Functions
• This function monitors the power (kW) that the Inverter supplies each hour and determines the
cumulative power usage from the hourly average.
• The power value during output is sampled at fixed intervals, and the average (moving average) is
calculated from ten samples.
• The amount of power used by the system can be obtained without using special sensors or per-
forming any calculations. In addition, monitoring the power usage can help reduce energy usage
and identify power consumption problems in the system.
• The sampling cycle can be selected from 10 min, 30 min, or 1 hour.
• The Configurator can be used to monitor the average power simply.

Note When applications with frequent starting and stopping are being used, the output power varies
widely according to the sampling timing. Therefore, the power usage cannot be monitored
accurately. This function is effective for applications that do not involve much starting and stop-
ping, such as for conveyors and fans.

7-10
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Application Example
Programmable
Controller

DeviceNet
(Master) Unit Average power data
DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN

Power supply
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW

Average power is Read

Wait 1
manual
- Risk
before
discon minute for capac
nectin
of elect
installing.
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply
requir .
ric shoc

rge after
k.
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

SMENT

calculated internally.
l for 400V sure
Lisez
manue - Risqu e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electrique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

Motor

How much energy is

being used?

■ Setting Method
1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Select the desired calculation period from the pull-down menu for the Average Electric Power Mon-
itor Calculation Cycle field.
General Tab Page in
the Edit Device
Parameters Window

Note After downloading the settings to the Inverter, they will be enabled when the power to the
Inverter is turned OFF once and then ON again, or the Inverter is reset (by clicking the Reset
Button on the General Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window). Until one of these
(power OFF/ON or reset) is performed, the previous settings will be displayed when the set-
tings are uploaded from the Inverter.

7-11
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window. The present average power value will be dis-
played for the Average Electric Power.
General Tab Page in
the Monitor Device
Window

● Using the Maintenance Information Window

Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window. The present average power value will
be displayed in the Average Electric Power field.

7-2-3 Warning Torque Detection

■ Functions
• This function can detect equipment errors by monitoring the output current.
• Problems in the load can be detected in the Inverter’s current (torque) level. The function provides
advanced warning of an increased load caused by deterioration in the mechanical system (such as
a loose chain, low bearing oil, or worn-out equipment), so preventative maintenance can be per-
formed.
• The monitor values can be set for the output current level during acceleration and deceleration, and
during frequency agreement (while operating at constant speed).
• When the detected output current is greater than or equal to the monitor value, a warning torque is
detected.
• When a warning torque is detected, the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Unit’s Status Area
turns ON. Flags in the Unit’s Status Area can also be checked from the Configurator.

Note This function generates a warning (alarm), so operation continues.

7-12
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Application Example
Programmable
Controller

DeviceNet
(Master) Unit Load error warning/alarm
DeviceNet

Inverter
Bearing
FREF FOUT
F/R
IOUT MNTR
LO/RE PRGM

RUN
Current is output damage
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY

(compared with load)

RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

Comparison with
SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

internally set monitor

7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk
manual of elect
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

AVERTISd the supply neutra

ements,
MASS:0.6kg

make

value. A warning
PRG:

Lisez SMENT - Risqu l for 400V sure

class.
Attend
manue
l avant electr e de decha
'
ique.
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
' que~

torque is detected
400V.

Motor
when this value is
exceeded. (The filter Has an error
can be set so that occurred in the load
unrelated statuses system (increased
are not detected.) load)?

7-13
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Setting Method
Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window, and set each setting item.
Warning Torque Tab
Page in the Edit
Device Parameters
Window

Item Setting range Details

Current 1 (during 0.0 to 6,553.5 (A) Sets the monitor value (threshold) of the output current
Accel/Decel) (See note 1.) during acceleration or deceleration.
Current 2 (during Fre- 0.0 to 6,553.5 (A) Sets the monitor value (threshold) of the output current
quency Agree) (See note 2.) during frequency agreement (while operating at con-
stant speed).
Detection Filter Detection sensitivity level Sets the level of sensitivity to prevent detection of val-
1 (lowest) to level 5 (high- ues that temporarily exceed the threshold value.
est)
(See note 3.)
Status Hold or do not hold Selected: Status is maintained when a warning torque
is detected.
Not selected: The status is refreshed every time.

Note 1. When Current 1 is set to 0.0 (A), the warning torque during acceleration/deceleration is not
detected.
Note 2. When Current 2 is set to 0.0 (A), the warning torque during frequency agreement is not de-
tected.
Note 3. A detection sensitivity level of 5 disables the filter. A detection sensitivity level of 1 uses the
average of 5 sampled current levels (moving average) as the detection value.

7-14
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

• Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Monitor Device Window.
• The following information will be displayed.
Warning Torque Tab
Page in the Monitor
Device Window

Item Details
Accel/Decel Torque Cur- Displays the output current monitor value (threshold) level during acceleration/
rent deceleration.
Accel/Decel Peak Torque Displays the maximum output current level during acceleration/deceleration.
Note: The value can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Peak Value Button
on the right side of the window.
Warning Torque during Displays this item as selected when the output current level exceeds the monitor
Accel/Decel value (threshold) during acceleration/deceleration.
Torque Current during Fre- Displays the output current monitor value (threshold) level during frequency
quency Agree agreement.
Peak Torque during Fre- Displays the maximum output current level during frequency agreement.
quency Agree Note: The value can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Peak Value Button
on the right side of the window.
Warning Torque during Displays this item as selected when the output current level exceeds the monitor
Frequency Agree value (threshold) during frequency agreement.
Clear Error Flag Button Clears the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note: This button is enabled when the Status field is selected on the Warning
Torque Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window.

7-15
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
● Using the Maintenance Information Window
Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window, and set each setting item.

Note The differences between the Warning Torque Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and that
in the Maintenance Information Window are as follows:

• The Accel/Decel Peak Torque and Peak Torque (during Frequency Agree) fields in the Main-
tenance Information Window do not show the present values, but the values when the main-
tenance information was last refreshed.
• The Clear Buttons for peak values and Clear Error Flag Button are not included in the Mainte-
nance Information Window.

7-2-4 Current Trace

■ Functions
• This function traces (samples and records) the output current waveform to the motor.
• Troubleshooting can be performed easily, without connecting measuring equipment.
• The Configurator can be used to set the current trace’s trigger setting, set the sampling cycle, and
display the current waveform.
• The forward command, reverse command, frequency agree, or error signal can be used as the trig-
ger, or the trigger can be activated manually (using button operations). By selecting an appropriate
trigger, the data required (for example, from immediately before an error occurs) can be traced.
• The sampling cycle can be set to 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, or a value up to 100 s. Up to 150
samples can be taken.
• Trace data can be converted into CSV format and saved in a file, allowing use of spreadsheet soft-
ware such as Microsoft Excel.

7-16
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Application Example
Sets the current Configurator Programmable Controller
trace conditions. The open protocol
Displays the allows the CMND
waveform. instruction in the PLC
to be used for placing
triggers and collecting
DeviceNet waveform data.,
Trigger condition Waveform data (Master) Unit
DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN

Current is output
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

ALARM

Current level is
200V 3PHA
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk
manual of elect
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.

internally traced
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

Lisez SMENT
manue - Risqu
l for 400V sure
e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electrique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''

and saved.
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

Motor

Output current
The motor torque
(Inverter’s output current)
fluctuates due to
deterioration of the
equipment, such as loose
chain or wear on the
machine). A current Time
waveform can be used to
check the fluctuation.

7-17
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Setting Method
Click the Current Trace Tab in the Maintenance Information Window and set each item.
Current Trace Tab
Page in the
Maintenance
Information Window

Item Setting range Details

Trigger Forward run command, Sets the signal for trace timing.
reverse run command, fre- Note: The trace is performed by combining the trigger
quency agreement, or setting with the Start Trigger, Middle Trigger, and End
error Trigger Buttons.
Current Trace Sam- 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, Select the trace sampling cycle from the pull-down
pling Cycle 100 ms, or a value up to menu.
100 s

7-18
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Tracing Methods
Use the following button operations to perform traces.
Button Details
Trace Performs manual tracing. When this button is clicked, the trace starts, and when the Can-
cel Button is clicked, the trace stops.
Note 1: When the amount of trace data exceeds 150 points, the oldest data is deleted.
Note 2: The 150 points that exist in memory when the Cancel Button is clicked will be
stored.

Recorded trace data →Time

Trace start Trace stop

(Trace Button is ON.) (Cancel Button is ON.)

Trace (Buffer full) Performs manual tracing. When this button is clicked, the trace starts, and when 150
points have been sampled, the trace stops.
Note: If the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace, the trace will stop.
Recorded trace data →Time

Trace start Trace stop

(Trace Button is ON.) (150 points sampled)

Start Trigger Starts the trace using the signals selected in the Trigger field, and stops the trace when
150 points have been sampled.
Note: The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace.
Recorded trace data →Time

Start Trigger Button ON. Trace stop

Trace start (trigger signal ON) (150 points sampled)

Middle Trigger When this button is clicked, the trace starts. When the signals selected in the Trigger field
are turned ON, 75 points are sampled, and then the trace stops.
Note 1: When the trigger signal is ON, the 75 points before the trigger and the 75 points
after the trigger are recorded.
Note 2: The trace also stops when the Cancel Button is clicked.
Recorded trace data →Time

Trace start (Middle Trigger Trigger Trace stop (75 points

Button ON) signal ON sampled)

End Trigger When this button is clicked, the trace starts. When the signals selected in the Trigger field
are turned ON, the trace stops.
Note 1: The 150 points from immediately before the trigger signal turns ON are recorded.
Note 2: The trace also stops when the Cancel Button is clicked.
Recorded trace data →Time

Trace start (End Trigger Trace stop

Button ON) Trigger signal ON

7-19
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitor Methods
The trace data can be checked on the History Tab Page and Graph Tab Page.

● History Tab Page

Current Trace Tab Page and History Tab
Page in the Maintenance Information
Window

Item Details
Time Displays the time determined from the current trace sampling cycle.
Current Displays all current levels traced in every sampling cycle.
Status Displays whether the sampling timing is during acceleration/deceleration or fre-
quency agreement.
Save Button Converts the traced data into CSV format and saves as a file.
Note: When this button is clicked, the Save File Window is displayed.

7-20
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
● Graph Tab Page
The graph shown in this tab page consists of a vertical axis representing the current level shown in
the History Tab Page, and a horizontal axis representing the time.

Note Other setting items and button functions in this tab page are the same as in the History Tab
Page.

Current Trace Tab Page and

Graph Tab Page in the
Maintenance Information
Window

7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor Function

■ Functions
• This function can perform a high-speed calculation in the Slave (independent of the ladder pro-
gram) to determine the time required for an input to go ON after a particular signal or reference
goes ON.
• By setting the monitor value, the operating time of the devices connected to the Inverter (motor and
peripheral devices) can be monitored.
• The Operation Time Over Flag in the Unit’s Status Area turns ON when the operating time exceeds
the monitor value.

7-21
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
• The combination of start signal (and command) and completion signal for operating time measure-
ment are determined as shown in the following table.
No. Operating time measurement trigger Remarks
Measurement start condition Measurement
completion
condition
00 Multi-function contact output: ON Input 4: ON Output to input
01 Multi-function output 1: ON Input 5: ON Output to input
02 Input 2: ON Input 3: ON Input to input
03 Input 4: ON Input 5: ON Input to input
04 Input 0 is ON, input 1 is ON, or a forward/reverse Input 4: ON Forward/reverse run com-
run command is sent from the network. mand to input
05 Input 0 is ON, input 1 is ON, or a forward/reverse Input 5: ON Forward/reverse run com-
run command is sent from the network. mand to input

Note 1. The input references in the above table refer to the inputs in the following table. When control
I/O remote I/O is used, the input will be turned ON not only when the terminal’s signal is ON,
but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I/O. (The terminal’s ON/OFF
status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I/O.)
Name
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
Input 0 Terminal S1 (multi-function Terminal S1 (forward run/ Terminal 1 (forward run/
input 1) status stop) status stop) status
Input 1 Terminal S2 (multi-function Terminal S2 (reverse run/ Terminal 2 (reverse run/
input 2) status stop) status stop) status
Input 2 Terminal S3 (multi-function Terminal S3 (multi-function Terminal 3 (multi-function
input 3) status input selection 1) status contact input 1) status
Input 3 Terminal S4 (multi-function Terminal S4 (multi-function Terminal 4 (multi-function
input 4) status input selection 2) status contact input 2) status
Input 4 Terminal S5 (multi-function Terminal S5 (multi-function Terminal 5 (multi-function
input 5) status input selection 3) status contact input 3) status
Input 5 Terminal S6 (multi-function Terminal S6 (multi-function Terminal 6 (multi-function
input 6) status input selection 4) status contact input 4) status

Note 2. The combination of 00 and 01 is valid when combined with control I/O remote I/O and the
following parameter settings.
3G3MV: When 18 (12 hex) (communications output) is set in n057 and n058 (multi-function
outputs 1 and 2).
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV: When F (not used) is set in H2-01 and H2-02 (multi-function contact
output and multi-function output 1).
Under these conditions, output from the Inverter control terminal can be controlled by com-
munications, and these signals can be used as triggers to start measurement.

■ Application Example

● Output-to-input Example
It is possible to detect deterioration in cylinder operation and estimate expiration of the cylinder’s ser-
vice life by using the Inverter’s multi-function output to drive the cylinder and inputting the cylinder’s
travel completed signal in the multi-function input.

7-22
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Programmable Controller

DeviceNet (Master) Operating time

Unit measurement results DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
F/R
IOUT MNTR
LO/RE PRGM

Cylinder driven by Cylinder Travel completion

RUN

STOP
RESET
MIN

DIGITAL
MAX
FREQUENCY

multi-function output.
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk
manual of elect
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

Lisez SMENT
manue - Risqu
l for 400V sure
e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electrique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac

Travel completion input by

' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

multi-function input.

● Input-to-input Example
It is possible to detect deterioration in conveyor operation and estimate expiration of the conveyor’s
service life by inputting sensor signals from two locations on the conveyor into the Inverter’s multi-
function input.
Programmable Controller

DeviceNet (Master)
Unit Operating time measurement results DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY

Input 1 Input 2
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk
manual of elect
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

SMENT
Lisez
manue - Risqu
l for 400V sure
e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electrique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

● Forward/Reverse Run Command-to-input Example

It is possible to detect deterioration in the mechanical system and estimate expiration of the equip-
ment’s service life by inputting the signals from sensors installed in the mechanical system driven by
the motor.

7-23
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Programmable Controller

DeviceNet (Master)
Unit Operating time measurement results DeviceNet

Inverter Input travel completion

FREF FOUT
F/R
IOUT MNTR
LO/RE PRGM
using multi-function input
RUN

STOP
RESET
MIN

DIGITAL
MAX
FREQUENCY

Input
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN

Table
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
Read - Risk
manual of elect
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.

Motor
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

Lisez SMENT
manue - Risqu
l for 400V sure
e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electr ique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

Forward run command Ball screw

7-24
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Setting Method
1.Click the Operation Time Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
The numerals 00 to 05 in the No. field correspond to the combinations of signals for the operating
time measurement explained in 7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor Function.
2.Double-click the area to be set, or select the field to be set and then click the Edit Button. The
setting window will be displayed.
Operation Time Tab Page
in the Edit Device
Parameters Window

Double-click the selected field, or click the Edit Button.

Item Setting range Details

Equipment Name (User-set name) Set any name for each device.
Note: The name set here is displayed in the Equipment Name
field.
Operation Time 0 to 65,535 ms Set the monitor value.
Note: The name set here is displayed in the Operation Time field.
Hold Status Button Hold or do not hold Selected: When an operation time monitoring error is detected,
this status is held.
Not selected: The status is refreshed every time.

7-25
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

• Click the Operation Time Tab in the Monitor Device Window.
• The following information will be displayed.
Operation Time Tab Page in the
Monitor Device Window

Item Details
No. Displays a number indicating the combination of start signals and end signals of
the operating time measurement.
An error icon will be displayed to the left of the number if the response time
exceeds the monitor value.
Equipment Name Displays the name of each device.
Response Time Displays the operating time (present value) of each device.
Peak Value Displays the maximum operating time of each device.
Clear Error Button Clears the Operation Time Over Flag in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note: This button is enabled when the Status Hold field is selected (to hold sta-
tuses) on the Operation Time Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
Clear Peak Value Button Clears the operation time peak value to zero.
Note: Select the device for which the peak value is to be cleared, and click the
Peak Value Clear Button to clear the value to zero.

Note The ON/OFF status of the Operation Time Over Monitor Flag can be checked on the General
Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window. When this flag is ON, Operation Time Over check box
will be selected.

● Using the Maintenance Information Window

• Click the Operation Time Tab in the Maintenance Information Window.

Note The differences between the Operation Time Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and in
the Maintenance Information Window are as follows:

• The Operation Time field in the Maintenance Information Window shows the value when the
maintenance information was refreshed and not the present value.

7-26
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
• The Clear Buttons for peak values and Clear Error Button are not included in the Maintenance
Information Window.

7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor

■ Functions
• This function totals the time that one of the Inverter’s control I/O terminals is ON by the second.
• For example, if the RUN output’s ON time is totaled, it is possible to calculate the Inverter’s operat-
ing time and monitor equipment operating time without using the ladder program.
• By measuring the total ON time of the input device connected to the input terminal, the re-
placement time of the input device can be determined.
• By measuring the total ON time of the output device connected to the output terminal, the re-
placement time of the output device can be determined.
• The total ON time for every I/O terminal can be measured, and a monitor value can be set for each
terminal.
• When the total ON time of the terminal reaches the monitor value or higher, the Connected Compo-
nent Maintenance Flag will turn ON in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note 1. The input from the Inverter’s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet
communications, so the input is considered ON when either input source is ON. For exam-
ple, when either the RUN/STOP signal is input from the control terminal block or the input is
being received from DeviceNet communications, the corresponding multi-function input ter-
minal is considered as ON and the ON time is added.
Note 2. Either the cumulative ON time monitor or the contact operations monitor (refer to the follow-
ing function) can be set in each I/O terminal. Both functions cannot be set for the same ter-
minal.
Note 3. The total ON time is written to the EEPROM (in the DeviceNet Communications Unit or
Card) approximately every six minutes. Therefore, depending on the power OFF timing, up
to six minutes worth of data may be lost. To monitor more closely, click the Save Mainte-
nance Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance Information
Window immediately before turning OFF the power. The maintenance information including
the total ON time will be written to the EEPROM.

7-27
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Application Example
Programmable Controller

DeviceNet (Master)
Unit Notifies replacement time.
DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
IOUT MNTR
F/R
LO/RE PRGM

RUN

Rotate command
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW
- Risk

The ON time is totaled

Read of elect
manual
Wait 1 before ric shoc
discon minute for capac
installing. k.
nectin
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply rge after
requir .
MADE IN JAPAN

d the
AVERTIS supply ements,
MASS:0.6kg

neutra make
PRG:

SMENT l for 400V sure

internally.
Lisez
manue - Risqu e de class.
Attend l avant
'
electrique. decha
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

Motor

How long has the

device been operating?

Output device

Input device

■ Setting Methods
Make the settings for the output terminal (or input terminal) on the OUT Tab Page (or IN Tab Page) of
the Edit Device Parameters Window.

● OUT Tab Page Settings

1.Click the OUT Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
The numerals 00 to 02 in the No. field indicate the following output terminals.
00: Multi-function contact output, 01: Multi-function output 1, 02: Multi-function output 2
2.Double-click the fields to be set, or select the field to be set and click the Edit Button to display the
setting window.

7-28
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
OUT Tab Page in the Edit
Device Parameters
Window

Double-click the fields to be set, or click the Edit Button.

Set the name of the connected device.

(Refer to 7-2-11Connected Device Comment.)

Select either Time or Count as the detection mode.

Set the monitor time (in seconds) if using the

cumulative ON time function.
Set whether to clear (OFF) or hold the output
status when a communications error occurs.

● IN Tab Page Settings

1.Click the IN Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
The numerals in the No. field indicate the following input terminals.
No. Details
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
00 Terminal S1 (multi-function Terminal S1 (forward run/stop) Terminal 1 (forward run/stop)
input 1)
01 Terminal S2 (multi-function Terminal S2 (reverse run/stop) Terminal 2 (reverse run/stop)
input 2)
02 Terminal S3 (multi-function Terminal S3 (multi-function Terminal 3 (multi-function con-
input 3) input selection 1) tact input 1)

7-29
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
No. Details
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
03 Terminal S4 (multi-function Terminal S4 (multi-function Terminal 4 (multi-function con-
input 4) input selection 2) tact input 2)
04 Terminal S5 (multi-function Terminal S5 (multi-function Terminal 5 (multi-function con-
input 5) input selection 3) tact input 3)
05 Terminal S6 (multi-function Terminal S6 (multi-function Terminal 6 (multi-function con-
input 6) input selection 4) tact input 4)
06 Terminal S7 (multi-function Terminal S7 (multi-function Terminal 7 (multi-function con-
input 7) input selection 5) tact input 5)
07 Terminal 8 (multi-function con-
tact input 6)

2.Double-click the field to be set, or select the field to be set and click the Edit Button to display the
setting window.
IN Tab Page in the Edit Device
Parameters Window

Double-click the selected field, or click the Edit Button.

Set the name of the connected device.

(Refer to 7-2-11Connected Device Comment.)

Select either Time or Count as the detection mode.

Set the monitor time (in seconds) if using the

cumulative ON time function.

7-30
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

• Click the OUT Tab or IN Tab in the Monitor Device Window to monitor in outputs/inputs.
• The following information will be displayed.

OUT Tab Page in the

Monitor Device
Window

Item Details
No. The settings in the No. field are as follows:
00: Multi-function contact output, 01: Multi-function output 1, 02: Multi-function
output 2
Note: When the present value of the maintenance counter (total ON time or con-
tact operations counter) exceeds the monitor value, the error icon is displayed on
the left side of the corresponding No. setting.
I/O Comment Displays the comment for the connected device for each output terminal.
ON/OFF Displays the ON/OFF status (present value status) for each output terminal.
Maintenance Counter Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for each output terminal.
Note: The total ON time (s) or contact operations count (No. of times) is dis-
played.
Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to zero.
Note: Select the terminal to be cleared, click the Clear Value Button to clear the
value to zero.

Note 1. The monitoring items in the IN Tab Page are similar to the OUT Tab Page. The numeric val-
ues in the No. field, however, indicate each input terminal. (Refer to page 7-29.)
Note 2. The ON/OFF status of the Connected Component Maintenance Flag can be checked on the
General Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window. When this flag is ON, the Connected Com-
ponent Maintenance check box will be selected.

7-31
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
● Using the Maintenance Information Window
Click the OUT Tab or IN Tab in the Maintenance Information Window.

Note The differences between the OUT Tab Page and IN Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window
and in the Maintenance Information Window are as follows:

• The Maintenance Counter field shows the value when the maintenance information was re-
freshed and not the present value.
• The Clear Monitor Present Value Button is not included in this window.
• The maintenance counter can be saved (written to the EEPROM) by clicking the Save Main-
tenance Counter Button.

7-2-7 Contact Operations Monitor

■ Functions
• This function counts the number of times that one of the Inverter’s control I/O terminals goes ON.
• The number of contact operations can be useful in maintenance, e.g., it can indicate when a con-
nected device needs to be replaced.
• The contact operations can be counted for each I/O terminal and a monitor value set for each termi-
nal.
• When the number of contact operations of the terminal reaches or exceeds the monitor value, the
Connected Component Maintenance Flag will turn ON in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note 1. The terminal is considered ON when the ON time reaches or exceeds 20 ms.
Note 2. The input from the Inverter’s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet
communications. Therefore, for example, when either the RUN/STOP signal is input from the
control terminal block or the input is being received from DeviceNet communications, the
corresponding multi-function input terminal is considered as ON and the contact operation
is counted.
Note 3. Either the cumulative ON time monitor (refer to the previous function) or the contact opera-
tions monitor can be set for each I/O terminal. Both functions cannot be set for the same
terminal.
Note 4. The number of contact operations is written to the EEPROM (in the DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit or Card) approximately every six minutes. Therefore, depending on the power
OFF timing, up to six minutes worth of data may be lost. To monitor more closely, click the
Save Maintenance Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance
Information Window immediately before turning OFF the power. The maintenance informa-
tion including the number of contact operations will be written to the EEPROM.

■ Application Example
The applications are the same as for the Cumulative ON Time Monitor (refer to the previous func-
tion).

7-32
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Setting and Monitoring Methods
Use the same methods for the Cumulative ON Time Monitor (refer to the previous function).

7-2-8 Conduction Time Monitor

■ Functions
• The time that power is supplied to the Slave’s internal circuit power supply is totaled and recorded
every 0.1 hours (six minutes).
• The DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card has three monitor values that can be set independently
for the following three time monitoring functions. Each of these values, however, is a total of the
time that the Inverter’s power is ON, and the fan and electrolytic capacitor are not monitored sepa-
rately. Use these operating times as a guide for when the corresponding parts need to be replaced.
Main Unit operating time Cannot be reset.
Fan operating time The present value can be reset to zero.
Electrolytic capacitor The present value can be reset to zero.
operating time

• When the Main Unit operating time reaches or exceeds the monitor value, the Unit Maintenance
Flag will turn ON in the Unit’s Status Area.
• When the fan operating time or electrolytic capacitor operating time reaches or exceeds the monitor
value, the Unit Maintenance Flag (fan or electrolytic capacitor) will turn ON in the Unit’s Status
Area.
• Since the fan operating time and electrolytic capacitor operating time are used to indicate when
those parts need to be replaced, these monitoring times can be reset to zero

Note The Conduction Time is written to the EEPROM (in the DeviceNet Communications Unit or
Card) approximately every six minutes. Therefore, depending on the power OFF timing, up to
six minutes worth of data may be lost. To monitor more closely, click the Save Maintenance
Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance Information Window
immediately before turning OFF the power. The maintenance information including the Con-
duction Time will be written to the EEPROM.

7-33
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Application Example
Programmable Controller

DeviceNet (Master)
Unit Notifies replacement time.
DeviceNet

Inverter
FREF FOUT
F/R
IOUT MNTR
LO/RE PRGM How long has the
device been operating?
RUN
MIN
STOP MAX
FREQUENCY
RESET DIGITAL
OUTPUT: AC3PH 0 Ð 230V 0 Ð 400Hz 0.8A 0.3kVA

OPERATO
LOT NO: 8Y1
SER NO: N810318 Ð 001A Ð 3

PJVOP-14 R
INPUT: AC3PH 200 Ð 230V 50/60Hz 1.1A

0
FILE NO: E179149
IP20 OMRON Corporation

SYSDRI
3G3MV VE RUN
INVERTER
INVERTER 3G3MVÐA2001

200V 3PHA
ALARM
SE
NPIT3129

WARNING
INSTALLATION CATEGORY

7-404-1
0.1kW

The conduction time is Read

Wait 1
manual
- Risk
before
discon minute for capac
nectin
of elect
installing.
To confo g power itor discha
to groun rm to supply
requir .
ric shoc

rge after
k.
MADE IN JAPAN

AVERTISd the supply neutra

ements,
MASS:0.6kg

totaled internally.
make
PRG:

Lisez SMENT - Risqu l for 400V sure

class.
Attend
manue
l avant electr e de decha
'
ique.
ez rge
jusceq ' 1 minute d'installer.
u'a les apres ''
Pour repon conde d'etac
' hment
le neutre dre' aux nsateurs sont d'elec
'
est a la exigences decha
' tricite,
'
masse rges.
'
pour la , s'assurer
- serie
'
400V.
que~

Motor

■ Setting Methods
1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Set the corresponding monitoring times in the Unit Conduction Time, Fan Conduction Time, and
Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time fields.
General Tab Page in
the Edit Device
Parameters Window

The following table shows a guide to the settings.

Item Setting guide Remarks
Unit Conduction 30,000 hr or higher 30,000 hr = 8 hr per day for approximately 10 years.
Time
Fan Conduction 6,000 to 8,000 hr 6,000 hr = 8 hr per day for approximately 2 years.
Time
Electrolytic Capaci- 15,000 to 20,000 hr 15,000 = 8 hr per day for approximately 5 years.
tor Conduction Time

7-34
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Note 1. Set the values above using the guide for Inverter maintenance. (Refer to the inspection and
maintenance information in the operation manual for the Inverter being used.)
Note 2. The calculations shown here are based on usage conditions with an ambient temperature
of 40 °C, 80% load ratio, and operation time of eight hours per day, and installation standards
in the manual.
When poorer conditions are used, set a time that is shorter than the times in the above table.
For example, if the ambient temperature is higher, with the fan life of approximately 6,000
hours, set an earlier inspection period. If the environment is better than these conditions, set
the value to 8,000 hours.
Note 3. When the machine operating time is shorter than the Unit conduction time of the Inverter,
consider the operating time per day of conduction time when calculating.
Example: When power is ON 24 hours per day, but operating time is only six hours.
Fan conduction time: 8,000 × 24/6 = 32,000 (hr)

■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window.
• The present conduction times are displayed in the Unit Conduction Time, Fan Conduction
Time, and Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time fields.
• The items in the unit status report area can be used to check whether the Conduction Time
has reached or exceeded the monitor value. When the monitor value is exceeded, the corre-
sponding item is shown as selected.
General Tab Page in
the Monitor Device
Window

The present values for the fan operating time

and electrolytic capacitor operating time can be
cleared to zero. (Clear the values when the fan
and electrolytic capacitor are replaced.)

Unit status report area

● Using the Maintenance Information Window

Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window.

Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows:

• The Conduction Time Fields in the Maintenance Information Window show the values when
the maintenance information was last refreshed and not the present value.
• The Clear Buttons for present values are not included in the Maintenance Information Window.

7-35
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
• The conduction time can be saved (written to the EEPROM) by clicking the Save Maintenance
Counter Button.

7-2-9 Network Power Supply Voltage Monitor

■ Functions
• The network power supply values are monitored with this function.
• The network power supply values (present value, maximum value, and minimum value) can be
recorded in the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card.
• The network power supply voltage monitor value (factory setting: 11 V) can be set.
• When the voltage drops below the monitor voltage set in the Slave, the Network Power Voltage
Drop Flag turns ON in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note 1. The communications power supply voltage for DeviceNet is a minimum of 11 V. Therefore,
if the power supply voltage is lower than 11 V, the Configurator or explicit messages may not
read process values correctly.
Note 2. The maximum and minimum values for the network power supply voltage are cleared when
the network power supply is turned OFF.

■ Setting Methods
1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Set the monitor voltage in the Network Power Voltage field.

General Tab Page in the

Edit Device Parameters
Window

7-36
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window.
• The voltage values are displayed in the Network Power Voltage, Network Power Voltage
(Peak), and Network Power Voltage (Bottom) fields.
• The ON/OFF status of the Network Power Voltage Drop Flag can be checked in the Unit status
report area. When the flag is ON, the Network Power Voltage Drop check box is selected.
General Tab Page in the
Monitor Device Window

The maximum and minimum values

can be cleared.

Unit status report area

● Using the Maintenance Information Window

Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window.

Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows:

• The voltage values shown in the Maintenance Information Window are when the maintenance
information was refreshed and not the present values.
• The Clear Buttons for the peak and bottom values are not included in the Maintenance Infor-
mation Window.

7-2-10 Unit Comment

■ Function
A user-defined name can be set for each Unit (up to 32 characters) and the names can be stored in
the Slaves.

■ Setting Methods
1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Set the user-defined name (name of the device driving the Inverter, etc.) in the Comment field.

7-37
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
The General Tab Page
in the Edit Device
Parameters Window

■ Checking Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window

Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window (or Maintenance Information Window). The set
name (Unit comment) will be displayed in the Comment field.
General Tab Page in
the Monitor Device
Window

7-2-11 Connected Device Comment

■ Function
• User-defined names can be set for the motor connected to the Inverter and devices connected to
control I/O terminals, and those names can be stored in the Inverter.
• The devices connected to each of the I/O terminals can be checked, allowing the use of remote
maintenance or other methods to identify errors in the connected devices.

7-38
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
• Names can be set using up to 32 characters.

■ Setting Methods
Set the connected device comments in the following tab pages.
• Motor name: General Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window.
• Name of device connected to the output terminal (I/O comment): OUT Tab Page in the Edit
Device Parameters Window.
• Name of device connected to the input terminal (I/O comment): IN Tab Page in the Edit Device
Parameters Window.

● Setting the Motor Name

1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Set a user-defined name (such as the motor type or model) in the Motor Name field.
General Tab Page in
the Monitor Device
Window

● Setting the I/O Device Names

1.Click the OUT Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Set a user-defined name (output device name) in the I/O Comment field.
3.Click the IN Tab.
4.Set a user-defined name (input device name) in the I/O Comment field.

Note For details on the setting window, refer to Setting Methods under 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Monitor.

■ Checking Methods
Check the set connected device comments in the following tab pages.
• Motor name: Motor Name field on the General Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window (or
Maintenance Information Window).

7-39
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
• Output device name: I/O Comment field on the OUT Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window
(or Maintenance Information Window).
• Input device name: I/O Comment field on the IN Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window (or
Maintenance Information Window).

7-2-12 Communications Error Log Monitor

■ Function
• The error status for the last four communications errors can be monitored.
• The communications error details, network power supply voltage at the time of the error, and Unit
ON time are displayed.
• The communications error log can be cleared.

■ Monitoring Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window

Click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Device Window.
• The details are displayed in the Content, Network Power Voltage, and Unit Conduction Time fields.

• Click the Clear Button to clear the communications error log.

• Click the Update Button to check whether a communications error has occurred and refresh the
error log details.

Note If a new error occurs while the Error History Tab Page is being displayed, the error will not be
displayed on the Error History Tab Page in real time. Click the Update Button to display the
most recent error log.

● Using the Maintenance Information Window

Click the Error History Tab in the Maintenance Information Window.

7-40
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows:

• The Update Button is not included in the Maintenance Information Window. (To update the er-
ror log, Click the Update Button on the General Tab Page.)

7-2-13 Last Maintenance Date

■ Function
• The date on which maintenance was last performed can be written to the Unit.
• The timing for future maintenance can be determined more easily.

■ Setting Methods
1.Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Select the desired date from the pull-down menu for the Last Maintenance Date field.
General Tab Page in the Edit
Device Parameters Window

Click the date on the calendar to

input the date.
To enter today’s date, click Today at
the bottom of the calendar.

■ Checking Methods

● Using the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window

Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window (or Maintenance Information Window). The set
date will be displayed in the Last Maintenance Date field.

7-41
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
General Tab Page in
the Monitor Device
Window

7-2-14 Parameter Setting

■ Function
• The Inverter’s user parameters can be set with the Configurator.
• There are two ways to set the parameters, as follows:
• Several of the major parameters can be displayed and set.
(Inverter Parameters Tab Page)
• An individual parameter’s Instance/Attribute can be specified and set.
(Individual Parameters Tab Page)
Note 1. Some parameters cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page settings. To change
these parameters, set them separately on the Individual Parameters Tab Page.
Note 2. When the 3G3FV is used, some parameters cannot be set from the Configurator (parame-
ters that cannot be changed using Class 64). Change these parameters using a Digital Op-
erator.

7-42
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Setting Method 1: Inverter Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device
Parameters Window
1.Click the Inverter Parameters Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
2.Select the parameter group to be displayed from the pull-down menu in the Parameter Group field.
Inverter Parameters Tab Page
in the Edit Device Parameters
Window

Select the parameter group.

Note The displayed parameter groups are classified as shown in the table under Parameter Groups
and Parameters Not Set in Groups on page 7-45. (The parameters that cannot be set depend
on the Inverter series.)
Set the parameters that cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page by using the Indi-
vidual Parameters Tab Page. (The main parameters can be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab
Page.) Use a Digital Operator to set the parameters that cannot be set from the Configurator.

3.The parameter number and name will be displayed in the Parameter Name field, and the param-
eter’s set value is displayed in the Value field. Double-click the Value field of the parameter to be
changed, and change the set value.
Note 1. Use either of the following two methods to set the parameter’s set value.
• Select the set value from the pull-down menu.
• Input the numerical value.
Note 2. The details of the selected parameter are displayed in the Help Area. When setting the pa-
rameter, refer to the default value of the selected parameter that is displayed in the Default
Area. For further details on the parameters, refer to the operation manual of the Inverter be-
ing used.

7-43
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Inverter Parameters Tab
Page in the Edit Device
Parameters Window

Default value of the selected

parameter

Details of the selected parameter

Click this button to return the set value of the selected
parameter to the default value.

■ Setting Method 2: Individual Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device

Parameters Window
1.Click the Individual Parameters Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
Individual Parameters
Tab Page in the Edit
Device Parameters
Window

2.Set the Instance and Attribute of the parameter to be set in the Instance No. and Attribute No.
fields.

Note Refer to the following sections for details on Instance/Attribute settings.

• 3G3MV: 10-4 3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.

• 3G3RV: 10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.
• 3G3PV: 10-6 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.
• 3G3FV: 10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes.

7-44
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
3.Enter the hexadecimal value to be set in the Value field.
4.To write the parameter set values to the Inverter’s internal EEPROM (to restore the set values after
a power interruption), select the Write to EEPROM field.
5.Click the Write Button to write the set value to the Inverter.

Note When the Read Button is clicked, the set value of the specified parameter (Instance/Attribute)
is read from the Inverter and displayed as a hexadecimal in the Result field.

■ Parameter Groups and Parameters Not Set in Groups

● 3G3MV

Parameter Groups
Parameter group Details
All Parameters Function Group 1 n002 to n049
Function Group 2 n050 to n079
Function Group 3 n080 to n119
Function Group 4 n120 to n179
Function Group 5 ENTER command (Save to EEPROM)
Function Group 6 Speed reference, speed monitor, current moni-
tor, output voltage

Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page (Use the
Individual Parameters Tab)
Parameter Class 64 Details
No. Instance Attribute
n001 01 01 Parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization
n064 01 40 Frequency reference loss detection selection
n087 01 57 Cumulative operation time selection Can be set to 5.5 kW/7.5 kW only
n088 01 58 Cumulative operation time
n101 01 65 Speed search deceleration time
n102 01 66 Speed search level
n151 01 97 RS-422 communications settings (These parameters are not used for
n152 01 98 DeviceNet, so they are not set.)
n153 01 99
n154 01 9A
n155 01 9B
n156 01 9C
n157 01 9D
n158 01 9E Motor code (set value differs with capacity)
n166 01 A6 Open input phase detection level Can be set to 5.5 kW/7.5 kW only
n167 01 A7 Open input phase detection time
n168 01 A8 Open output phase detection level
n169 01 A9 Open output phase detection time

7-45
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Parameter Class 64 Details
No. Instance Attribute
n176 01 B0 Parameter copy and verify function selection (read only)
n177 01 B1
n178 01 B2 Fault log

Note When the 3G3MV is used, all parameters can be set from the Configurator.

● 3G3RV/3G3PV

Parameter Groups
Parameter group Details
All Parameters A: Initialize Mode Parameters A: Environment settings
B: Application Parameters B: Application
C: Tuning Parameters C: Tuning
D: Reference Parameters D: Reference
E: Motor Constant Parameters E: Motor constant
F: Option Parameters F: Option
H: Terminal Function Parameters H: Terminal function setting
L: Protection Function Parameters L: Protection function
N: Special Adjustments N: Special adjustments
O: Digital Operator Parameters O: Operator
Enter Code Enter code
Monitor Speed reference, speed monitor, current moni-
tor, output voltage

Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page

(Use the Individual Parameters Tab Page)
Parameter Class 64 Details
No. Instance Attribute
A1-00 01 00 Language selection for Digital Operator display
A1-01 01 01 Parameter access level
A1-04 01 04 Password
A1-05 01 05 Password setting
b4-01 01 A3 Timer function ON-delay time
b4-02 01 A4 Timer function OFF-delay time
C6-03 02 25 Carrier frequency upper limit
C6-04 02 26 Carrier frequency lower limit
C6-05 02 27 Carrier frequency proportional gain
E3 03 19 to 20 Motor 2 V/f pattern
E4 03 21 to 27 Motor 2 set values
H4-02 04 1E Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) output gain
H4-03 04 1F Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) bias
H4-05 04 21 Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) output gain
H4-06 04 22 Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) bias

7-46
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

Parameter Class 64 Details

No. Instance Attribute
H4-07 04 23 Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM) signal level selection
H4-08 04 27 Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM) signal level selection
o1-05 05 04 LCD brightness
o2-04 05 08 Inverter capacity selection

Note When the 3G3RV/3G3PV is used, all parameters can be set from the Configurator.

● 3G3FV

Parameter Group
Parameter group Details
All Parameters Initialize Mode Parameters A: Environment settings (A1-02 only)
Application Group B: Application
Tuning Parameters C: Tuning
Reference Parameters D: Reference
Motor Constant Parameters E: Motor constant
Option Parameter F: Option
Terminal Parameter H: Terminal function setting
Protection Parameter L: Protection function
Operator Parameter O: Operator
Enter Code Enter code
Monitor Speed reference, speed monitor, current moni-
tor, output voltage

Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page

(Use the Individual Parameters Tab Page)
Parameter Class 64 Details
No. Instance Attribute
C6-01 01 3D Carrier frequency upper limit
C6-02 01 3E Carrier frequency lower limit
C6-03 01 3F Carrier frequency proportional gain

Parameters that Cannot Be Set from the Configurator (Use the Digital Operator)
Parameter No.
A: Environment settings All parameters except A1-02
B: Application b1-06, b1-07, b1-08, b2-08, b4-01, b4-02, b5-09, b5-10, b5-11, b5-12, b5-13,
and b5-14
C: Tuning C1-10, C1-11, C3-06, C4-03, C4-04, C4-05, C8-09, and C8-30
E: Motor constant E1-03, E2-10, E3-@@, E4-@@, and E5-@@
F: Option F2-@@, F3-@@, F4-@@, F7-@@, and F9-@@
L: Protection function L8-17 and L8-19

7-47
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-3 Edit Device Parameters Window

The settings for the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card and connected Inverter are made in the
Edit Device Parameters Window.

7-3-1 General Tab Page

Item Details Reference

Comment Set the name of the device. 7-2-10 Unit Comment
Motor Name Set the name of the motor. 7-2-11 Connected Device Com-
ment
Network Power Voltage Set the monitor value for the network power supply voltage. 7-2-9 Network Power Supply Volt-
age Monitor
Unit Conduction Time Set the monitor value for the Inverter’s operating time. 7-2-8 Conduction Time Monitor
Fan Conduction Time Set the monitor value for the fan’s operating time.
Electrolytic Capacitor Con- Set the monitor value for the electrolytic capacitor’s operating time.
duction Time
Average Electric Power Cal- Set the average power cycle. 7-2-2 Average Power Monitor
culation Cycle Function
Default Connection Path Set the type of remote I/O used. 5-1-2 Selecting the Remote I/O
Function
Last Maintenance Date Select the date that maintenance was last performed from the calendar. 7-2-13 Last Maintenance Date
Operation for Communica- Select whether the motor will stop or continue operating when a ---
tions Error DeviceNet communications error occurs.
Note: This setting is displayed for the 3G3MV only.
Default Setting Button Returns the Communications Unit/Card internal settings except the ---
Inverter parameters to the default values.
Upload Button Reads all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window in a batch 7-2-1 Precautions when Operating
from the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card. the Edit Device Parameters Win-
dow
Download Button Writes all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window in a batch 7-2-1 Precautions when Operating
to the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card. the Edit Device Parameters Win-
dow
Compare Button Compares the set values in the Configurator with the set values in the ---
Unit.
Reset Button Performs a software reset (enables the set values written to the 7-2-1 Precautions when Operating
DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card). the Edit Device Parameters Win-
dow
OK Button Saves all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window and closes ---
the Window.
Cancel Button Cancels the changes made to settings in the Edit Device Parameters ---
Window and closes the Window.

7-48
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-3-2 OUT Tab Page

Use the OUT Tab Page to make settings for multi-function outputs.

Double-click the selected field or click the Edit Button.

Item Details Reference

No. The settings in the No. field are as follows: ---
00: Multi-function contact output, 01: Multi-function output 1, 02:
Multi-function output 2
I/O Comment Set a user-defined name for each terminal. 7-2-11 Connected Device
Comment
Detection Mode Set the detection mode to either Cumulative ON Time or Contact 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Operations Counter. Monitor
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting 7-2-7 Contact Operations
will be displayed in the Detection Mode field. Monitor
Value Set the monitor value (time or count).
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting
will be displayed in the Value field.
Fault Action Set the status of the output terminal when a communications error ---
occurs.
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting
will be displayed in the Fault Action field.

7-49
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-3-3 IN Tab Page
Use the IN Tab Page to make settings for input terminals.

Double-click the selected field or click the Edit Button.

Item Reference
No. Refer to the following tables. ---
I/O Comment Set a user-defined name for each terminal. 7-2-11 Connected Device Com-
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting will be dis- ment
played in the I/O Comment field.
Detection Mode Set the detection mode to either Cumulative ON Time or Contact Operations 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor
Counter. 7-2-7 Contact Operations Monitor
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting will be dis-
played in the Detection Mode field.
Value Set the monitor value (time or count).
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting will be dis-
played in the Value field.

Note The following tables show the meanings of the numerals set in the No. field.

No. Details
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
00 Multi-function input 1 Forward/stop Forward/stop
01 Multi-function input 2 Reverse/stop Reverse/stop
02 Multi-function input 3 Multi-function input selection 1 Multi-function contact input 1
03 Multi-function input 4 Multi-function input selection 2 Multi-function contact input 2
04 Multi-function input 5 Multi-function input selection 3 Multi-function contact input 3
05 Multi-function input 6 Multi-function input selection 4 Multi-function contact input 4
06 Multi-function input 7 Multi-function input selection 5 Multi-function contact input 5
07 Multi-function contact input 6

7-50
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-3-4 Operation Time Tab Page

The Operation Time Tab Page is used to make the settings for the operation time monitor function.

Double-click the selected field or click the Edit Button.

Item Details Reference

No. Refer to the following table. (For details, refer to 7-2-5 Operating Time Moni- 7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor
tor Function.) Function
Equipment Name Set a user-defined name for each device.
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting will be dis-
played in the Equipment Name field.
Operation Time Set the monitor value.
Note: When the setting is made in the setting window, the setting will be dis-
played in the Operation Time field.
Hold Status Set whether to maintain the ON Unit status when the monitor value is
exceeded.

Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No. field.

No.

00 Multi-function contact output: ON Input 4: ON

01 Multi-function output 1: ON Input 5: ON
02 Input 2: ON Input 3: ON
03 Input 4: ON Input 5: ON
04 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 4: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent
05 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 5: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent

7-51
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-3-5 Individual Parameters Tab Page
Use this tab page to set parameters that cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page, or to
set individual parameters.

Item Details Reference

Instance No., Set the Instance/Attribute and set value for the parameter to 7-2-14 Parameter Setting
Attribute No., and
be changed.
Value Set the value in hexadecimal.
Result Displays the read result in hexadecimal.
Read Button Reads the set values of the specified parameter (Instance/
Attribute) from the Inverter.
Write Button Writes the set parameters to the Inverter.
Note: An error message is displayed when a write error
occurs.
Write to EEPROM To save the parameter set values in the Inverter even after a
power interruption, select this item before clicking the Write
Button.

7-52
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-3-6 Warning Torque Tab Page

Use this tab page to make the settings for warning torque detection.

Item Details Reference

Current 1 (during Set the threshold used to monitor the current level during 7-2-3 Warning Torque
Accel/Decel) acceleration or deceleration. Detection
Note: When this value is set to 0.0 (A), the current is not
monitored during acceleration or deceleration.
Current 2 (during Set the threshold used to monitor the current level during
Frequency Agree) frequency agreement (while operating at constant speed).
Note: When this value is set to 0.0 (A), the current is not
monitored during frequency agreement.
Detection Filter Select the level of detection sensitivity from Sensitivity 1
(Low) to Sensitivity 5 (High) in the pull-down menu.
Status Set whether to maintain the ON status in the Unit’s Status
Area (Warning Torque Detection Flag) when the current
exceeds either of the thresholds set for Current 1 and Cur-
rent 2.

7-53
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-3-7 Inverter Parameters Tab Page
Use this tab page to set the main parameters for the Inverter being used.

Item Details Reference

Parameter Group Select the parameter group to be displayed from the pull- 7-2-14 Parameter Setting
down menu.
Parameter Name Displays the number and name of the parameters included
in the selected parameter group.
Value Displays the parameter’s set value.
Note: The two setting methods are as follows (depends on
the parameter)
• Select the set value from the pull-down menu.
• Enter the numerical value.
Help Displays the details of the selected parameter.
Default Displays the factory setting of the selected parameter.
Default Setup But- Returns the set value of the selected parameter to its fac-
ton tory setting.

7-54
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-4 Monitor Device Window

The functions set in the Edit Device Parameters Window are monitored from the Monitor Device Win-
dow.

7-4-1 General Tab Page

Unit Status Report Area

Item Details Reference

Inverter Displays the name of the mounted Inverter. ---
Comment Displays the name of the device. 7-2-10 Unit Comment
Motor Name Displays the motor name. 7-2-11 Connected Device
Comment
Last Maintenance Date Displays the last date that maintenance was 7-2-13 Last Maintenance
performed. Date
Unit Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the Inverter’s 7-2-8 Conduction Time
Main Unit. Monitor
Fan Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the fan.
Note: This setting can be cleared to zero by
clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item.
Electrolytic Capacitor Conduc- Displays the operating time of the electrolytic
tion Time capacitor.
Note: This setting can be cleared to zero by
clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item.
Average Electric Power Displays the calculated value of the average 7-2-2 Average Power Moni-
power. tor Function

7-55
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Item Details Reference
Network Power Voltage Displays the present value for the network 7-2-9 Network Power Sup-
power voltage. ply Voltage Monitor
Network Power Voltage (Peak) Displays the maximum value for the network
power voltage.
Note: This setting can be cleared to zero by
clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item.
Network Power Voltage (Bot- Displays the minimum value for the network
tom) power voltage.
Note: This setting can be cleared to zero by
clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item.
Error Clear Button Clears the error at the Inverter. ---
Unit Sta- Unit Maintenance Notifies that the Inverter’s operation time has 7-2-8 Conduction Time
tus Report exceeded the monitor value. Monitor
Area Fan Maintenance Notifies that the fan’s operation time has
exceeded the monitor value.
Electrolytic Capac- Notifies that the electrolytic capacitor’s opera-
itor Maintenance tion time has exceeded the monitor value.
Network Power Notifies that the network power voltage has 7-2-9 Network Power Sup-
Voltage Drop dropped below the monitor value. ply Voltage Monitor
Operation Time Notifies that the operation time has exceeded 7-2-5 Operating Time Mon-
Over the monitor value. itor Function
Connected Com- Notifies that the total ON time or contact opera- 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
ponent Mainte- tions count for the I/O terminals has exceeded Monitor
nance the monitor value. 7-2-7 Contact Operations
Monitor
Warning Notifies that a warning or error has occurred in ---
the Inverter (the details are also displayed.)
During Forward Notify that the Inverter is operating in forward/ ---
Run and During reverse run.
Reverse Run
Frequency Agree Notifies that the Inverter is agreement frequen- ---
cies.

7-56
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-4-2 OUT Tab Page

Item Details Reference

No. The settings in the No. field are as follows: ---
00: Multi-function contact output, 01: Multi-function output 1,
02: Multi-function output 2
Note: When the present value for the maintenance counter
(cumulative ON time or contact operations count) exceeds
the monitor value, an error icon will be displayed to the left
of the corresponding No. setting (No. 01 in the above screen
example).
I/O Comment Displays the user-defined connected device comment for 7-2-11 Connected Device
each output terminal. Comment
ON/OFF Displays the ON/OFF status for each output terminal. ---
Maintenance Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Counter each output terminal. Monitor
Note: Displays the cumulative ON time (in seconds) or the 7-2-7 Contact Operations
contact operations count (number of times). Monitor
Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to
zero.
Note: Select the terminal to be cleared, and click the Clear
Button to clear the value to zero.

7-57
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-4-3 IN Tab Page

Item Reference
No. Refer to the following table for meanings in the No. field. ---
Note: When the present value for the maintenance counter
(cumulative ON time or contact operations count) exceeds
the monitor value, an error icon will be displayed to the left
of the corresponding No. setting (No. 05 in the above screen
example).
I/O Comment Displays the user-defined connected device comment for 7-2-11 Connected Device
each input terminal. Comment
ON/OFF Displays the ON/OFF status for each input terminal. ---
Maintenance Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Counter each input terminal. Monitor
Note: Displays the cumulative ON time (in seconds) or the 7-2-7 Contact Operations
contact operations count (number of times). Monitor
Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to
zero.
Note: Select the terminal to be cleared, and click the Clear
Button to clear the value to zero.

Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No. field

No. Details
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
00 Multi-function input 1 Forward/stop Forward/stop
01 Multi-function input 2 Reverse/stop Reverse/stop
02 Multi-function input 3 Multi-function input selection 1 Multi-function contact input 1
03 Multi-function input 4 Multi-function input selection 2 Multi-function contact input 2
04 Multi-function input 5 Multi-function input selection 3 Multi-function contact input 3
05 Multi-function input 6 Multi-function input selection 4 Multi-function contact input 4
06 Multi-function input 7 Multi-function input selection 5 Multi-function contact input 5
07 Multi-function contact input 6

7-58
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-4-4 Operation Time Tab Page

Item Details Reference

No. Refer to the following table for meanings in the No. field. (For details, refer 7-2-5 Operating Time
to 7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor Function.) Monitor Function
Note: When the operating time exceeds the monitor value, an error icon is
displayed to the left of the corresponding setting in the No. field.
Equipment Name Displays the name of each device.
Response Time Displays the operating time of each device.
Peak Value Displays the maximum value of the operating time of each device.
Clear Error Button Clears the Operation Time Over Flag in the Unit’s Status Area.
Note 1: This button is enabled when Status Hold is selected on the Oper-
ation Time Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window.
Note 2: Select the device to be cleared, and then click the Clear Error But-
ton to set the Flag to OFF.
Clear Peak Value Clears the peak operating time value to zero.
Button Note: Select the device to be cleared, and then click the Clear Peak But-
ton to clear the setting to zero.

Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No. field]

No. Operating time measurement trigger

Conditions for starting measurement Conditions for ending
measurement
00 Multi-function contact output: ON Input 4: ON
01 Multi-function output 1: ON Input 5: ON
02 Input 2: ON Input 3: ON
03 Input 4: ON Input 5: ON
04 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 4: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent
05 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 5: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent

Note For details on measurement methods, refer to 7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor Function.

7-59
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-4-5 Warning Torque Tab Page

Item Details Reference

Accel/Decel Displays the current level during acceleration/deceleration. 7-2-3 Warning Torque
Torque Current Note: The present value or most recent value is displayed. Detection
Accel/Decel Peak Displays the maximum current level during acceleration/
Torque deceleration.
Note: The setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the
Clear Button to the right of the setting.
Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level
during Accel/Decel exceeds the monitor value (threshold) during acceleration/
deceleration.
Torque Current Displays the current level during frequency agreement.
during Frequency Note: The present value or most recent value is displayed.
Agree
Peak Torque dur- Displays the maximum current level during frequency agree-
ing Frequency ment.
Agree Note: The setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the
Clear Button to the right of the setting.
Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level
during Frequency exceeds the monitor value (threshold) during frequency
Agree agreement.
Clear Error Flag Clears the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Unit’s Sta-
Button tus Area.
Note 1: This button is enabled when the Status Hold field is
selected on the Warning Torque Tab Page of the Edit Device
Parameters Window.

7-60
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-4-6 Error History Tab Page

This tab page is used to display the error history for the last four communications errors communica-
tions.

Item Details Reference

Content Displays the details of the errors that have occurred. 7-2-12 Communications
Note: The most recent error is displayed at the bottom of the Error Log Monitor
list.
Network Power Displays the network power supply voltage from when the
Voltage error occurred.
Unit Conduction Displays the Unit ON time from when the error occurred.
Time
Update Button Displays the most recent error log.
Note: If a new error occurs while the error log is being dis-
played, the error will not be displayed on the Error History
Tab Page in real time. Click the Update Button to display the
most recent error log.
Clear Button Clears the error log.

7-61
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-4-7 Inverter Parameters Tab Page
Use this tab page to monitor the following four types of information in the Inverter.

Item Details Reference

Speed Reference Displays the frequency reference value in r/min. (See note.) ---
Speed Actual Displays the output frequency in r/min. (See note.)
Current Actual Displays the output current level.
Output Voltage Displays the output voltage level (Inverter’s internal output
voltage reference value).

Note The unit for the frequency reference value and output frequency are determined according to
the set values for the [n035/o1-03] parameter (frequency reference setting and display units).
When the number of motor poles (2 to 39) is set in this parameter, the r/min unit is used. When
the factory setting “0” is used, the x0.01 Hz is used as the unit.

7-62
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-5 Maintenance Information Window

7-5-1 General Tab Page

Unit status report area

Item Details Reference

Inverter Displays the name of the mounted Inverter. ---
Comment Displays the name of the device. 7-2-10 Unit Comment
Motor Name Displays the motor name. 7-2-11 Connected Device
Comment
Last Maintenance Date Displays the last date that maintenance was 7-2-13 Last Maintenance
performed. Date
Unit Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the Inverter’s 7-2-8 Conduction Time
Main Unit. Monitor
Fan Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the fan.
Note: This setting can be cleared to zero by
clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item.
Electrolytic Capacitor Conduc- Displays the operating time of the electrolytic
tion Time capacitor.
Average Electric Power Displays the calculated value of the average 7-2-2 Average Power Moni-
power. tor Function
Network Power Voltage Displays the present value for the network 7-2-9 Network Power Sup-
power voltage. ply Voltage Monitor
Network Power Voltage (Peak) Displays the maximum value for the network
power voltage.
Network Power Voltage (Bot- Displays the minimum value for the network
tom) power voltage.

7-63
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
Item Details Reference
Unit Sta- Unit Maintenance Notifies that the Inverter’s operation time has 7-2-8 Conduction Time
tus Report exceeded the monitor value. Monitor
Area Fan Maintenance Notifies that the fan’s operation time has
exceeded the monitor value.
Electrolytic Capac- Notifies that the electrolytic capacitor’s opera-
itor Maintenance tion time has exceeded the monitor value.
Network Power Notifies that the network power voltage has 7-2-9 Network Power Sup-
Voltage Drop dropped below the monitor value. ply Voltage Monitor
Operation Time Notifies that the operation time has exceeded 7-2-5 Operating Time Mon-
Over the monitor value. itor Function
Connected Com- Notifies that the total ON time or contact opera- 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
ponent Mainte- tions count for the I/O terminals has exceeded Monitor
nance the monitor value. 7-2-7 Contact Operations
Monitor
Warning Notifies that a warning or error has occurred in ---
the Inverter (the details are also displayed).
During Forward Notifies that the Inverter is operating in forward/ ---
Run/During reverse run mode.
Reverse Run
Frequency Agree Notifies that the Inverter is agreement frequen- ---
cies.
Update Button Uploads all the maintenance information ---
(including information from other tab pages)
and refreshes the screen.
Save Maintenance Counter Writes the maintenance counter information ---
Button (operating time and maintenance counter for
each terminal) to the EEPROM of the
DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card.

Note The maintenance information is saved in the EEPROM approximately every six minutes.
Therefore, depending on the power OFF timing, up to six minutes worth of data is lost. To mon-
itor more closely, click the Save Maintenance Counter Button immediately before turning OFF
the power. The maintenance information will be written to the EEPROM.

7-64
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-5-2 OUT Tab Page

Item Details Reference

No. The settings in the No. field are as follows: ---
00: Multi-function contact output, 01: Multi-function output 1,
02: Multi-function output 2
Note: When the present value for the maintenance counter
(cumulative ON time or contact operations count) exceeds
the monitor value, an error icon will be displayed to the left
of the corresponding No. setting (No. 01 in the above screen
example).
I/O Comment Displays the user-defined connected device comment for 7-2-11 Connected Device
each output terminal. Comment
Maintenance Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Counter each output terminal. Monitor
Note: The cumulative ON time (in seconds) or the contact 7-2-7 Contact Operations
operations count (number of times) is displayed. Monitor

7-65
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-5-3 IN Tab Page

Item Details Reference

No. Refer to the following table for meanings in the No. field. ---
Note: When the present value for the maintenance counter
(cumulative ON time or contact operations count) exceeds
the monitor value, an error icon will be displayed to the left
of the corresponding No. setting (No. 05 in the above screen
example).
I/O Comment Displays the user-defined connected device comment for 7-2-11 Connected Device
each input terminal. Comment
Maintenance Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7-2-6 Cumulative ON Time
Counter each input terminal. Monitor
Note: The cumulative ON time (in seconds) or the contact 7-2-7 Contact Operations
operations count (number of times) is displayed. Monitor

Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No. field

No. Details
3G3MV 3G3RV/3G3PV 3G3FV
00 Multi-function input 1 Forward/stop Forward/stop
01 Multi-function input 2 Reverse/stop Reverse/stop
02 Multi-function input 3 Multi-function input selection 1 Multi-function contact input 1
03 Multi-function input 4 Multi-function input selection 2 Multi-function contact input 2
04 Multi-function input 5 Multi-function input selection 3 Multi-function contact input 3
05 Multi-function input 6 Multi-function input selection 4 Multi-function contact input 4
06 Multi-function input 7 Multi-function input selection 5 Multi-function contact input 5
07 Multi-function contact input 6

7-66
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-5-4 Operation Time Tab Page

Item Details Reference

No. Refer to the following table for meanings in the No. field. 7-2-5 Operating Time Mon-
(For details, refer to 7-2-5 Operating Time Monitor Func- itor Function
tion.)
Note: When the operating time exceeds the monitor value,
an error icon is displayed to the left of the corresponding
setting in the No. field.
Equipment Name Displays the name of each device.
Response Time Displays the operating time of each device.
Peak Value Displays the maximum value of the operating time of each
device.

Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No. field

No. Operating time measurement trigger

Conditions for starting measurement Conditions for ending
measurement
00 Multi-function contact output: ON Input 4: ON
01 Multi-function output 1: ON Input 5: ON
02 Input 2: ON Input 3: ON
03 Input 4: ON Input 5: ON
04 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 4: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent
05 Input 0: ON or Input 1: ON Input 5: ON
or when a forward/reverse run command is sent

7-67
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
7-5-5 Warning Torque Tab Page

Item Details Reference

Accel/Decel Displays the current level during acceleration/deceleration. 7-2-3 Warning Torque
Torque Current Note: The value when the maintenance information was Detection
refreshed is displayed.
Accel/Decel Peak Displays the maximum current level during acceleration/
Torque deceleration.
Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level
during Accel/Decel exceeds the monitor value (threshold) during acceleration/
deceleration.
Torque Current Displays the current level during frequency agreement.
Level during Fre- Note: The value when the maintenance information was
quency Agree refreshed is displayed.
Peak Torque dur- Displays the maximum current level during frequency agree-
ing Frequency ment.
Agree
Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level
during Frequency exceeds the monitor value (threshold) during frequency
Agree agreement.

7-68
Configurator Settings Chapter 7

7-5-6 Current Trace Tab Page

■ History Tab Page

Item Details Reference

Time Displays the time determined from the current trace sampling cycle. 7-2-4 Current Trace
Current Displays all the traced current levels for every sampling cycle.
Status Displays whether the sampling timing is during acceleration/deceleration or
frequency agreement.
Trigger Set the signal used for trace timing.
Note: The trace is performed using the trigger setting combined with the
Start Trigger Button, Middle Trigger Button, and End Trigger Button.
Current Trace Sam- Select the trace sampling cycle from the pull-down menu.
pling Cycle Note: The cycle can be set to 10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, up to 100 s.
Trace Button Starts the trace.
Note: The trace will continue until the Cancel Button is clicked. The 150
points sampled immediately before the Cancel Button is clicked will be
stored.
Trace (Buffer Full) Starts a trace that will stop when 150 points are sampled.
Button Note: The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the
trace.
Cancel Button Stops the trace.
Start Trigger Button The trace stops when 150 points have been sampled using the trigger sig-
nal selected in the Trigger field.
Note: The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the
trace.
Middle Trigger But- Starts a trace that will stop when 75 points have been sampled using the
ton trigger signal selected in the Trigger field.
Note 1: The 75 points from immediately before and after the trigger are
sampled.
Note 2: The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the
trace.
End Trigger Button Starts a trace that stops at the trigger signal selected in the Trigger field.
Note 1: The 150 points from immediately before the trigger are sampled.
Note 2: The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the
trace.
Save Button Converts traced data into CSV format and saves in a file.

7-69
Configurator Settings Chapter 7
■ Graph Tab Page
This tab page is used to display a graph of current (vertical axis) and time (horizontal axis) displayed
on the History Tab Page.

Note The other setting items and buttons in this tab page are the same as on the History Tab Page.

7-5-7 Error History Tab Page

The last four communications errors are displayed as an error log.

Item Reference
Content Displays the details of the errors that have occurred. 7-2-12 Communications
Note: The most recent error is displayed at the bottom of the Error Log Monitor
list.
Network Power Displays the network power supply voltage from when the
Voltage error occurred.
Unit Conduction Displays the Unit ON time from when the error occurred.
Time
Clear Button Clears the error log.

7-70
 Chapter 8

Communications Errors
8-1 Communications Line Errors
8-2 Message Communications Errors
8-3 Special Remote I/O Errors
8-4 Inverter Faults
8-5 Inverter Alarms
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-1 Communications Line Errors

Malfunctions in DeviceNet communications that are a result of broken wires, short circuits, reversed
wiring, duplicate node address assignments, or noise interference are detected as transmission
(BUS) errors. When a transmission error is detected, the Inverter's Fault Bit will turn ON and the
motor will coast to a stop.
When an error is detected, perform error processing according to the indicator display of the
DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card with the terminal cover and Digital Operator removed.

■ Operation Indicators
The DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card has 2 operation indicators that show the status of the
power and communications.
Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures
Color Status
MS Green Lit The Unit is operating normally. ---
Flashing Initial settings or necessary prepara- • Turn ON the Inverter power supply
tions for communications are incom- again.
plete.
• Replace the Option Unit.
Red Lit A fatal error (hardware error) has • Turn ON the Inverter power supply
occurred in the Unit. again.
• Replace the Option Unit.
Flashing A non-fatal error, such as a switch • Check the baud rate setting.
setting error, has occurred. • Turn ON the Inverter power supply
again.
• Replace the Option Unit.
--- Not lit Power is not being supplied from the • Check the Option Unit connector
Inverter. and turn ON the Inverter power
The Unit is not connected properly supply.
and power is not being to supplied to • Replace the Option Unit.
it.

8-2
Communications Errors Chapter 8

Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures

Color Status
NS Green Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating ---
normally.
(Communications connections estab-
lished.)
Flashing The Network is normal, but the com- Turn ON the power supply again after
munications connection with the the following steps.
Master Unit is not established. • Register in the scan list.
• Set the connection path.
• Turn ON the power supply to the
Master Unit.
Red Lit A fatal communications error has Turn ON the power supply again after
occurred. the following steps.
A DeviceNet communications error • Correct node address duplication.
was detected caused by node • Connect termination resistance to
address duplication or Bus OFF.
both ends of the communications
(These errors make communications
impossible.) line.
• Correct communications line con-
nection problem.
• Correct the Master Unit errors that
occur when the Master Unit stops
after communications is once
established.
• Correct environmental conditions
such as noise.
Flashing A non-fatal communications error has Turn ON the power supply again after
occurred due to communications tim- the following processing.
eout. • Connect termination resistance to
both ends of the communications
line.
• Correct defective connections in the
communications line.
• Correct environmental conditions
such as noise.
--- Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has • Check the baud rate setting.
occurred. For example, the Network • Check the Option Unit connector
does not exist, power is not supplied
and turn ON the Inverter power
to the Unit, or the baud rates do not
match. supply.
• Replace the Option Unit.

Note For communications line problems, detailed error codes will be displayed on the indicators of
the Master Unit. Check the error code and take appropriate countermeasures according to the
descriptions in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of CS/CJ Series DeviceNet Unit
Operation Manual (W380).

8-3
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-2 Message Communications Errors

■ Explicit Message Errors

If an explicit message is sent, but communications do not end normally, one of the following error
codes will be returned with service code 94. Check the meaning of the error message, and either
correct the message or adjust the timing of the message.
Error Meaning Countermeasures
Code
0000 Normal end response. ---
08FF The requested service does not exist. Correct the service code and send the data again.
09FF An invalid attribute was detected. Check and correct the attribute values, and send
the data again.
0CFF The requested service cannot be executed in the Stop the Inverter and send the data again.
current object mode or status.
0EFF A request has been sent to change an attribute Check and correct the service code and attribute
that cannot be changed. values, and send the data again.
13FF There is insufficient data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.
14FF The attribute for the service does not exist. Check and correct the service code and attribute
values, and send the data again.
15FF These is too much data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.
16FF The specified object does not exist. Check and correct the class and instance values,
and send the data again.
20FF The parameters are invalid or the data is outside Check and correct the data setting range, send
the range for the requested service. the data again.
1FFF Manufacturer fault code. Stop the Inverter and send the data again.
Check and correct the data setting range, send
the data again.

■ FINS Message Errors (CS/CJ Series)

FINS Meaning Likely cause Countermeasures
response
0000 Normal completion --- ---
0101 Local node not in net- The local node (DeviceNet Unit) is Check the DeviceNet Unit’s set-
work not participating in the network. tings and network settings.
0105 Local node address The local node’s (DeviceNet Unit’s) Set the DeviceNet Unit’s node
out-of-range error node address is not between 0 and address correctly. (Set a unique
63. node address between 0 and 63.)
0106 Local node address The local node’s (DeviceNet Unit’s)
duplication error node address is duplicated on
another node.
0201 Remote node not in The other node is not participating Establish a proper network connec-
network in the network. (The MS/NS indica- tion at the remote node.
tors will not be normal.)

8-4
Communications Errors Chapter 8

FINS Meaning Likely cause Countermeasures

response
0202 No such Unit in remote The wrong node address was Check the other node’s node
node specified. address.
The DeviceNet Unit’s FINS address Check the FINS address specified
is incorrect. in the CMND instruction’s control
data.
0205 Response timeout The response monitoring time in Set a longer response monitoring
the CMND instruction’s control data time.
is too short.
The message frame was corrupted Check for noise (from sources such
by noise. as the communications power sup-
ply and switching devices) and take
steps to reduce noise. Consider
increasing the number of retries.
0401 Undefined command The DeviceNet Unit received an Check the CMND instruction’s
unrecognizable command. FINS command number (2801).
The DeviceNet Unit received a Check the FINS address specified
FINS command intended for in the CMND instruction’s control
another Unit. data.

8-5
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-3 Special Remote I/O Errors

■ Special Remote I/O Errors

If each function is not set properly using the special remote I/O, the MSB of the function code will be
changed to 1 and one of the following error codes will be returned. Check the meaning of the error
message, and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message.
Error Name Content Countermeasure
code
---- --- Normal completion response ---
The function code and register number at the time of
transmission are placed at the beginning, and
returned with the data amount (when data is written)
or the read data (when data is read) attached.
01 hex Function code A code other than 03 hex/08 hex/10 hex has been set Check and correct
error as a function code. the function code.
02 hex Register number The set register number has not been registered. Check and correct
error An attempt to read an enter command register was the register number.
made.
21 hex Data setting error An upper or lower limit for the write data setting range Check the display for
was exceeded. the Digital Operator
Data that would give rise to an operation error (OPE1 and correct the error
to OPE9 or OPE01 to OPE09) has been set. data.
22 hex Writing mode error during Inverter operations, a write-requested mes- Perform write opera-
sage was received for a parameter that is read-only tions after stopping
during operation. the Inverter.
An enter command was received during Inverter oper-
ations.
A read-requested message was received during UV. Perform write opera-
An enter command was received during UV. tions after clearing
the UV (main circuit
undervoltage) error.
3G3MV only: After constant initial-
during F04 (initial memory error) detection, a write- ization (n001 = “8” or
requested message other than constant initialization “9”) has been per-
(n001=”8” or “9”), was received. formed, turn the
power supply OFF
and ON again.
A write-requested message was received for a read- Check and correct
only register. the register number.

■ ENTER Command Not Sent (For 3G3RV, 3G3FV and 3G3PV)

When entering data in the parameter constant (register No. 0100 or higher), always send an ENTER
command. If the ENTER command is not transmitted after writing data, the following situation will
occur.
• Written data will not be enabled.
Written data will be enabled only after an enter command is sent.

8-6
Communications Errors Chapter 8
• Inverter will not start.
The Inverter will determine the state as being under programming until it receives an ENTER com-
mand and will ignore the start or run command.
After sending an ENTER command, input the start or run command again.

8-7
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-4 Inverter Faults

■ Detecting Inverter Faults

When a fault is detected in the Inverter itself, the status will change as shown in the following table.
Function Meaning
Unit status When an fault is detected, bit 15 of the Unit Status (Error flag) is turned ON and the
fault code is stored in bits 8 to 14.
For details on the fault, check the fault code in the fault code table on page 10.
When COS communications are used, the remote I/O error flag may be turned ON
first.
Remote I/O The fault output allocated in the remote I/O will turn ON.
If the fault output is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and pro-
gram a sequence to stop the program.
Explicit messages Read the fault output for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0A using message communi-
cations. If there is a fault in the Inverter, the fault output will be ON, so turn OFF all
related inputs controlling the Inverter, and program a sequence to stop the program.
Special remote I/O 3G3MV/3G3RV:
Read register 002C, and check whether bit 14 (fault output) is ON (serious fault). If
bit 14 is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and program a
sequence to stop the program.
3G3FV:
Read register 0010, and check whether bit 7 (fault output) is ON (serious fault). If bit
7 is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and program a sequence
to stop the program.

■ Confirming Inverter Fault Status

The fault information for the Inverter can be checked by using the following methods. Identify the fault
using the fault code table on page 8-10 and the troubleshooting information in the Inverter user’s
manual and take the necessary corrective actions.
Function Meaning
Operation indicators When there is an Inverter fault, the details will be displayed on the Digital Operator of
on Inverter the Inverter. The fault log can be checked using the monitor function.
3G3MV: U-09
3G3RV/3G3FV: U3
Unit status The fault code is stored in bits 8 to 14. Bit 15 (Error flag) is turned ON when a fault is
detected.
When COS communications are used, the remote I/O error flag may be turned ON
first.
Explicit messages An explicit message can be used to read the fault code of a detected fault.
Fault codes conforming to DeviceNet: Class 29/Instance 1/ Attribute 0D
Fault codes unique to this Unit: Class 2A/Instance 1/Attribute 70
Special remote I/O 3G3MV/3G3RV:
Read registers 0021. Check the fault status from the bit signals that are output for an
Inverter fault.
3G3FV:
Read registers 0014 to 0018. Check the fault status from the bit signals that are out-
put for an Inverter fault. The fault log can be checked using the monitor function (U3)
in registers 0090 to 0093.

8-8
Communications Errors Chapter 8
Note Check the Digital Operator display (see the following table) to identify faults when DeviceNet
communications are disabled.

● Faults when DeviceNet Communications are Disabled

Inverter Content Countermeasure
3G3MV 3G3RV
3G3PV
3G3FV
F04 CPF04 EEPROM fault • Store the parameters again
There was an inconsis- • Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again.
tency in the stored data or
there is a hardware fault. • Replace the Inverter if the steps above do not elimi-
nate the fault.
--- ERR EEPROM write fault
Note: This fault may occur if the number of overwrite
operations exceeds 100,000. EEPROM is over-
written when a parameter change operation is
executed from a Parameter Unit or an ENTER
command is sent. Overwrite the data in EEPROM
as little as possible.
F06 CPF06 Option Unit/Card self-test • Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card cor-
error rectly.
• Align the case with the connector of the DeviceNet
Communications Unit/Card so that it is fully installed.
F21 CPF21 Option Unit/Card self-test • Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card cor-
error rectly.
• Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again.
• Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card if
the steps above do not eliminate the fault.
F22 CPF22 Option Unit/Card model • Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card cor-
code error rectly.
• Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again.
• Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card if
the steps above do not eliminate the fault.
F23 CPF23 Option Unit/Card mutual • Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card cor-
test error rectly.
A communications error • Align the case with the connector of the DeviceNet
occurred between the Communications Unit/Card so that it is fully installed.
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit/Card and • Check whether the DeviceNet Communications Unit/
Inverter. Card’s FG wire is properly connected to the Inverter.
• Take steps to reduce noise in the DeviceNet commu-
nications lines. (See 3-3 Communications Line Noise
Prevention for details.)
• Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card if
the steps above do not eliminate the fault.

8-9
Communications Errors Chapter 8
■ Fault Codes
The DeviceNet Unit/Card has two kinds of fault codes: DeviceNet fault codes and DeviceNet Com-
munications Unit/Card fault codes.
• DeviceNet fault codes: Fault code outputs unified in DeviceNet
Class 29/Instance 01/Attribute 0D
• DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card fault codes: Fault codes for Inverter management
Class 2A/Instance 01/Attribute 70
Fault code stored in unit status bits 8 to 14 (Error flag in bit 15).
DeviceNet Unit/Card Fault detection supported Operator Content
fault code fault code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display
(hex) 3G3PV
0000 00 Yes Yes Yes --- Inverter normal
5120 01 --- Yes Yes PUF Fuse open
3220 02 Yes Yes Yes UV1 Undervoltage (main)
5110 03 Yes Yes Yes UV2 Control power supply fault
3222 04 --- Yes Yes UV3 Undervoltage (3G3RV: MC fault)
2130 05 Yes --- Yes SC Short circuit
2120 06 Yes Yes Yes GF Ground fault
2300 07 Yes Yes Yes OC Overcurrent
3210 08 Yes Yes Yes OV Main circuit overvoltage
4200 09 Yes Yes Yes OH Overheat (3G3MV/RV: Inverter overheat)
4210 0A --- Yes Yes OH1 Overheat (3G3RV: Inverter overheat)
2220 0B Yes Yes Yes OL1 Motor overload
2200 0C Yes Yes Yes OL2 Inverter overload
2221 0D Yes Yes Yes OL3 Overtorque detection 1
2222 0E --- Yes Yes OL4 Overtorque detection 2
7110 0F --- Yes Yes RR Braking transistor failure
7112 10 Yes Yes Yes RH Braking resistor overheating
9000 11 Yes Yes Yes EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
9000 12 Yes Yes Yes EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
9000 13 Yes Yes Yes EF5 External fault (Terminal 5)
9000 14 Yes Yes Yes EF6 External fault (Terminal 6)
9000 15 Yes Yes Yes EF7 External fault (Terminal 7)
9000 16 --- --- Yes EF8 External fault (Terminal 8)
4140 17 --- --- Yes FAN Cooling fan fault
7310 18 --- Yes Yes OS Overspeed
7310 19 --- Yes Yes DEV Speed deviation
7301 1A --- Yes Yes PGO PG is disconnected
3130 1B Yes Yes Yes PF Input phase loss (3G3MV/RV input phase
loss)
3130 1C Yes Yes Yes LF Output phase loss
1000 1D --- Yes --- OH3 Motor overheat 1
5300 1E Yes Yes Yes OPR Operator disconnection
6320 1F --- Yes Yes ERR EEPROM write failure
1000 20 --- Yes --- OH4 Motor overheat 2
7500 21 Yes Yes Yes CE MEMOBUS transfer error

8-10
Communications Errors Chapter 8

DeviceNet Unit/Card Fault detection supported Operator Content

fault code fault code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display
(hex) 3G3PV
7500 22 Yes Yes Yes BUS Communications error
8321 25 --- Yes Yes CF Communications control
8313 26 --- --- Yes SVE Zero servo error
9000 27 Yes Yes Yes EFO External fault
1000 28 Yes Yes Yes FBL PID feedback reference loss
1000 29 Yes Yes --- UL3 Undertorque detection 1
1000 2A --- Yes --- UL4 Undertorque detection 2
1000 2B --- Yes --- OL7 Overload during HSB
1000 30 Yes Yes Yes CPF@@ Hardware fault (F@@ displayed in 3G3MV)

8-11
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-5 Inverter Alarms

■ Detecting Inverter Alarms

The Inverter’s alarm codes are not specified in DeviceNet, they are a proprietary function of these
products. When an alarm occurs, the status will change as described below.
Function Inverter alarm status
Remote I/O The alarm output allocated in the remote I/O will turn ON.
If necessary, we recommend programming a sequence to handle the alarm (such as
stopping the Inverter) when the alarm output goes ON.
Explicit messages Read the alarm output for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0B using message commu-
nications. We recommend programming a stop sequence (such as turning OFF all
related inputs controlling the Inverter) when an alarm occurs in the Inverter.

■ Reading the Alarm Code

The following methods can be used to read the Inverter’s alarm code.
Function Inverter alarm status
Inverter’s Operator dis- When the Inverter is in alarm status, the relevant information will be displayed (flash-
play ing) on the Inverter’s Digital Operator.
Explicit messages The alarm code of an alarm that is currently occurring can be read with message
communications.
DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card alarm code: Class 2A, Instance 1, Attribute 6F

■ Alarm Codes
The following table lists the alarm codes. Refer to the Maintenance Operation Chapter of your
Inverter User’s Manual for more details on troubleshooting and correcting alarms (also known as
warnings and non-fatal faults).

● 3G3MV Alarm Codes

Alarm code (hex) Operator display Meaning
0000 --- No Inverter alarm detected
8000 STP (flashing) Operator stopped
8001 SER (flashing) Sequence error
8002 EF (flashing) External terminal fault
8003 BB (flashing) Baseblock input
8004 OL3 (flashing) Overtorque 1
8005 OH (flashing) Cooling fins overheating
8006 OV (flashing) Main circuit overvoltage
8007 UV (flashing) Main circuit undervoltage
8008 FAN (flashing) Cooling fan fault
8009 CE (flashing) Communications timeout
800A BUS (flashing) Option transfer error
800C OH3 (flashing) Motor overheating
800D FBL (flashing) Feedback loss error
800E STP (flashing) Emergency stop

8-12
Communications Errors Chapter 8
● 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Alarm Codes
Alarm Fault detection Operator Display Content
code supported
(hex) 3G3RV 3G3FV
3G3PV
0000 Yes Yes --- No Inverter alarm detected.
0001 Yes Yes UV (flashing) Main circuit undervoltage
0002 Yes Yes OV (flashing) Main circuit overvoltage
0003 Yes Yes OH (flashing) Cooling fins overheating
0004 Yes Yes OH2 (flashing) Inverter overheating warning
0005 Yes Yes OL3 (flashing) Overtorque detection 1
0006 Yes Yes OL4 (flashing) Overtorque detection 2
0007 Yes Yes EF (flashing) Simultaneous forward and reverse inputs
0008 Yes Yes BB (flashing) Baseblock input
0009 Yes Yes EF3 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 3)
000A Yes Yes EF4 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 4)
000B Yes Yes EF5 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 5)
000C Yes Yes EF6 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 6)
000D Yes Yes EF7 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 7)
000E --- Yes EF8 (flashing) External fault (Terminal 8)
0010 Yes Yes OS (flashing) Overspeed
0011 Yes Yes DEV (flashing) Speed deviation
0012 Yes Yes PGO (flashing) PG is disconnected
0013 Yes Yes OPR (flashing) Operator connection fault
0014 Yes Yes CE (flashing) Memobus transfer error
0015 Yes Yes BUS (flashing) Option Card transfer error
0016 Yes Yes CALL (flashing) Communications standby
0017 Yes Yes OL1 (flashing) Motor overload
0018 Yes Yes OL2 (flashing) Inverter overload
0019 --- Yes E-15 (flashing) SI-FG transfer error
001A --- Yes EFO (flashing) Option Card external error
001B Yes Yes --- Motor switch during operation
001C Yes Yes FBL (flashing) PID control feedback reference loss error
001D Yes --- CALL (flashing) Communications standby
001E Yes --- UL3 (flashing) Undertorque detection 1
001F Yes --- UL4 (flashing) Undertorque detection 2
0020 Yes --- SE (flashing) Sequence error
0022 Yes --- OH3 (flashing) Motor overheating

8-13
Communications Errors Chapter 8

8-14
 Chapter 9

Communications
Programs (CS-series PLCs)
9-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming
9-2 Message Communications Programming
9-3 Special Remote I/O Programs
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
Note In this chapter, the bits, words, and data memory used in the example ladder programs
were selected arbitrarily. When creating actual programs, modify the contents so that
they do not overlap with other areas.

9-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming

When the following standard remote I/O programming is executed, the rotational speed reference
data specified in the DM (Data Memory) Area of the PLC is written to the 3G3MV Inverter and for-
ward or reverse operation is performed at the specified frequency when the Frequency Reference
Input Bit is turned ON and the Forward Input Bit or Reverse Input Bit is turned ON.

■ Allocations
Bit 000000 Frequency Reference Input Bit
Bit 000001 Forward Input Bit
Bit 000002 Reverse Input Bit Input
Bit 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit
Bit 001000 Local/Network selection Bit
Bit 003000 Fault Flag Flag

D00000 Rotational speed reference data

● Remote I/O: Outputs from PLC to 3G3MV Inverter Words n and n + 1

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
n Right- 0 --- Net Ref- Net Con- --- --- Fault Reverse/ For-
most erence trol Reset Stop ward/
stop
Left- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
most
n+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)
most

● Remote I/O: Inputs from 3G3MV Inverter to PLC Words m and m + 1

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
m Right- 0 At Fre- Refer- Control Inverter During During Alarm Fault
most quency ence From Net Ready Reverse Forward
From Net Run Run
Left- 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
most
m+1 Right- 2 Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)
most
Left- 3 Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)
most

9-2
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Timing Chart
000000
(Frequency Reference Input Bit)

000001
(Forward Input Bit)

000002
(Reverse Input Bit)

Word m bit 2
(During Forward Run)

Word m bit 3
(During Reverse Run)

Rotational speed D00000 (rotational speed reference data transmitted to words n + 1)

reference data
(word n+1)

003000 (Fault Flag)

000003 (Fault Reset

Input Bit)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

■ Operation
1.When the Frequency Reference Input Bit turns ON, the rotational speed reference data specified
in D00000 is moved to remote I/O output word n + 1.
2.When the Forward Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 0 (Forward/Stop) will turn ON, and
forward operation will start. During forward operation, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward
Run) will be ON.
3.When the Forward Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward Run) will turn OFF
after operation will decelerate to a stop.
4.When the Reverse Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 1 (Reverse/Stop) will turn ON, and
reverse operation will start. During reverse operation, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse
Run) will be ON.
5.When the Reverse Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse Run) will turn
OFF after operation decelerates to a stop.
6.When the remote I/O Fault Bit (word m bit 0) turns ON, the Fault Flag will turn ON.
7.When the Fault Reset Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 2 (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn
ON, and the fault will be cleared. When the fault is reset, the Fault Flag will turn OFF simultaneous-
ly.

9-3
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
001000
DIFU(013)
001001
See note.
DIFD(014)
During forward run During reverse run 001002
001001 (word m bit 2) (word m bit 3)
001003
001003 001002
001004
001004

001004
Net control
(word n bit 5)

Net reference
(word n bit 6)
000000
MOV(021) Speed reference setting
D00000
n+1
Fault Bit
000001 (word m bit 3) 003000
Forward/Stop Bit
(word n bit 0)
During forward run
000002 (word m bit 2) 003000
Reverse/Stop Bit
Fault Bit (word n bit 1)
(word m bit 0) 000003 Fault Flag
(003000)
003000

000003
Fault Reset Input Bit
(word n bit 2)

END(001)

Note This program is used to switch the input method for operation commands and frequency refer-
ences. It is not required if the n004 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to “9" and n003
(Inverter Run Command Selection) is set to “3."

9-4
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

9-2 Message Communications Programming

9-2-1 Inverter Fault Processing

The message communications programming example given here reads and stores the fault data
using explicit messages for fault outputs from the Inverter. If the Inverter has a fault, the remote I/O
input's Fault Bit (word m bit 0) will turn ON. Be sure to turn OFF the Run Command Bits (word n bits
0 and 1). In this program example, the fault code is stored in D00200.
If commands are interrupted by faults, store the completion code in the DM Area and re-execute the
command. When a fault occurs, check the contents of the fault and take countermeasures referring
to information provided in the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi-function Compact Inverter User's Manual
(I527).

■ Allocations
Bit 003000 Fault Flag
Bit 000000 Fault Code Read Flag
Bit 000001 CMND Write Completed Flag
Flag
Bit 000002 Response Flag
Bit 003003 Sending Message Flag
Bit 003002 Message Sent Flag
Bit 000100 Reset Input Bit
D00000 Slave node address (3G3MV Inverter) (hex)

Response data storage area

D03000 Command code: 2801
D03001 Completion code
D03002 No. of received data bytes
D03003 Node address and service code (8E:
Read normal; 94: Error)
D03004 Read data or error code
D00100 Completion code storage for
communications errors
D00200 Fault code storage for Inverter faults

9-5
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Timing Chart
Word m bit 0 (Fault Bit)

000000
(Fault Read Flag)
003003
(Sending Message Flag)
003002
(Message Sent Flag)

CMND instruction execution

000001
(CMND Write Completed Flag)
000002
(Response Flag)
A20200 (Message
Communications Enabled Flag)

003000 (Fault Flag)

000100 (Reset Input Bit)

D00200 (Fault code storage) Fault code

1 2 3

■ Operation
1.When the Inverter has a fault, bit 0 of word m (Fault Bit) will be turned ON. Until the fault is cleared,
the Fault Flag will be ON, and this will cause the Fault Read Flag to be turned ON, and the com-
mand specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND instruction.
2.When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (D03001)
will be examined. If an error is found, the error code will be stored in D00100 and the command
will be re-executed. If normally completed, the fault code will be stored in D00200 and the Mes-
sage Sent Flag will be turned ON, and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.
3.When the Reset Input Bit is turned ON, bit 2 of word n (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn ON. When
the fault is cleared, the Fault Flag will turn OFF.

■ Network Configuration
This program is based on the following conditions.
Master unit number: 0
Master node address: 63
Fixed allocation area setting: 1
Network Communications Enabled Flag: A20200
Online Flag: 151100
Network Communications Error Flag: A21900

9-6
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
Fault (Wd m, bit 00) 003001
DIFU(013) MOV(021)
003001 No. of send data bytes #0009
D01000
003001 Fault (Wd m, bit 0) 003000
MOV(021)
Fault Flag No. of received bytes #000A
003000
D01001

000100 MOV(021)
Fault reset Network address
Wd n, bit 02 #0000
003001 D01002
MOV(021)
MOV(021)
#0000 Send destination node #00FE
D00300 address: 00(Local network,
local node)Send destination D01003
unit number: FE
MOVD(083) MOV(021)
Response required
D00000 #0000
Communications port No. 0
#0210 Number of resends: 0 D01004
D00300
MOV(021)
Response monitor time: 10 s #0064
ORW(035)
Sets the node address of the D01005
D00300
Slave for reading.
#000E MOV(021)
D00400 Explicit message command #2801
003001 D02000
BSET(071)
MOV(021)
#0000 Slave node address and D00400
D03000 service code: OE Hex
D02001
D03009
MOV(021)
MOV(021) *Class ID #0029
Clears the storage area, and sets 1 in word #0001 D02002
0000
0000
(used for shift register). MOV(021)
*Instance ID #0001
D02003

MOV(021)
*Attribute ID #0D00
*Sets CMND data. D02004

9-7
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

000000 003002
003003
003003

A20200
(Network
Communications
000000 Enabled Flag)
ASL(025)
151100 0000
(Online Flag)
CMND(490) Executes CMND instruction.
D02000
A20200 A21900 D03000
(Network (Network D01000
Communications Communications
000001 Enabled Flag) Error Flag)
ASR(026) Confirms execution of CMND instruction.
A21900 0000
(Network
Communications
Error Flag)
ASL(025)
0000

151100
000002 (Online Flag)
CMP(020) The completion code examined. If an
A20200 #0000 error is found, the command is re-
(Network executed. If the command is executed
D03001 normally, the data is stored in D00200.
Communications
Enabled Flag)
MOV(021)
Equals Flag D03001
(P_EQ) D00100

ASR(026)
0000

ASR(026)
0000

MOV(021)
Equals Flag D03004
(P_EQ) D00200

MOV(021)
#0000
0000

003002

END(001)

9-8
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

9-2-2 Reading/Writing Data

This programming example writes and reads data using explicit messages. Explicit messages can
be executed by specifying FINS commands in the DM Area allocated to the PLC, and sending them
using the CMND instruction. (The IOWR instruction is used with C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.)
If there is an error in the command, the completion code is stored in the DM Area and the command
is re-executed.

■ Allocations
Bit 001000 Program Start Input Bit Input
Bit 000000 Message Execution Flag
Bit 000001 Command Write Flag
Bit 000002 Response Flag Flag
Bit 003000 Sending Message Flag
Bit 003001 Message Sent Flag
D00000 Slave node address (3G3MV Inverter)
D00001 Service code; 0E: Read, 10: Write Note: If the written data size is
D00002 Number of command data bytes (Hex) Word,” set in the order of the
rightmost bits and leftmost bits.
D00003 Class ID (Hex)
D00004 Instance ID (Hex)
D00005 Attribute ID (Hex)
D00006 to D00009 Write data (Hex) (See note)

Response data storage area

D03000 Command code: 2801
D03001 Completion code
D03002 No. of received data bytes
D03003 Node address and service code (8E: Read normal; 90: Write normal; 94: Error)
D03004 to D03007 Completion code storage for communications errors
D00100 Read data or error code

9-9
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Timing Chart
001000
(Program Start Input Bit)
001001
(Start Switch ON)
000000
(Message Execution Flag)
003000
(Sending Message Flag)

003001
(Message Sent Flag)
CMND instruction execution

000001
(CMND Write Completed Flag)

000002 (Response Flag)

Message Communications
Enabled Flag

Completion code error

D00100 Completion code
(Completion code storage)

1 2 3

■ Operation
1.When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Message Execution Flag will turn ON, and the
command specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND instruction.
2.When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (D03001)
is examined. If an error is found, the completion code is stored in D00100, and the command is
re-executed.
3.If the completion code of the response is normal, the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON, and
the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.

■ Network Configuration
This program is based on the following conditions.
Master unit number: 0
Master node address: 63
Fixed allocation area setting: 1
Network Communications Enabled Flag: A20200
Online Flag: 151100
Network Communications Error Flag: A21900

9-10
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
001000 001001
DIFU(013) MOVD(083)
001001 D00007
001001
#0012
BSET(071)
D00204
#0000
D00200 MOVD(083)
D00220 D00007
#0210
/(430)
D00205
D00002
#0002 MOVD(083)
D00200 D00008
#0012
CMP(020)
D00205
#0000
D00201 MOVD(083)
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
D00008
+C(402)
#0210
#0001
D00206
D00200
D00200 MOVD(083)
D00009
+C(402)
#0012
#0004
D00206
D00200
D00200 MOVD(083)
D00000
BCD(024)
#0210
D00200
D00210
D00202
ORW(035)
MOVD(083)
D00210
D00005
D00001
#0210
D00220
D00203
BSET(071)
MOVD(083)
#0000
D00006
D03000
#0012
D03009
D00203
MOV(021)
MOVD(083)
#0001
D00006
0000
#0210
Converts command specified in D00204 Converts command specified in
DM Area to CMND data. DM Area to CMND data.

9-11
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

001001 000000 003001

MOV(021) 003000
D0002 003000
D01000

MOV(021) 151100
#000A 000000 (Online Flag)
D01001 CMND(490)
A20200 (Network D02000
MOV(021) Communications D03000
#0000 Enabled Flag) D01000
D01002
Executes CMND instruction.
ASL(025)
MOV(021) A21900 0000
(Network
#00FE Communications
000001 Error Flag)
D01003
ASR(026)
A20200 (Network A21900 0000
MOV(021) Communications (Network
Communications
#0000 Enabled Flag) Error Flag)
D01004 ASL(025)
0000
MOV(021) Confirms execution of CMND instruction.
#0064
D01005 151100
000002 (Online Flag)
MOV(021) CMP(020)
#2801 A20200 (Network #0000
D02000 Communications D03001
Enabled Flag)

MOV(021) MOV(021)
D00220 Equals Flag D03001
D02001 (P_EQ) D00100

MOV(021) ASR(026)
D00003 0000
D02002
ASR(026)
MOV(021) 0000
D00004
D02003 MOV(021)
Equals Flag #0000
MOV(021) (P_EQ) 0000
D00203
D02004 003001

MOV(021) END(001)
D00204
D02005

MOV(021)
D00205
D02006

MOV(021)
D00206
Sets CMND data. D02007

9-12
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

9-3 Special Remote I/O Programs

9-3-1 Simple Operation Programs

This section describes examples of simple operation programming using special remote I/O. To use
special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-2 Switching the
Remote I/O Function and change to the special remote I/O operation.
Once the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, Inverter operations will continue until the Program
End Input is turned ON. The frequency (speed) reference specified in the DM Area (D01000) of the
PLC is repeatedly set in the Inverter. The output frequency value will be repeatedly read and stored
in the DM Area (D02000). The Inverter status will also be read repeatedly and stored in words
(0020**) allocated in the PLC.
If any communications error occurs, the program will stop and a stop command will be sent to the
Inverter. This state will continue until the Communications Fault Reset Input Bit is turned ON.

Note Write the program so that the Inverter operation commands (001000 and 001001) will be
turned OFF when the Fault Bit (002014) of the Inverter status turns ON, and also take appro-
priate countermeasures according to maintenance information in the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV
Multi-function General-purpose Inverter User's Manual.

■ Allocations

● Inverter Control Input Word Allocation

Word Function
001000 Forward/Stop (1: forward) Bit
001001 Reverse/Stop (1: reverse) Bit
001002 Multi-function Input 3 (set with n052) Bit
001003 Multi-function Input 4 (set with n053) Bit
001004 Multi-function Input 5 (set with n054) Bit
001005 Multi-function Input 6 (set with n055) Bit
001006 Multi-function Input 7 (set with n056) Bit
001007 Not used.
001008 External Fault Input (1: EFO) Bit
001009 Fault Reset (1: reset) Bit

● Inverter Status Word Allocation

Word Function
002000 During Run (1: during run) Bit
002001 Zero Speed (1: zero speed) Bit
002002 Frequency Agree (1: frequency agree) Bit
002003 Warning (minor fault) (1: alarm) Bit
002004 Frequency Detect 1 (1: output frequency ≤
n095) Bit

9-13
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
Word Function
002005 Frequency Detect 2 (1: output frequency ≥
n095) Bit
002006 Inverter Ready (1: Inverter ready) Bit
002007 UV (1: UV) Bit
002008 Baseblock (1: baseblock) Bit
002009 Frequency Reference Mode (1: not communi-
cations) Bit
002010 Run Command Mode (1: not communications)
Bit
002011 Overtorque Detection (1: overtorque detected)
Bit
002012 Not used.
002013 during Fault Retry (1: during fault retry) Bit
002014 Fault (1: during fault) Bit
002015 Communications Timeover CE (1: communica-
tions timeover detected) Bit

● Program-related Bits Used

Word Function
000000 Program Start Input Bit
000001 Program End Input Bit
000002 Program Execution Flag
000003 Communications Error Reset Input Bit
000004 Inverter Stop Command Flag
000100 Frequency Reference Write Flag
000101 Control Input Write Flag
000102 Output Frequency Read Flag
000103 Inverter Status Read Flag
000300 Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag
000301 Control Input Write Completed Flag
000302 Output Frequency Read Completed Flag
000303 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag
003110 Communications Error Flag

● Inverter Control Input

Word Function
D01000 Reference frequency setting
D02000 Output frequency monitor

9-14
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
● Remote I/O Allocation Areas
I/O classification Word address 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost bits) Function code (10: Write, 03:
(PLC to 3G3MV Read)
Inverter) n+1 Register data (leftmost bits) Register number (rightmost
bits)
n+2 Not used Register data (rightmost bits)
Input m Register number (leftmost bits) Function code (10: Write, 03:
(3G3MV Inverter to Read)
PLC) m+1 Register data (leftmost bits) Register number (rightmost
bits)
m+2 Not used Register data (rightmost bits)

■ Timing Chart
000000 (Program Start Input Bit)
000001 (Program End Input Bit) or
003110 (Communications Error Flag)

000002 (Program Execution Flag)

000100 (Frequency Reference

Write Flag)

000101 (Control Input Write Flag)

000102 (Output Frequency Read Flag)

000103 (Inverter Status Read Flag)

000300 (Control Input Write

Completed Flag)

000301 (Frequency Reference Write

Completed Flag)

000302 (Output Frequency Read

Completed Flag)
000303 (Inverter Status Read
Completed Flag)

000004 (Inverter Stop Command

Flag)

1 2 3 4 5

9-15
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Operation
1.When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Program Execution Input Bit will be set to self-
holding and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON. When the Frequency Refer-
ence Write Flag is ON, the frequency reference data in D01000 will be transferred to the Inverter.
When the Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the Frequency Reference
Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Control Input Write Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted
to achieve this.)
2.When the Control Input Write Flag is turned ON, the Inverter control input specified in word 0010
will be transferred to the Inverter. When the Control Input Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the
Control Input Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Output Frequency Reference Read Flag will
be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)
3.When the Output Frequency Read Flag is turned ON, the output frequency of the Inverter will be
read. When the Output Frequency Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read output frequency
will be stored in D02000, the Output Frequency Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Inverter
Status Read Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)
4.When the Inverter Status Read Flag is turned ON, the Inverter status will be read. When the In-
verter Status Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read Inverter status will be transferred to
word 0020, the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Frequency Reference Write
Flag will be turned ON. Setting the Frequency Reference Write Flag to ON will repeat the above
steps 1 to 4.
5.When the Program End Input Bit is turned ON, the Inverter stop command will be written in the
Inverter. (When word m bit 7 turns ON, communications errors will be detected and the Commu-
nications Error Flag will be turned ON and will be self-holding. While this flag remains ON, the sys-
tem will perform the same processing as when the Program End Input Bit is turned ON. When the
Communications Error Reset Input Bit is turned ON, the self-holding state will be cleared.)

9-16
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
000000 000004 000100
DIFU(013) 003002
003000 000101
003000 000004
000002
000102
000002

000103
003000
MOV(021)
003002
Sets shift register. #0001
XFER(070)
0001
000100 #0002
MOV(021) D00100
#0010 n
D00100
MOVD(083)
ANDW(034)
D00102
D01000
#0010
#FF00
n+2
D00101
000100
ORW(035) CMP(020)
D00101 #0010
#0002 Equals Flag (P_EQ) m
D00101
003100
ANDW(034)
D01000
ANDW(034)
Sets frequency reference. #00FF
m 1
D00102
000101 #00FF
MOV(021) D01002
#0010
CMP(020)
D00100
#0002
ANDW(034) D01002
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
0010
#FF00 003101
D00101 003100 003101
ASL(025)
ORW(035)
0001
D00101
#0001
000300
D00101
000101
ANDW(034) CMP(020)
0010 #0010
Sets control input. #00FF m
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
D00102
000102
003103
MOV(021)
#0003
ANDW(034)
D00100
m+1
MOV(021) #00FF
Reads output frequency. #0024 D01002
D00101
000103 CMP(020)
MOV(021) #0001
#0003 D01002
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
D00100
003104
MOV(021)
Reads Inverter status. #002C
D00101

9-17
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
003103 003104 003107 003108
ASL(025) ANDW(034)
0001 m+1
#FF00
000301 D01003
000102
ANDW(034)
CMP(020)
m+2
#0003
#00FF
m
Equals Flag (P_EQ) D01004

003105 ORW(035)
D01003
ANDW(034) D01004
m+1 0020
#00FF
MOV(021)
D01002
#0001
CMP(020) 0001
#0024
D01002 000303
Equals Flag (P_EQ) 000002
ANDW(034)
003106
m
003105 003106
#0080
ANDW(034)
D01005
m+1
#FF00 CMP(020)
D01003 #0080
D01005
ANDW(034) Equals Flag (P_EQ)
m+2 003109
#00FF
003109 000003
D01004
003110
ORW(035) 003110
D01003
D01004 003110
D02000 000004
000001
ASL(025)
0001
000004
MOV(021)
000302
#0000
000103
0001
CMP(020)
#0003 MOV(021)
m #0010
Equals Flag (P_EQ) D00100
003107 MOV(021)
#0001
ANDW(034) D00101
m+1
MOV(021)
#00FF
#0000
D01002
D00102
CMP(020)
XFER(070)
#002C
#0002
D01002
Equals Flag (P_EQ) D00100
n
003108
MOVD(083)
D00102
#0010
n+2
Executes stop command.
END(001)

9-18
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9

9-3-2 Reading Parameter Data

This programming example is designed to read the parameter data specified in the 3G3MV Inverter.
To use special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-2 Switching
the Remote I/O Function and change to the special remote I/O operation.

■ Allocation
Bit 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit
Input
Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit
Bit 003000 Data Read Flag
Bit 003001 Faulty Data Flag Flag
Bit 003005 Data Read Completed Flag
D00000 Register number of the parameter to be read
D00001 Read data

● Remote I/O Allocation Areas

I/O classification Word address 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(PLC to 3G3MV byte) Read)
Inverter) n+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
n+2 Not used. Register data (rightmost byte)
Input m Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(3G3MV Inverter to byte) Read)
PLC) m+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
m+2 Not used. Register data (rightmost byte)

■ Timing Chart
000000 (Read Parameter
Input Bit)

003000 (Data Read Flag)

003005 (Data Read Completed

Flag)
Word n to n+2 (Send Data) Send Data (Read)

Word m to m+2 (Receive Data) Receive Data (Read)

1 2

9-19
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Operation
1.Set the register number of the parameter to be read in D00000. When the Read Parameter Input
Bit is turned ON, the Data Read Flag will be turned ON and parameter reading processing will be
executed.
2.If the data is normally read, the read parameter register number and data will be returned by the
Inverter. When the register number that was sent agrees with the received register number, the
parameter data will be stored in D00001, the Data Read Completed Flag will be turned ON and
the Data Read Flag will be turned OFF.

Note If the send data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data
Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (000002) is turned
ON.

9-20
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
000000 (Read
Parameter Input Bit) 003001 003005
DIFU(013) MOV(021)
000001 m+1
000001 003005 003001 D00201
003000
003000 MOV(021)
m+2
000001 D00202
BSET(071)
#0000 ANDW(034)
D00200 D00201
D00209 #FF00
D00203
ANDW(034)
D00000 ANDW(034)
#FF00 D00202
D00200 #00FF
D00204
ORW(035)
D00200 ORW(035)
#0003 Transfers read data to D00001. D00203
D00205 D00204
D00001
ANDW(034) Word m bit 7 000002
D00000
003001
#00FF
003001
D00206

XFER(070)
END(001)
#0002
D00205
n

MOVD(083)
#0000
#0010
Sets the read data. n+2
003000
CMP(020)
D00205
m
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003002

ANDW(034)
m+1
#00FF
D00208

CMP(020)
D00206
D00208
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003003
003002 003003
003005
Confirms the completion of reading.

9-21
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
9-3-3 Writing Parameter Data
This programming example is designed to write the parameter data in the 3G3MV Inverter. After writ-
ing has been completed, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data as the
Inverter operation data.
To use special remote I/O, it will be necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-2
Switching the Remote I/O Function and change to the special remote I/O operation.

■ Allocations
Bit 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit
Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit Input
Bit 003000 Data Write Flag
Bit 003005 Data Agree Flag (Function Code and Register No.)
Bit 000100 Sending Written Data Flag
Bit 000101 Sending Enter Command Flag Flag
Bit 000102 Setting “00" Function Code Flag
Bit 000103 Data Write Completed Flag
Bit 003010 Faulty Data Flag
D00000 Register number of the parameter to be written
D00001 Written data

● Remote I/O Allocation Areas

I/O classification Word address 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(PLC to 3G3MV byte) Read)
Inverter) n+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
n+2 Not used Register data (rightmost byte)
Input m Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(3G3MV Inverter to byte) Read)
PLC) m+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
m+2 Not used Register data (rightmost byte)

9-22
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Timing Chart
000000 (Write Parameter Input Bit)

003000 (Data Write Flag)

003005 (Data Agree Flag)

000100 (Sending Written Data Flag)

000101 (Sending Enter

Command Flag)

000102 (Sending “00" Function Flag)

000103 (Data Write Completed Flag)

Word n to n+2 (Send Data) Send Data (Write) Enter Command “00" Function

Word m to m+2 (Receive Data) Send Data (Write) Enter Command “00" Function

1 2 3 4

■ Operation
1.Set the register number of the parameter and the data to be written in D00000 and D00001 re-
spectively. When the Write Parameter Input Bit is turned ON, the Data Write Flag will be turned
ON and parameter writing processing will be executed.
2.If the data is properly written, the written parameter register number and the function code will be
returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and the function code agree with the
received data contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the enter command.
3.If the enter command is normally received, the register number and function code that agree with
the enter command will be returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and function
code agree with the received contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the function
code “00" (both the register number and function code are 0000).
4.In the same manner, if the function code 00" is normally received, the Data Agree Flag will be
turned ON and the Data Write Completed Flag will be turned ON. When the Data Write Completed
Flag turns ON, the Data Write Flag will turn OFF and the program will stop.
Note 1. If the enter command remains set, data will be repeatedly written to EEPROM. Therefore,
set the function code to “00" (both the register number and function code are 0000), which
performs no processing, to disable the enter command.
Note 2. If the sent data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data
Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (000002) is turned
ON.

9-23
Communications Programs (CS-series PLCs) Chapter 9
■ Ladder Program
000000 (Write Parameter
Input Bit) 003010 000100
DIFU(013) 003001
000001 000101
000001 000103 003010
003000
000102
003000

003001
000103
XFER(070)
MOV(021)
#0002
#0000
D00205
000001 0001
n
MOV(021)
MOVD(083)
#0001
D00207
000100 0001
#0010
BSET(071) n+2
003001
#0000
CMP(020)
D00200
D00205
D00209
Equals Flag (P_EQ) m
ANDW(034)
D00000 003002
#FF00 ANDW(034)
D00200 m+1
ORW(035) #00FF
D00200 D00208
#0010 ANDW(034)
D00205 D00206
ANDW(034) #00FF
D00000 D00209
#00FF CMP(020)
D00201 D00208
ANDW(034) Equals Flag (P_EQ) D00209
D00001
003003
#FF00 003002 003003
D00202 003005
ORW(035)
ASL(025)
D00201
0001
D00202 Word m bit 7 000002
D00206 003010
ANDW(034) 003010
MOV(021)
Sets write data. D00001 #0000
#00FF 0001
000101 D00207
BSET(071)
MOV(021) #0000
#FF10 D00205
D00205 D00207
MOV(021) XFER(070)
#00FD #0002
D00206 D00205
MOV(021) n
#0000 MOVD(083)
Sets enter command. D00207 D00207
000102
Data error processing.
#0010
BSET(071) n+2
#0000
END(001)
D00205
Sets “00" function.
D00207

9-24
 Chapter 10

Appendices
10-1 Specifications
10-2 Objects
10-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time
10-4 3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances,
and Attributes
10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes
10-6 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes
10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes
Appendices Chapter 10

10-1 Specifications

10-1-1 DeviceNet Communications Unit Specifications

Item Specifications
Model 3G3MV-PDRT2
Remote I/O • Basic remote I/O: Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words
• Standard remote I/O (default setting):
Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words
• Special remote I/O: Allocated 3 input words and 3 output words
• Control remote I/O: Allocated 4 or 5 input words and 4 output words
• Unit status: Allocated 1 input word
• Multi-function input monitor: Allocated 1 input word
Note 1. The user can select from among these six types of remote I/O.
Note 2. Basic and standard remote I/O are compatible with DeviceNet. The
other remote I/O functions are applicable only to this product and are
not defined in DeviceNet Specification.
Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received.
Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC/DC drive profile.
Baud rate 125, 250, or 500 kbps, automatically matches the baud rate of the Master Unit.
Communications power supply speci- 11 to 25 V DC (50 mA max., 20 mA typical)
fications
Internal circuit power supply Supplied from the 3G3MV Inverter.
Operating location Indoors (with no corrosive gases, oil mist, metallic particles, etc.)
Operating ambient temperature −10 to 50°C
Operating ambient humidity 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature −20 to 60°C
Area 1,000 m max.
Weight 100 g max.

■ Dimensions

MS
NODE ADR NS
×10 ×1
128

68 3 21 10.3

10-2
Appendices Chapter 10

10-1-2 DeviceNet Communications Card Specifications

Item Specifications
Model 3G3RV-PDRT2
Remote I/O • Basic remote I/O: Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words
• Standard remote I/O (default setting):
Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words
• Special remote I/O: Allocated 3 input words and 3 output words
• Control remote I/O: Allocated 4 or 5 input words and 4 output words
• Unit status: Allocated 1 input word
• Multi-function input monitor: Allocated 1 input word
Note 1. The user can select from among these six types of remote I/O.
Note 2. Basic and standard remote I/O are compatible with DeviceNet.
The other remote I/O functions are applicable only to this product
and are not defined in DeviceNet Specification.
Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received.
Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC/DC drive profile.
Baud rate 125, 250, or 500 kbps, automatically matches the baud rate of the Master
Unit.
Communications power supply 11 to 25 V DC (50 mA max., 20 mA typical)
specifications
Internal circuit power supply Supplied from the 3G3RV/3G3FV Inverter.
Operating location Indoors (with no corrosive gases, oil mist, metallic particles, etc.)
Operating ambient tempera- −10 to 45°C
ture
Operating ambient humidity 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature −20 to 60°C
Area 1,000 m max.
Weight 50 g max.

10-3
Appendices Chapter 10

10-2 Objects

10-2-1 Identity Objects (Identification Information): Class 01 Hex

Identity objects are objects that provide DeviceNet product information. All of this information is read-
only.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
05 Reset (return to initial status)

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 01 Vender ID Indicates the maker's --- 002F Yes No Word
code.
OMRON: 47 (2F hex)
02 Device Type Indicates the DeviceNet --- 0002 Yes No Word
profile classification. The
Inverter corresponds to
the AC/DC Drive.
• Master Unit: 0
• AC/DC Drive: 2
03 Product Code Assigned to each series --- See note. Yes No Word
by each maker.
04 Revision Indicates overall software --- 02.01 Yes No Byte ×
revisions for the 2
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Card.
05 Status Indicates the communica- --- 0000 Yes No Word
tions status of the
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Card.
06 Serial Number Indicates the product --- Depends Yes No Long
serial number of the on prod-
DeviceNet Communica- uct.
tions Card. (60000000 hex
onwards)
07 Product Name Indicates product model --- See note. Yes No String
number.
08 State Not supported. --- --- --- --- ---

Note The following table shows the contents of the Product Name and Product Code.

Communications Unit/Card Model number Product Name Product Code

3G3MV-PDRT2 3G3MV-@ 3G3MV-PDRT2 61 (3D hex)
3G3RV-PDRT2 3G3PV-@ 3G3PV-PDRT2 63 (3F hex)
3G3RV-@ 3G3RV-PDRT2 64 (40 hex)
3G3FV-@ 3G3FV-PDRT2 62 (3E hex)

10-4
Appendices Chapter 10
Restarting Communications
The Communications Unit can be restarted using the following explicit message conforming to
DeviceNet communications.
Service 05 hex/Class 01 hex/Instance 01 hex/Attribute none/Data 00
• Use this message to enable parameter settings that are reflected at restart such as the default con-
nection path and average power calculation cycle.
• The Inverter will not restart from this command. To restart the Inverter, turn OFF the power and
then turn ON again.

10-2-2 Message Router Objects: Class 02 Hex

Message router objects have the function of distributing DeviceNet communications data. Message
router objects themselves are involved in internal processing only and do not have data to be
exchanged externally.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
--- --- Not supported. --- --- --- --- --- ---

10-2-3 DeviceNet Objects: Class 03 Hex

DeviceNet objects are related to DeviceNet communications information and operations.
Processing is performed automatically after the communications connection is established, so the
functions and data have no particular use for the user.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single
4B Allocate Master/Slave Connec-
tion Set
4C Release Master/Slave Connec-
tion Set

10-5
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 03 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 01 MAC ID Switch setting: 00 to 63 --- 00 Yes No Byte
The communications node
address is specified by the
switches and cannot be
overwritten.
Switch setting: 64 to 99 00 to 63 00 Yes Yes Byte
The communications node
address is specified by the
software settings. The
default setting is 00.
02 Baud Rate Indicates the baud rate. --- 00 Yes No Byte
00: 125 Kbps
01: 250 Kbps
02: 500 Kbps
03 BOI --- --- 0000 Yes No Word
04 Bus-off Counter --- --- 0000 Yes No Word
05 Allocation Infor- Indicates DeviceNet com- --- 00 00 Yes Yes Byte ×
mation munications connection 2
information.

Note: Cannot be written

for explicit mes-
sages. (Error is
returned.)

10-2-4 Assembly Objects: Class 04 Hex

Assembly objects are objects related to remote I/O operations. Remote I/O operations are configured
with these objects for communications.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

10-6
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
14 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as See note 1. 00 00 00 Yes Yes Byte ×
for basic remote I/O (out- 00 4
put).
15 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as See note 1. 00 00 00 Yes Yes Byte ×
for standard remote I/O 00 4
(output).
46 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for basic remote I/O 00 4
(input).
47 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for standard remote I/O 00 4
(input).
64 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as See note 1. 00 00 00 Yes Yes Byte ×
for special remote I/O 00 00 5
(output).
65 03 Remote I/O data Remote I/O data See note 1. 00 00 00 Yes Yes Byte ×
00 00 00 8
00 00
96 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for special remote I/O 00 00 5
(input).
97 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for control remote I/O 00 00 00 8
(input). 00 00
98 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for control remote I/O + 00 00 00 10
unit status (input). 00 00 00
00
99 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for control remote I/O + 00 00 00 9
multi-function input moni- 00 00 00
tor (input).
9A 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 00 Yes No Byte ×
for unit status (input). 2
9B 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00 Yes No Byte ×
for multi-function input 1
monitor (input).

Note 1. The setting ranges are the same as the respective remote I/O setting ranges.
Note 2. The remote I/O functions are the same as the functions explained in Chapter 5 Remote I/O
Functions.
Note 3. Remote I/O can be performed by means of message communications. When a normal re-
mote I/O communications connection is established, however, the message communica-
tions cannot be used for that purpose. Even if an attempt is made to use message
communications, they will be overwritten by remote I/O inputs.

10-2-5 DeviceNet Connection Objects: Class 05 Hex

DeviceNet connection objects are objects related to information and operations involving DeviceNet
communications connections. The Master Unit uses the information and operations of these objects
to execute the initial processing for communications.
The functions and data have no particular use for the user.
Use this object when switching the remote I/O function.

10-7
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Support Service Code
Service code number (hex) Service
05 Reset (reset to initial status)
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 05 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 01 State Indicates the status of this --- Must be Yes No Byte
Explicit object (instance). “03" when
message 00: Does not exist in net- communi-
work, or is not ready. cations
01: In network state, wait- are estab-
ing for connection event lished.
from Master Unit.
02: Waiting for connection
ID (attribute) writing.
03: Connection com-
pleted.
04: Timeout
02 Instance type Indicates the type of --- 00 Yes No Byte
object (instance).
00: Explicit message
01: Remote I/O
03 Transport class Indicates the communica- --- 83 Yes No Byte
trigger tions configuration for the
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit/Card.
04 Produced con- Indicates the label used --- --- Yes No Word
nection ID for the communications
05 Consumed con- header for the DeviceNet --- --- Yes No Word
nection ID Communications Unit/
Card. (See note 1.)
* These are set when the
communications con-
nection is made.
06 Initial comm Indicates the communica- --- 21 Yes No Byte
characteristics tions configuration for the
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit/Card.
07 Produced con- Indicates the maximum --- 0020 Yes No Word
nection size number of bytes for trans-
mission.
08 Consumed con- Indicates the maximum --- 0020 Yes No Word
nection size number of bytes for recep-
tion.

10-8
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 09 Expected packet Indicates the length of the 0 to 65,535 09C4 Yes Yes Word
Explicit rate internal processing time- (ms) (2,500
message out when a communica- ms)
tions request is received.
Incremented by 10-ms
units.
0C Watchdog time- Indicates the action for --- 01 Yes No Byte
out action internal processing time-
out related to communica-
tions.
00: Retain timeout status
(until reset or cleared).
01: Cut connection auto-
matically.
02: Operate again with
same connection as is.
0D Produced con- (No data for explicit mes- --- 0000 Yes No Word
nection path sages.)
length
0E Produced con- (No data for explicit mes- --- --- Yes No Array
nection path sages.)
0F Consumed con- (No data for explicit mes- --- 0000 Yes No Word
nection path sages.)
length
10 Consumed con- (No data for explicit mes- --- --- Yes No Array
nection path sages.)
02 01 State Indicates the status of this --- Must be Yes No Byte
03 object (instance). “03" when
00: Does not exist in net- communi-
04 cations
work, or is not ready.
Remote 01: In network state, wait- are estab-
I/O ing for connection event lished.
(See from Master Unit.
note 2.) 02: Waiting for connection
ID (attribute) writing.
03: Connection com-
pleted.
04: Timeout
02 Instance type Indicates the type of --- 01 Yes No Byte
object (instance).
00: Explicit message
01: Remote I/O
03 Transport class Indicates the communica- --- 82 Yes No Byte
trigger tions configuration for the
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit/Card.
04 Produced con- Indicates the label used --- --- Yes No Word
nection ID for the communications
05 Consumed con- header for the DeviceNet --- --- Yes No Word
nection ID Communications Unit/
Card. (See note 1.)
* These are set when the
communications con-
nection is made.
06 Initial comm Indicates the communica- --- 01 Yes No Byte
characteristics tions configuration for the
DeviceNet Communica-
tions Unit/Card.
07 Produced con- Indicates the maximum --- See note Yes No Word
nection size number of bytes for trans- 3.
mission.

10-9
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
02 08 Consumed con- Indicates the maximum --- See note Yes No Word
03 nection size number of bytes for recep- 3.
tion.
04
Remote 09 Expected packet Indicates the length of the 0 to 65,535 0000 Yes Yes Word
I/O rate internal processing time- (ms) (0 ms)
out when a communica-
(See tions request is received.
note 2.) Incremented by 10-ms
units.
0C Watchdog time- Indicates the action for --- 00 Yes No Byte
out action internal processing time-
out related to communica-
tions.
00: Retain timeout status
(until reset or cleared).
0D Produced con- Indicates number of bytes --- See note Yes No Word
nection path of data for produced con- 3.
length nection path.
0E Produced con- Indicates the data for --- See note Yes No Array
nection path defining the application 3.
object for sending this
object (instance).
* Has a function for
switching the DeviceNet
Communication Unit/
Card’s remote I/O oper-
ation.
0F Consumed con- Indicates the number of --- See note Yes No Word
nection path bytes of data for the con- 3.
length sumed connection path.
10 Consumed con- Indicates the data for --- See note Yes No Array
nection path defining the application 3.
object for receiving this
object (instance).
* Has a function for
switching the DeviceNet
Communication Unit/
Card's remote I/O oper-
ation.

Note 1. “Produced” means output (Inverter to PLC), and “Consumed” means input (PLC to Inverter).
Note 2. Instance 02 is a Poll connection, Instance 03 is a Bit-strobe connection, and Instance 04 is
a COS or Cyclic connection.
Note 3. The following table shows the connection path for each Instance.

● Produced Connection Path

Remote I/O function Connection Path Connection Path Remarks
Size Length
46 hex: Basic remote I/O (input) 0004 0006 20 04 24 46 30 03 ---
47 hex: Standard remote I/O 0004 0006 20 04 24 47 30 03 Instance 02
(input) default setting
96 hex: Special remote I/O (input) 0005 0006 20 04 24 96 30 03 ---
97 hex: Control I/O remote I/O 0008 0006 20 04 24 97 30 03 ---
(input)

10-10
Appendices Chapter 10

Remote I/O function Connection Path Connection Path Remarks

Size Length
98 hex: Control I/O remote I/O + 000A 0006 20 04 24 98 30 03 ---
Unit status (input)
99 hex: Control I/O remote I/O + 0009 0006 20 04 24 99 30 03 ---
multi-function input monitor (input)
9A hex: Unit status (input) 0002 0006 20 04 24 9A 30 03 Instance 04
default setting
9B hex: Multi-function input moni- 0001 0006 20 04 24 9B 30 03 ---
tor (input)
No remote I/O function set. 0000 0000 --- Instance 03
default setting

● Consumed Connection Path

Remote I/O function Connection Path Connection Path Remarks
Size Length
14 hex: Basic remote I/O (input) 0004 0006 20 04 24 14 30 03
15 hex: Standard remote I/O 0004 0006 20 04 24 15 30 03 Instance 02
(input) default setting
64 hex: Special remote I/O (input) 0005 0006 20 04 24 64 30 03 ---
65 hex: Control I/O remote I/O 0008 0006 20 04 24 65 30 03 ---
(input)
No remote I/O function set. 0000 0000 --- Instance 03 and
Instance 04
default setting

10-2-6 Input Terminal Control Objects: Class 08 Hex

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
05 Reset (return to initial status)
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

10-11
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates the software revision --- 0002 Yes No Word
Revision of Class 08.
The revision value increases
when changes have been
made.
02 Max Instance Indicates the number of input --- 0007 Yes No Word
terminals. (Depends on the
Inverter being used.)
01 to 08 03 Value Terminal status --- 00 Yes No Byte
(one per 00: OFF, 01: ON
terminal) 65 Lifetime mode Maintenance count method 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
selection 00: Conduction time,
01: Number of ON operations
66 Lifetime present Present value of the mainte- --- 0000 Yes Yes Long
value nance count 0000 Reset
67 Lifetime monitor Maintenance count compari- --- 00 Yes No Byte
flag son result
(ON when PV - threshold ≤ 0)
00: OFF, 01:ON
68 Lifetime thresh- Lifetime monitor value 0000 0000 to 0000 Yes Yes Long
old setting Set the cumulative time that FFFF FFFF 0000
the input is ON (s) or the num-
ber of contact operations.

10-2-7 : Class 09 Hex

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
05 Reset (return to initial status)
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

10-12
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates the software revi- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision sion of Class 08.
The revision value increases
when changes have been
made.
02 Max Instance Indicates the number of out- --- 0003 Yes No Word
put terminals. (Depends on
the Inverter being used.)
01 to 03 03 Value Terminal status --- 00 Yes No Byte
(One per 00: OFF, 01: ON
terminal)
05 Fault Action Hold/clear output after fault 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
00: Hold, 01: Clear
65 Lifetime mode Maintenance count method 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
selection 00: Conduction time,
01: Number of ON operations
66 Lifetime present Present value of the mainte- --- 0000 Yes Yes Long
value nance count 0000 Reset
67 Lifetime monitor Maintenance count compari- --- 00 Yes No Byte
flag son result
(ON when PV ≥ threshold)
00: OFF, 01:ON
68 Lifetime thresh- Lifetime monitor value 0000 0000 to 0000 Yes Yes Long
old setting Set the cumulative time that FFFF FFFF 0000
the output is ON (s) or the
number of contact opera-
tions.

10-2-8 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex

Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters. The motors that
can be connected to Inverters are squirrel-cage inductive motors, so the “Motor Type” is always “7."
The motor's rated current and rated voltage can be set and read.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

10-13
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 28 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Motor Type Indicates the type of motor --- 07 Yes No Byte
to be used. The setting for
a squirrel-cage inductive
motor is 7.
06 Motor Rated The motor's rated current Inverter rated See note Yes Yes Word
Current can be set and read. The output current 1.
setting unit is 0.1 A. (The 10% to 120%
setting unit can be
changed using the cur-
rent scale in Class 2A,
Instance 1, Attribute 17.)
07 Motor Rated The motor's rated voltage 0 to 255 V 00C8 Yes Yes Word
Voltage can be set and read. The (0 to 510 V) (0190)
setting unit is 1 V. (The (See note 2.) (See note
setting unit can be 2.)
changed using the voltage
scale in Class 2A,
Instance 1, Attribute 1B.)

Note 1. The default setting for the motor's rated current depends on the Inverter model.
Example: 1.90A (0013 hex) for 200-V class, 0.4 kW
Note 2. The figures enclosed in parentheses in the “Setting range” and “Default” columns are the
values for 400-V class Inverters.

10-2-9 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex

Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control I/O-related functions. They are
assigned according to their particular control I/O functions, such as forward operation, reverse oper-
ation, error detection, and so on. Be careful when setting up a remote I/O communications connec-
tion. These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I/O, so even if they have been
set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single
05 Reset attribute: Can be sent to Class 29/Instance 01
Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation
inputs and turns ON the Fault Reset. Then turns OFF the Fault
Reset when Inverter Ready is output.

10-14
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 29 soft- --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision ware revisions. The revi-
sion value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Forward/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Forward operation
04 Reverse/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Reverse operation
05 Net Control 00: Operation set in n003/ 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
Local/remote b1-02.
switch 01: Force DeviceNet oper-
(Set note 1.) ation (not valid with
3G3FV).
06 State 00 hex: Vendor specific --- 03 Yes No Byte
Inverter status 01 hex: Startup
(See note 1.) 02 hex: Not ready
03 hex: Inverter ready
04 hex: Enabled
05 hex: Stopping
06 hex: Fault_Stop
07 hex: Faulted
07 During forward 00: No Inverter output or -- 00 Yes No Byte
run operating in reverse.
01: Forward operation or
DC braking
Turns ON even for DC
braking during reverse
operation.
08 During reverse 00: No Inverter output or -- 00 Yes No Byte
run operating in forward.
01: Operating in reverse
(reverse operation output
status)
Becomes “00" with DC
braking.
09 Inverter Ready 00: Preparing -- 00 Yes No Byte
Initial processing/ not
drive mode/ fault
01: Inverter ready
Inverter can receive run
command.
0A Fault 00: Normal -- 00 Yes No Byte
01: Fault
0B Alarm (minor 00: Normal -- 00 Yes No Byte
fault) 01: Alarm (minor fault)
0C Fault Reset 00: Normal status 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Fault reset
0D Fault code Indicates the contents of --- 0000 Yes No Word
fault that occur. (See the
fault code list on the fol-
lowing page.)
0F Control From 00: Operating by a method --- 00 Yes No Byte
Net other than DeviceNet that
Run signal input is set in n003/b1-02.
status 01: Operating by
(See note 2.) DeviceNet.
10 DeviceNet Fault 00: Stop operation. 3G3MV: 00, 3G3MV: 00 Yes Yes Byte
mode 01: Continue operation. 01 3G3RV: 02
(See note 3.) 02: Maker's specifications 3G3RV: --- 3G3FV: 02
3G3FV: ---

10-15
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 11 Force Fault/Trip 00: Normal operation 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
Communica- 01: Communications
tions external external fault input
fault input
12 Force Status 00: Normal status --- 00 Yes No Byte
Communica- 01: Communications
tions external external fault detected.
fault input status (Inverter stopped with fault
detection.)

Note 1. The following table shows the status of remote I/O output signals and operation indicated by
the content of Attribute 06 (State, i.e., Inverter status).
Setting Status Condition
00 hex Vendor specific A condition other than the ones
below.
01 hex Startup: Preparation not complete (setting con- Inverter Ready signal is OFF.
stants)
02 hex Not ready: Stopped (preparation complete) Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur-
ing Run signal is OFF.
03 hex Inverter ready: Stopped (preparation complete) Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur-
ing Run signal is OFF.
04 hex Enabled: Operating During Run signal (control I/O) is
ON.
05 hex Stopping: Decelerating (Operating with both for- Ctrl. From Net is ON, During Forward
ward and reverse references equal to 0.) Run is OFF, During Reverse Run is
OFF, and During Run is ON.
06 hex Fault_Stop: Operating with fault detected Alarm signal is ON.
07 hex Faulted: Fault detected Fault signal is ON.

Note 2. The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running.
Note 3. A DeviceNet Fault mode can be set from communications in the 3G3MV only; it cannot be
changed from communications in the 3G3RV or 3G3FV. Set the fault mode in the Inverter’s
parameters.

● Fault Codes
DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning
0000 --- Inverter normal
2120 GF Ground fault
2130 SC Short circuit
2200 OL2 Inverter overload
2220 OL1 Motor overload
2221 OL3 Overtorque detection 1
2222 OL4 Overtorque detection 2
2300 OC Overcurrent
3130 PF Input phase loss
LF Output phase loss
3210 OV Main circuit overvoltage
3220 UV1 Undervoltage (main)
3222 UV3 Undervoltage (MC)
4200 OH Overheat

10-16
Appendices Chapter 10

DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning

4210 OH1 Overheat
5110 UV2 Control power supply fault
5120 PUF Fuse open
5300 OPR Operator disconnection
6320 ERR EEPROM write failure
7110 RR Braking transistor failure
7112 RH Braking resistor overheating
7301 PGO PG is disconnected
7310 OS Overspeed
DEV Speed deviation
7500 BUS Communications error
9000 EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
EF5 External fault (Terminal 5)
EF6 External fault (Terminal 6)
EF7 External fault (Terminal 7)
EF8 External fault (Terminal 8)
FF0 Communications external fault

10-2-10AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex

AC/DC drive objects are assigned to command-related functions for drive devices such as Inverters
and Servomotors. Command-related data reading and writing, monitor data reading, set data scale
changes, and so on, are all enabled. These functions are shared with similar functions used for
remote I/O, so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I/
O.

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 2A software --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision revisions. The revision
value is advanced when-
ever there is a change.
01 03 At Reference 00: Stopped, accelerating --- 00 Yes No Byte
or decelerating
01: At reference
04 Net Reference 00: Operate with setting in 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
(See note 1.) n004/b1-01.
01: Force DeviceNet opera-
tion (not valid in 3G3FV).

10-17
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 06 Drive Mode Set to parameter n002/A1- 00 to 03 3G3MV: Yes Yes Byte
02. Some Inverters do not 01
support the setting. 3G3RV:
00: Open loop vector 01
([n002/A1-02] = 2) 3G3FV:
01: V/f control ([n002/A1- 00
02] = 0)
02: V/f control with PG (A1-
02 = 1)
03: Flux vector control (A1-
02 = 3)
After changing the setting,
the power must be turned
OFF and then ON again to
enable the new setting.
07 Speed Actual The output frequency moni- --- 0000 Yes No Word
Rotational tor (U-02/U1-02) can be
Speed Monitor monitored in hexadecimal
(See notes 2 with the minimum unit as 1.
and 4.) The frequency monitor’s
minimum unit can be set by
the frequency reference
setting and display units in
n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set values.
When r/min units are being
used, a multiplier can be set
in attribute 16 (the Speed
Scale setting).
08 Speed Refer- Can be set and read in 0 to max. fre- 0000 Yes Yes Word
ence hexadecimal with the fre- quency
Rotational quency reference minimum
Speed Refer- unit as 1.
ence The frequency reference
(See notes 2 minimum unit can be set by
and 4.) the frequency reference
setting and display units in
n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set values.
When r/min units are being
used, a multiplier can be set
in attribute 16 (the Speed
Scale setting).
09 Current Actual Can be referenced in hexa- --- 0000 Yes No Word
decimal with the output cur-
rent monitor U-03/U1-03
minimum unit as 0.1 A.
Setting the attribute 17 cur-
rent scale enables a multi-
plication factor to be set.

10-18
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 0F Power Actual Can be referenced in hexa- --- 0000 Yes No Word
decimal with the output
power monitor U-11/U1-08
minimum unit as 1 W.
Setting the attribute 1A
power scale enables a mul-
tiplication factor to be set.
10 Input Voltage Can be referenced in hexa- --- 0000 Yes No Word
decimal with the input volt-
age setting (200 or 400/E1-
01) minimum unit as 1 V.
Setting the attribute 1B volt-
age scale enables a multi-
plication factor to be set.
11 Output Voltage Can be referenced in hexa- --- 0000 Yes No Word
decimal with the output volt-
age monitor U-04/U1-06
minimum unit as 1 V.
Setting the attribute 1B volt-
age scale enables a multi-
plication factor to be set.
12 Accel Time Can be set and read in 0.0 to 6,000.0 2710 hex Yes Yes Word
hexadecimal with the accel- (0.00 to (10.0 s)
13 Decel Time eration time 1 n019/C1-01 600.00 2710 hex Yes Yes Word
and deceleration time 1 (10.0 s)
n020/C1-02 minimum unit
as 1 ms.
Depending on the accelera-
tion/ deceleration time unit
n018/C1-10 setting, num-
bers below 100 ms or 10
ms are truncated.
Setting the attribute 1C time
scale enables a multiplica-
tion factor to be set.
14 Low Speed Limit Can be set and read in 0 to 109% of 0000 Yes Yes Word
(See notes 2, 3, hexadecimal with the fre- maximum fre-
and 4.) quency reference lower limit quency
15 High Speed n034/d2-02 and the fre- 0 to 110% of 0708 hex Yes Yes Word
Limit quency reference upper maximum fre- (1,800 r/
(See notes 2, 3, limit n033/d2-01 minimum quency min)
and 4.) unit as 1 ms.
The minimum unit can be
set by the frequency refer-
ence setting and display
units in n035/o1-03.
n035/o1-03 = 0: 0.01 Hz
n035/o1-03 = 1: 0.01%
(100%: Max. frequency.)
n035/o1-03 = 2 to 39:
1 r/min
n035/o1-03 = 40 to 3,999:
Follow individual set values.
When r/min units are being
used, a multiplier can be set
in attribute 16 (the Speed
Scale setting).
16 Speed scale Speed data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
speed data unit value is cal-
culated as follows:
Unit = 1 [r/min] x 1/2a
a: Speed scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.

10-19
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 17 Current scale Current data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
current data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 0.1 [A] x 1/2b
b: Current scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1A Power scale Power data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
power data unit value is cal-
culated as follows:
Unit = 1 [W] x 1/2c
c: Power scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1B Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
voltage data unit value is
calculated as follows:
Unit = 1 [V] x 1/2d
d: Voltage scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1C Time scale Time data unit selection −15 to 15 (F1 00 Yes Yes Byte
can be set and read. The to 0F hex)
time data unit value is cal-
culated as follows:
Unit = 1 [ms] x 1/2e
e: Voltage scale set value
Set a negative value as its
2's complement.
1D Reference From 00: Reference other than --- 00 Yes No Byte
Net DeviceNet (n004/b1-01)
01: Operating with
DeviceNet.
64 Electric power Average power value (W) --- 0000 Yes No Long
0000
65 Electric power Power value measurement 00 to 02 00 Yes Yes Byte
time scale period (T) (reflected when
power is turned ON)
00: 10 minutes
01: 30 minutes
02: 60 minutes
6F Specific alarm Alarm code of the alarm or --- 0000 Yes No Word
minor fault detected in the
Inverter. For more details,
refer to 8-5 Inverter Alarms.
70 Specific error Fault code of the fault --- 00 Yes No Byte
detected in the Inverter. For
more details, refer to 8-4
Inverter Faults.

Note 1. The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running.
Note 2. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is always r/min. The number
of motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter n035/o1-03 (frequency reference setting
and display units) when using DeviceNet (open network). After changing the unit setting,
turn the power OFF and then ON again.
Note 3. Cannot be changed during running.

10-20
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 4. If a frequency reference value has been already set and the frequency display unit is
changed via the network, a frequency reference value higher than expected may result after
unit conversion. After changing the frequency display unit, always check the frequency ref-
erence value before starting an operation.

● Communications Data Setting Examples

Example 1: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
conditions set.
Number of poles set in n035/o1-03: 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 0
• Converting frequency to rotational speed:
Frequency x 120 / number of poles = 60 x 120/4 = 1,800 r/min
• Converting rotational speed to minimum unit:
Rotational speed / unit = 1,800 / (1 r/min x 1/20) = 1,800
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 1,800 (decimal) = 0708 (hex)
Example 2: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
condition set.
Frequency setting in n035/o1-03: 0 (Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol.)
• Converting frequency to minimum setting unit:
Frequency / minimum unit = 60 / 0.01 = 6,000
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 6,000 (decimal) = 1770 (hex)
Example 3: Finding the communications data for setting a one-minute acceleration time with the fol-
lowing condition set.
Time scale (attribute 1C): −3 (FD hex)
• Matching the acceleration time unit: 1 minute = 60 seconds = 60,000 ms
• Converting acceleration time to minimum unit:
Acceleration time / unit = 60,000 / (1 ms x 1/2−3) = 7,500
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 7,500 (decimal) = 1D4C (hex)

● Communications Data Reference Example

In this example, the hexadecimal value 0BB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the
following conditions set.
Number of poles set in n035/o1-03: 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 1
• Converting communications data to decimal: 0BB8 (hex) = 3,000 (decimal)
• Converting from minimum unit to r/min:
Communications data x unit = 3,000 x (1 r/min x 1/21) = 1,500 (r/min)

10-21
Appendices Chapter 10
10-2-11Unit Parameter Objects: Class 94 Hex

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 64 Default connec- Select one of the six con- 00 to 05 01 Yes Yes Byte
tion path nection paths:
00: Basic remote I/O
01: Standard remote I/O
02: Special remote I/O
03: Control I/O remote I/O
04: Control I/O remote I/O
+ Unit status
05: Control I/O remote I/O
+ Multi-function input
monitor

10-2-12Unit Manager Object: Class 95 Hex

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single
16 (Save) Writes all of the connected device present values to EEPROM.

10-22
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates the class 95 --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision software revision. The
revision value is increased
whenever there is a
change.
01 65 General status Status information --- --- Yes No Word
71 Present Unit Present value of the Unit’s --- --- Yes No Word
conduction time total ON time
72 Unit conduction Reports the result of the --- --- Yes No Word
time monitor flag comparison between the
Unit’s time monitor value
and the present value.
73 Unit conduction Sets the Unit’s conduction --- --- Yes Yes Word
time monitor set- time monitor value.
ting
75 Lifetime data Saves the current status --- --- Save No Word
write of the Communications
Unit to EEPROM immedi-
ately. The same proce-
dure is automatically run
every 6 min.
7C Detail Info 1 Reads the Operating Time --- 0001 00 Yes No Array
Exceeded Flags.
First two bytes:
Number of bytes in the
rest of the array = 0001
Data byte:
Bit 0: Fan operating time
exceeded
Bit 1: Electrolytic capacitor
operating time exceeded
(The corresponding flag is
set to “1” when the operat-
ing time is exceeded.)
7D Detail Info 2 Reads the Warning --- 0001 00 Yes No Array
Torque Monitor Flags.
First two bytes:
Number of bytes in the
rest of the array = 0001
Data byte:
Bit 0: Warning torque dur-
ing acceleration/decelera-
tion
Bit 1: Warning torque dur-
ing frequency coincidence
(The corresponding flag is
set to “1” when the warn-
ing torque is detected.)

10-23
Appendices Chapter 10
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
01 7E Detail Info 3 Reads the Operating Time --- 0001 00 Yes No Array
Monitor Flags.
First two bytes:
Number of bytes in the
rest of the array = 0001
Data byte:
Bit 0: Instance 01
Bit 1: Instance 02
Bit 2: Instance 03
Bit 3: Instance 04
Bit 4: Instance 05
Bit 5: Instance 06
(A flag will be set to “1”
when Class 97 Attribute
66 for the corresponding
Instance equals “01”.
7F Detail Info 4 Reads the Lifetime Moni- --- 0003 00 Yes No Array
tor Flags. 00 00
First two bytes:
Number of bytes in the
rest of the array = 0003
Data byte 1: Input Termi-
nal Lifetime Flags
Bit 0: Instance 01
Bit 1: Instance 02
Bit 2: Instance 03
Bit 3: Instance 04
Bit 4: Instance 05
Bit 5: Instance 06
(A flag will be set to “1”
when Class 08 Attribute
67 for the corresponding
Instance equals “01”.
Data byte 2: Reserved
(00)
Data byte 3: Output Termi-
nal Lifetime Flags
Bit 0: Instance 01
Bit 1: Instance 02
Bit 2: Instance 03
(A flag will be set to “1”
when Class 09 Attribute
67 for the corresponding
Instance equals “01”.

Writing performed once every six minutes is taken care by the EM.

10-2-13Equipment Manager Object: Class 97 Hex

■ Support Service Code

Service code number (hex) Service
05 (Reset) Returns the Attribute’s data to initial values.
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single

10-24
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates the class 97 --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision software revision. The
revision value is increased
whenever there is a
change.
01 to 06 65 OUTPUT Output response time --- 0000 Yes No Word
(See Response Time (ms)
note 1.) 66 Response Time Reports the result of the --- 00 Yes Reset Byte
exceed comparison between the
monitor value and the
measured value. (ON
when output response
time > monitor value.)
00: OFF, 01: ON
67 OUT response Sets the output response 0000 to FFFF 0000 Yes Yes Word
monitor setting time monitor value (ms)
68 Response peak Peak value of the output --- 0000 Yes Reset Word
value response time (ms)

● Operating Time Measurements (Measurement Patterns) of Instances 01 to 06

Instance Operating time measurement triggers Remarks
Measurement start condition Measurement
stop condition
Instance 01 Multi-function contact output = ON Input 4 = ON Output → Input
(See note 2.)
Instance 02 Multi-function output 1 = ON Input 5 = ON Output → Input
(See note 2.)
Instance 03 Input 2 = ON Input 3 = ON Input → Input
Instance 04 Input 4 = ON Input 5 = ON Input → Input
Instance 05 Input 0 = ON, input 1 = ON, or a run com- Input 4 = ON Forward or Reverse run
mand is sent from the network command → Input
Instance 06 Input 0 = ON, input 1 = ON, or a run com- Input 5 = ON Forward or Reverse run
mand was sent from the network command → Input

Note 1. The following table shows the meaning of “Input @” in a start or stop condition. When using
the control I/O remote I/O function, the input bit will be turned ON not only when the termi-
nal’s signal is ON, but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I/O. (The
terminal’s ON/OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I/
O.)
Name Meaning
3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV
Input 0 Status of terminal S1 Status of terminal S1 (Forward/ Status of terminal 1 (For-
(multi-function input 1) Stop) ward/Stop)
Input 1 Status of terminal S2 Status of terminal S2 (Reverse/ Status of terminal 2
(multi-function input 2) Stop) (Reverse/Stop)
Input 2 Status of terminal S3 Status of terminal S3 (multi- Status of terminal 3 (multi-
(multi-function input 3) function input 1 selection) function contact input 1)
Input 3 Status of terminal S4 Status of terminal S4 (multi- Status of terminal 4 (multi-
(multi-function input 4) function input 2 selection) function contact input 2)

10-25
Appendices Chapter 10
Name Meaning
3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV
Input 4 Status of terminal S5 Status of terminal S5 (multi- Status of terminal 5 (multi-
(multi-function input 5) function input 3 selection) function contact input 3)
Input 5 Status of terminal S6 Status of terminal S6 (multi- Status of terminal 6 (multi-
(multi-function input 6) function input 4 selection) function contact input 4)

Note 2. Instances 01 and 02 will be enabled when using the control I/O remote I/O function and the
following parameter settings have been made.
• 3G3MV:
Set a value of 18 (communications output) in parameters n057 and n058 (function selection for
multi-function outputs 1 and 2).
• 3G3RV/3G3FV:
Set a value of F (not used) in parameters H2-01 and H2-02 (function selection for the multi-function
contact output and multi-function output 1).
When these settings are made, the Inverter’s control terminal outputs can be controlled from commu-
nications and those signals can be used as measurement start triggers.

10-26
Appendices Chapter 10

10-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time

This section describes communications response time when OMRON Master and Slave Units are
being used. Use this section for reference when planning I/O timing. The equations provided here
are valid under the following conditions:
• The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled.
• All of the required Slaves are participating in communications.
• No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit
• Messages are not being produced in the network (from another company's configurator, for exam-
ple).

■ Communications Cycle Time

● One Master in Network

The following equations show the communications cycle time (TRM) when there is only one Master
in the network. If the calculation result is less than 2 ms, the communications cycle time (TRM) will
be considered as 2 ms.
TRM = Σ Communications time for 1 Slave
+ High-density Unit processing time
+ Explicit message processing time
+ COS/Cyclic connection communications time
+ 0.01 × N + 1.0 (ms)

Note N = Number of Slaves.

Communications Time for 1 Slave

This is the time required for 1 Slave to perform communications. “Σ Communications time for 1 Slave”
in the above equation represents the sum of the communications times for each Slave in the network.
The equations used to calculate the communications time (TRS) for different types of Slave are given
below.
Output Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Output
TRT = 0.016 × TB × SOUT1 + 0.11 × TB + 0.07 (ms)
SOUT1: The number of Output Slave output words
TB: The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Input Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Input
TRT = 0.016 × TB × SIN1 + 0.06 × TB + 0.05 (ms)
SIN1: The number of Input Slave input words
TB: The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)

10-27
Appendices Chapter 10
Mixed I/O Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Both Input and Output
TRT = 0.016 × TB × (SOUT2 +SIN2) + 0.11 × TB + 0.07 (ms)
SOUT2: The number of Mixed I/O Slave output words
SIN2: The number of Mixed I/O Slave input words
TB: The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Slaves with More than 8 Bytes of Input or Output (or Both)
TRT = TOH × TBYTE-IN × BIN × TBYTE-OUT × BOUT (ms)
TOH: Protocol overhead
TBYTE-IN: Input byte transmission time
BIN: Number of input bytes
TBYTE-OUT: Output byte transmission time
BOUT: Number of output bytes
Baud rate TOH TBYTE-IN TBYTE-OUT
500 kbps 0.306 ms 0.040 ms 0.036 ms
250 kbps 0.542 ms 0.073 ms 0.069 ms
125 kbps 1.014 ms 0.139 ms 0.135 ms

Note Calculate with BOUT = 0 for Slaves with inputs only and BIN = 0 for Slaves with outputs only.

High-density Unit Processing Time

Add 3.5 ms if there is at least 1 Slave with more than 8 bytes of input or output (or both).

Explicit Message Processing Time

Add the following explicit message processing time when performing explicit message communica-
tions (sending or receiving).
Explicit message processing time = 0.11 × TB × n (ms)
n: The number of explicit messages that are sent or received within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit
TB: The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)

COS/Cyclic Connection Communications Time

Add the following COS/cyclic connection communications time.
COS/cyclic connection communications time = (0.05 + 0.008 × S) × TB × n (ms)
S: The total number of input and output bytes for COS/cycle connections
TB: The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
n: The number of nodes for which COS/cyclic connections occur within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit

● More than One Master in Network

Calculate the communications cycle time according to the above equation for the Slaves of each
Master Unit. The communications cycle time for the entire network is the sum of communications
cycle times for each Master Unit.

10-28
Appendices Chapter 10
■ I/O Response Time of Inverter
The following shows processing time between the Inverter and the DeviceNet Communications Unit/
Card.
• DP-RAM processing time between the Inverter and DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card: 8 ms in
the 3G3MV and 5ms in the 3G3RV/3G3FV.
• Inverter input scanning: 5 ms (read twice)
• Inverter output scanning: 5 ms
• Inverter parameters scanning: 20 ms

● Inverter I/O Response Time

Ladder program cycle time

Communications cycle time

DP-RAM processing time: 8 ms (or 5 ms)

Inverter I/O scanning 15 ms 5 ms

Inverter internal processing

Maximum input response Maximum output response

Note 1. The internal processing time varies depending on the controls to be executed.
Note 2. Input scanning for parameter reading or writing requires 20 ms.

10-29
Appendices Chapter 10

10-4 3G3MV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes

10-4-1 Inputting Control/Frequency

The Inverter's various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table. For
example, to set the frequency reference and begin operation, first set the reference value to the fre-
quency reference register “0002,” and then write the run command to the Inverter's run command
register “0001."
Note 1. Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation.
Note 2. The following registers are in RAM, so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter's power
supply is turned OFF.
Note 3. When the remote I/O function is being used, the run command and frequency reference are
overwritten at regular intervals.
Class 64 Register Function Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
--- --- 0000 Not used. ---
00 01 0001 Run command Refer to the following Run Commands table.
00 02 0002 Frequency reference Frequency reference value setting (units as
specified in n035)
00 03 0003 V/f gain Make settings with 1000 decimal as 100%.
(See note 1.)
Setting range: 2.0 to 200.0% (20 to 2000
decimal)
--- --- 0004 to 0008 Not used. ---
00 09 0009 Inverter output Refer to following Inverter Outputs table.
--- --- 000A to 000F Not used. ---

Note 1. The V/f gain is the setting for the percentage of the V/f calculation result with respect to the
output voltage. A setting of 1000 decimal (03E8 hex) corresponds to a multiplication factor
of 1.
Note 2. When these registers are read, the values set in communications will be read. For example,
when an operation command (register number 0001) is read, the control input previously set
in communications will be returned. It is not a monitor for the actual terminal block input sig-
nals.

● Run Commands: Register Number 0001 Hex

Bit Content
0 Forward/stop (1: forward operation)
1 Reverse/stop (1: reverse operation)
2 Multi-function input 3 (set with n052)
3 Multi-function input 4 (set with n053)
4 Multi-function input 5 (set with n054)
5 Multi-function input 6 (set with n055)
6 Multi-function input 7 (set with n056)

10-30
Appendices Chapter 10

Bit Content
7 Not used.
8 External fault input (1: EFO)
9 Fault reset (1: reset)
10 to 15 Not used.

● Inverter Outputs: Register Number 0009 Hex

Bit Content
0 Multi-function contact output (1: ON)
1 Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)
2 Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)
3 to 15 Not used.

Note Valid when “18" (communications output) is set for multiple-function outputs 1 to 3 (n057 to
n059). By performing this setting, the relevant output terminal can be turned ON and OFF
through communications.

10-4-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions

All Inverter monitoring can be accessed. To read Inverter status, fault monitoring, alarm monitoring, I/
O status monitoring, error log, etc., specify the register number from the following table and read the
data.
Class 64 Register Function Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 20 0020 Status signal Refer to the following Status Signals table.
00 21 0021 Fault status Refer to the following Fault Status table.
00 22 0022 Data link status Refer to the following Data Link Status table.
00 23 0023 Frequency reference Follows setting for n035.
00 24 0024 Output frequency Follows setting for n035.
00 --- 0025 to 0027 Not used. ---
00 28 0028 Output voltage Read with 1 (V) = 1 decimal
00 29 0029 Fault status 2 Refer to the following Fault Status 2 table
00 2A 002A Warning status Refer to the following Warning Status table
00 2B 002B Input terminal status Refer to the following Input Terminal Status
table.
00 2C 002C Inverter status Refer to the following Inverter Status table.
00 2D 002D Output terminal status Refer to the following Output Terminal Status
table.
00 2E 002E Inverter status 2 Refer to the following Inverter Status 2 table
00 --- 002F to 0030 Not used. ---
00 31 0031 Main circuit DC voltage Read with 1 (V) = 1 decimal
00 32 0032 Torque reference Read with 1 (%) = 1 decimal
Rated motor torque = 100%.
Read with +/−.
00 --- 0033 to 0034 Not used. ---

10-31
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Function Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 35 0035 Accumulated operating Read with 1 (h) = 1 decimal
time
00 36 0036 Not used. ---
00 37 0037 Output power Read with 1 (W) = 100 decimal
Read with +/−.
00 38 0038 PID feedback Read with 1 (%) = 10 decimal
Maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
00 39 0039 PID input Read with 1 (%) = 10 decimal
Maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
Read with +/−.
00 3A 003A PID output Read with 1 (%) = 10 decimal
Maximum frequency corresponds to 100%.
Read with +/−.
00 3B 003B Output current Read with 1 (A) = 10 decimal Read with +/−
00 3C 003C Not used. ---
00 3D 003D Communications error Refer to the following Communications Error
content Content table.
00 --- 003E to 00FF Not used. ---

● Status Signals: Register Number 0020 Hex

Bit Content
0 During Run (1: During Run)
1 Forward/reverse operation (1: reverse operation)
2 Inverter ready (1: ready)
3 Fault (1: fault)
4 Data setting error (1: error)
5 Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)
6 Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)
7 Multi-function output 3 (1: ON)
8 to 15 Not used.

● Fault Status: Register Number 0021 Hex

Bit Content
0 OC
1 OV
2 OL2
3 OH
4 Not used.
5 Not used.
6 FBL
7 EF@, STP
8 F@
9 OL1
10 OL3

10-32
Appendices Chapter 10

Bit Content
11 Not used.
12 UV1
13 UV2
14 CE
15 OPR

Note If an error is generated, the relevant bit will become 1.

● Data Link Status: Register Number 0022 Hex

Bit Content
0 During data write (1: during write)
1 to 2 Not used.
3 Upper/lower limit error (1: error): setting range exceeded
4 Integration error (1: error): same as OPE@
5 to 15 Not used.

● Fault Status 2: Register Number 0029 Hex

Bit Content
0 SC
1 GF
2 PF
3 LF
4 to 15 Not used.

● Warning Status: Register Number 002A Hex

Bit Content
0 STP (Operator stop)
1 SER
2 EF
3 BB
4 OL3
5 OH
6 OV
7 UV
8 FAN
9 CE
10 BUS
11 Not used.
12 OH3
13 FBL
14 STP (Emergency stop)
15 Not used.

10-33
Appendices Chapter 10
● Input Terminal Status: Register Number 002B Hex
Bit Content
0 Multi-function input 1 terminal S1 (1: ON)
1 Multi-function input 2 terminal S2 (1: ON)
2 Multi-function input 3 terminal S3 (1: ON)
3 Multi-function input 4 terminal S4 (1: ON)
4 Multi-function input 5 terminal S5 (1: ON)
5 Multi-function input 6 terminal S6 (1: ON)
6 Multi-function input 7 terminal S7 (1: ON)
7 to 15 Not used.

● Inverter Status: Register Number 002C Hex

Bit Content
0 During Run (1: During Run)
1 Zero speed (1: zero speed)
2 Frequency agree (1: frequency agree)
3 Warning (minor fault) (1: alarm)
4 Frequency detection 1 (1: output frequency ≤ n095)
5 Frequency detection 2 (1: output frequency ≥ n095)
6 Inverter ready (1: ready)
7 UV (1: UV)
8 Baseblock (1: during baseblock)
9 Frequency reference mode (1: not communications)
10 RUN command mode (1: not communications)
11 Overtorque detection (1: over torque detection)
12 Not used.
13 Fault retry (1: fault retry)
14 Fault (1: fault)
15 Communications timeover: over 2 s without normal communications
(1: communications timeover detected)

● Output Terminal Status: Register Number 002D Hex

Bit Content
0 Multi-function contact output terminal MA (1: ON)
1 Multi-function photocoupler output 1 terminal P1 (1: ON)
2 Multi-function photocoupler output 2 terminal P2 (1: ON)
3 to 15 Not used.

● Inverter Status 2: Register Number 002E Hex

Bit Content
0 Frequency reference loss (1: loss)
1 to 15 Not used.

10-34
Appendices Chapter 10
● Communications Error Content: Register Number 003D Hex
Bit Content
0 CRC error (1: error)
1 Incorrect data length (1: error)
2 Not used.
3 Parity error (1: error)
4 Overrun error (1: error)
5 Framing error (1: error)
6 Communications timeover (1: error)
7 to 15 Not used.

10-4-3 Parameter Reading and Writing

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter parameter classes, instances and
attributes, and the corresponding register numbers. Write and read the various parameters with “1"
as the minimum setting unit. Negative numbers are expressed as two's complements. When param-
eters are written, the settings for parameters that can be written during operation become valid after
the being set in RAM, whereas the settings for parameters that cannot be written during operation,
become valid from the next operation. Send an enter command to save the set data in EEPROM.

Note The 2 register numbers that are different from RS-422/485 communications are indicated by
shading (refer to page 10-39).

■ Function Group 1 (n001 to n049)

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
n001 0101 01 01 Parameter write-prohibit selection/ 0 to 9 1 1 No
parameter initialization
n002 0102 01 02 Control mode selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n003 0103 01 03 Run command selection 0 to 3 1 0 No
n004 0104 01 04 Frequency reference selection 0 to 9 1 0 No
n005 0105 01 05 Stopping method selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n006 0106 01 06 Reverse rotation-prohibit selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n007 0107 01 07 STOP Key function selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n008 0108 01 08 Frequency reference selection in local 0, 1 1 0 No
mode
n009 0109 01 09 Operator frequency setting method 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
n010 010A 01 0A Operation selection at Digital Operator 0, 1 1 0 No
interruption
n011 010B 01 0B Maximum frequency (FMAX) 50.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
n012 010C 01 0C Maximum voltage (VMAX) 0.1 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 [400.0]
[0.1 to
510.0]

Note [ ] values indicate those for 400-V-class Inverters.

10-35
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
n013 010D 01 0D Maximum voltage frequency (FA) 0.2 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
n014 010E 01 0E Middle output frequency (FB) 0.1 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 No
399.9
n015 010F 01 0F Middle output frequency voltage (VC) 0.1 to 0.1 V 12.0 No
255.0 [24.0]
[0.1 to
510.0]
n016 0110 01 10 Minimum output frequency (FMIN) 0.1 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 No
10.0
n017 0111 01 11 Minimum output frequency voltage 0.1 to 0.1 V 12.0 No
(VMIN) 50.0 [24.0]
[0.1 to
100.0]
n018 0112 01 12 Acceleration/Deceleration time setting 0, 1 1 0 No
unit
n019 0113 01 13 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s (set 10.0 Yes
n020 0114 01 14 Deceleration time 1 6000 with 10.0 Yes
n018)
n021 0115 01 15 Acceleration time 2 10.0 Yes
n022 0116 01 16 Deceleration time 2 10.0 Yes
n023 0117 01 17 S-shape acceleration/deceleration 0 to 3 1 0 No
characteristic
n024 0118 01 18 Frequency reference 1 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 6.00 Yes
maxi- (set with
n025 0119 01 19 Frequency reference 2 mum fre- n035) 0.00 Yes
n026 011A 01 1A Frequency reference 3 quency 0.00 Yes
n027 011B 01 1B Frequency reference 4 0.00 Yes
n028 011C 01 1C Frequency reference 5 0.00 Yes
n029 011D 01 1D Frequency reference 6 0.00 Yes
n030 011E 01 1E Frequency reference 7 0.00 Yes
n031 011F 01 1F Frequency reference 8 0.00 Yes
n032 0120 01 20 Inching frequency command 6.00 Yes
n033 0121 01 21 Upper frequency reference limit 0 to 110 1% 100 No
n034 0122 01 22 Lower frequency reference limit 0 to 110 1% 0 No
n035 0123 01 23 Frequency reference setting/display 0 to 3999 1 0 No
unit selection
n036 0124 01 24 Rated motor current 0 to 0.1 A Differs No
150% of with
the rated capacity
output
current
n037 0125 01 25 Motor protection characteristics 0 to 2 1 0 No
n038 0126 01 26 Motor protective time setting 1 to 60 1 min 8 No
n039 0127 01 27 Cooling fan operation 0, 1 1 0 No
n040 0128 01 28 Motor rotation direction selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n041 0129 01 29 Acceleration time 3 0.0 to 0.1 s (set 10.0 Yes
n042 012A 01 2A Deceleration time 3 6000 with 10.0 Yes
n018)
n043 012B 01 2B Acceleration time 4 10.0 Yes
n044 012C 01 2C Deceleration time 4 10.0 Yes
n045 to --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n049

Note [ ] values indicate those for 400-V-class Inverters.

10-36
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Function Group 2 (n050 to n079)
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
n050 0132 01 32 Multi-function input 1 (terminal S1) 1 to 27 1 1 No
n051 0133 01 33 Multi-function input 2 (terminal S2) 1 to 27 1 2 No
n052 0134 01 34 Multi-function input 3 (terminal S3) 0 to 27 1 3 No
n053 0135 01 35 Multi-function input 4 (terminal S4) 1 to 27 1 5 No
n054 0136 01 36 Multi-function input 5 (terminal S5) 1 to 27 1 6 No
n055 0137 01 37 Multi-function input 6 (terminal S6) 1 to 27 1 7 No
n056 0138 01 38 Multi-function input 7 (terminal S7) 1 to 27, 1 10 No
34, 35
n057 0139 01 39 Multi-function input 1 (MA/MB-MC) 0 to 21 1 0 No
n058 013A 01 3A Multi-function input 2 (P1-PC) 0 to 21 1 1 No
n059 013B 01 3B Multi-function input 3 (P2-PC) 0 to 21 1 2 No
n060 013C 01 3C Frequency reference gain 0 to 255 1% 100 Yes
n061 013D 01 3D Frequency reference bias −100 to 1% 0 Yes
100
n062 013E 01 3E Analog frequency reference filter time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 Yes
constant 2.00
n063 --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n064 0140 01 40 Frequency reference loss detection 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
n065 0141 01 41 Multi-function analog output type selec- 0, 1 1 0 No
tion
n066 0142 01 42 Multi-function analog output 0 to 6 1 0 No
n067 0143 01 43 Multi-function analog output gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.00
n068 0144 01 44 Multi-function analog voltage input gain −255 to 1% 100 Yes
255
n069 0145 01 45 Multi-function analog voltage input bias −100 to 1% 0 Yes
100
n070 0146 01 46 Multi-function analog voltage input filter 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 Yes
constant 2.00
n071 0147 01 47 Multi-function analog current input gain −255 to 1% 100 Yes
255
n072 0148 01 48 Multi-function analog current input bias −100 to 1% 0 Yes
100
n073 0149 01 49 Multi-function analog current input fil- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 Yes
ter constant 2.00
n074 014A 01 4A Pulse train frequency reference gain −255 to 1% 100 Yes
255
n075 014B 01 4B Pulse train frequency reference bias −100 to 1% 0 Yes
100
n076 014C 01 4C Pulse train frequency reference input 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 Yes
filter constant 2.00
n077 014D 01 4D Multi-function analog input terminal 0 to 4 1 0 No
function selection
n078 014E 01 4E Multi-function analog input terminal 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
n079 014F 01 4F Multi-function analog input frequency 0 to 50 1% 10 No
bias

10-37
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Function Group 3 (n080 to n119)
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
n080 0150 01 50 Carrier frequency selection 1 to 4, 7 1 Differs No
to 9 with
capacity.
n081 0151 01 51 Momentary power interruption com- 0 to 2 1 0 No
pensation
n082 0152 01 52 Number of fault retries 0 to 10 1 0 No
n083 0153 01 53 Jump frequency 1 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 No
400.0
n084 0154 01 54 Jump frequency 2 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 No
400.0
n085 0155 01 55 Jump frequency 3 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 No
400.0
n086 0156 01 56 Jump width 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 No
25.50
n087 0157 01 57 Cumulative operation time selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n088 0158 01 58 Cumulative operation time 0 to 6550 1 0 No
(10 h)
n089 0159 01 59 DC injection braking current 0 to 100 1% 50 No
n090 015A 01 5A DC injection braking-to-stop time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.5 No
25.5
n091 015B 01 5B Startup DC injection braking time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
25.5
n092 015C 01 5C Stall prevention during deceleration 0, 1 1 0 No
n093 015D 01 5D Stall prevention level during accelera- 30 to 200 1% 170 No
tion
n094 015E 01 5E Stall prevention level during operation 30 to 200 1% 160 No
n095 015F 01 5F Frequency detection level 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 No
400.0
n096 0160 01 60 Overtorque detection function selection 0 to 4 1 0 No
1
n097 0161 01 61 Overtorque detection function selection 0, 1 1 0 No
2
n098 0162 01 62 Overtorque detection level 30 to 200 1% 160 No
n099 0163 01 63 Overtorque detection time 0.1 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0
n100 0164 01 64 UP/DOWN frequency selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n101 0165 01 65 Speed search deceleration time 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
10.0
n102 0166 01 66 Speed search level 0 to 200 1% 150 No
n103 0167 01 67 Torque compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 1.0 Yes
n104 0168 01 68 Torque compensation primary delay 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.3 No
time constant 25.5
n105 0169 01 69 Torque compensation core loss 0.0 to 0.1 W Differs No
6550 with
capacity.
n106 016A 01 6A Rated motor slip 0.0 to 0.1 Hz Differs Yes
20.0 with
capacity.
n107 016B 01 6B Motor phase-to-neutral resistance 0.000 to 0.001 Ω Differs No
65.50 with
capacity.

10-38
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
n108 016C 01 6C Motor leakage inductance 0.00 to 0.01 mH Differs No
655.0 with
capacity.
n109 016D 01 6D Torque compensation limit 0 to 250 1% 150 No
n110 016E 01 6E Motor no-load current 0 to 99 1% Differs No
with
capacity.
n111 016F 01 6F Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 Yes
n112 0170 01 70 Slip compensation primary delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
25.5
n113 0171 01 71 Slip compensation during regeneration 0, 1 1 0 No
n114 --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n115 0173 01 73 Stall prevention level automatic sup- 0, 1 1 0 No
pression selection
n116 0174 01 74 Stall prevention acceleration/decelera- 0, 1 1 0 No
tion time setting
n117 0175 01 75 Low torque detection selection 0 to 4 1 0 No
n118 0176 01 76 Low torque detection level 0 to 200 1% 10 No
n119 0177 01 77 Low torque detection time 0.1 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0

■ Function Group 4 (n120 to n179)

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
n120 0178 01 78 Frequency reference 9 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 Yes
n121 0179 01 79 Frequency reference 10 maxi- (set with 0.00 Yes
mum fre- n035)
n122 017A 01 7A Frequency reference 11 quency 0.00 Yes
n123 017B 01 7B Frequency reference 12 0.00 Yes
n124 017C 01 7C Frequency reference 13 0.00 Yes
n125 017D 01 7D Frequency reference 14 0.00 Yes
n126 017E 01 7E Frequency reference 15 0.00 Yes
n127 017F 01 7F Frequency reference 16 0.00 Yes
n128 01D3 01 D3 PID control selection 0 to 8 1 0 No
n129 01D4 01 D4 Feedback value adjustment gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
10.00
n130 0182 01 82 Proportional gain (P) 0.0 to 0.1 1.0 Yes
25.0
n131 0183 01 83 Integral time (I) 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
360.0
n132 0184 01 84 Derivative time (D) 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
2.50
n133 0185 01 85 PID offset adjustment −100 to 1% 0 Yes
100
n134 0186 01 86 Integral (I) upper limit 0 to 100 1% 100 Yes
n135 0187 01 87 PID primary delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 Yes
10.0
n136 0188 01 88 Feedback loss detection selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
n137 0189 01 89 Feedback loss detection level 0 to 100 1% 0 No

10-39
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
n138 018A 01 8A Feedback loss detection time 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 No
25.5
n139 018B 01 8B Energy-saving control selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n140 018C 01 8C Energy-saving control coefficient K2 0.0 to 0.1 Differs No
6550 with
capacity.
n141 018D 01 8D Energy-saving voltage lower limit at 60- 0 to 120 1% 50 No
Hz output
n142 018E 01 8E Energy-saving voltage lower limit at 6- 0 to 25 1% 12 No
Hz output
n143 018F 01 8F Power averaging time 1 to 200 1 1 No
(24 ms)
n144 0190 01 90 Probe operation voltage limit 0 to 100 1% 0 No
n145 0191 01 91 Probe operation control voltage step at 0.1 to 0.1% 0.5 No
100% 10.0
n146 0192 01 92 Probe operation control voltage step at 0.1 to 0.1% 0.2 No
5% 10.0
n147 --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n148
n149 0195 01 95 Pulse train input scale 100 to 1 (10 Hz) 2500 No
3300
n150 0196 01 96 Multi-function analog output, pulse train 0, 1, 6, 1 0 No
frequency selection 12, 24,
36, 40 to
45
n151 0197 01 97 RS-422/485 communications time-over 0 to 4 1 0 No
detection selection
n152 0198 01 98 RS-422/485 communications fre- 0 to 3 1 0 No
quency reference/monitor unit selection
n153 0199 01 99 RS-422/485 communications slave 00 to 32 1 00 No
address (read only)
n154 019A 01 9A RS-422/485 baud rate selection (read 0 to 3 1 2 No
only)
n155 019B 01 9B RS-422/485 parity selection (read only) 0 to 2 1 0 No
n156 019C 01 9C RS-422/485 send wait time (read only) 10 to 65 1 ms 10 No
n157 019D 01 9D RS-422/485 RTS control selection 0, 1 1 0 No
n158 019E 01 9E Motor code 0 to 70 1 Differs No
with
capacity.
n159 019F 01 9F Energy-saving voltage upper limit at 0 to 120 1% 120 No
60-Hz output
n160 01A0 01 A0 Energy-saving upper limit voltage at 6- 0 to 25 1% 16 No
Hz output
n161 01A1 01 A1 Power detection width for probe opera- 0 to 100 1% 10 No
tion switching
n162 01A2 01 A2 Power detection filter constant 0 to 255 1 (4 ms) 5 No
n163 01A3 01 A3 PID output gain 0.0 to 0.1 1.0 No
25.0
n164 01A4 01 A4 PID feedback input block selection 0 to 5 1 0 No
n165 --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n166 01A6 01 A6 Open input phase detection level 0 to 100 1% 0 No
n167 01A7 01 A7 Open input phase detection time 0 to 255 1s 0 No
n168 01A8 01 A8 Open output phase detection level 0 to 100 1% 0 No

10-40
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
n169 01A9 01 A9 Open output phase detection time 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
n170 to --- --- --- Not used. --- --- --- ---
n172
n173 01AD 01 AD DC injection braking proportional gain 1 to 999 1 (0.001) 83 No
n174 01AE 01 AE DC injection braking integration time 1 to 250 1 (4 ms) 25 No
n175 01AF 01 AF Low carrier frequency at low speed 0, 1 1 0 No
n176 01B0 01 B0 Parameter copy and verify function 0 to 5 1 0 No
selection (read only)
n177 01B1 01 B1 Parameter read prohibit selection (read 0, 1 1 0 No
only)
n178 01B2 01 B2 Fault log (read only) --- --- --- ---
n179 01B3 01 B3 Software number (read only) --- --- --- ---

10-41
Appendices Chapter 10

10-5 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes

10-5-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write)

The Inverter's various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table. For
example, to set the frequency reference and begin operation, first set the reference value to the fre-
quency reference register “0002,” and then write the run command to the Inverter's run command
register “0001."
Note 1. Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation.
Note 2. The following registers are in RAM, so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter's power
supply is turned OFF.
Note 3. When the remote I/O function is being used, the run command and frequency reference are
overwritten at regular intervals.
Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
--- --- 0000 Reserved
00 01 0001 Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Reverse/stop command 1: Reverse 0: Stop
Bit 2 Multi-function input command 3
Bit 3 Multi-function input command 4
Bit 4 Multi-function input command 5
Bit 5 Multi-function input command 6
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 7
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit 8 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 9 Error reset 1: Reset command
Bit 10 to 15 Not used.
00 02 0002 Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03.)
--- --- 0003 to 0005 Not used.
00 06 0006 PID target value
00 07 0007 Analog output 1 setting (−11 V/−726 decimal to 11 V/726 decimal)
00 08 0008 Analog output 2 setting (−11 V/−726 decimal to 11 V/726 decimal)
00 09 0009 Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 PHC1 (terminals P1-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 PHC2 (terminals P2-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3 to 5 Not used.
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7.
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 8 to 15 Not used.

10-42
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register Content

Instance Attribute number (hex)
--- --- 000A to 000E Not used.
00 0F 000F Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used.
Bit 1 PID target value (register 0006H)
1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bit 2 to 15 Not used.

10-5-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read)

Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 20 0020 Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward
operation or stopped
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 0: Not com-
pleted
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminals M1-M2) 1:
ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminals P1-PC) 1: ON
0: OFF
Bit 7 Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminals P2-PC) 1: ON
0: OFF
Bit 8 to 15 Not used.
00 21 0021 Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC), ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit 10 PG broken wire detected (PGO), overspeed (OS),
speed deviation (DEV)
Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power sup-
ply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3)
Bit 13 Missing output phase (LF)
Bit 14 RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit 15 Operator disconnected (OPR)

10-43
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 22 0022 Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 to 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bit 5 to 15 Not used.
00 23 0023 Frequency ref- Monitors U1-01 (Unit set with o1-03.)
erence
00 24 0024 Output fre- Monitors U1-02 (Unit set with o1-03.)
quency
00 25 0025 Output volt- Monitors U1-06 (0.1-V units)
age reference
00 26 0026 Output current Monitors U1-03 (0.1-A units)
00 27 0027 Output power Monitors U1-08 (0.1-kW units)
00 28 0028 Torque refer- Monitors U1-09 (0.1 units, 100% = motor's rated
ence torque)
Note: Only enabled for vector control.
--- --- 0029 to 002A Not used.
00 2B 002B Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3 Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 to 15 Not used.

10-44
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register Content

Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 2C 002C Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency agreement 1: Agreement
Bit 3 User-defined speed agreement 1: Agreement
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0:
Communications
Bit 10 Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Com-
munications
Bit 11 Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit 12 Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit 13 Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit 14 Fault. (including RS-422A/485 communications time-
out) 1: fault occurred
Bit 15 Communications time-out 1: Timed out
00 2D 002D Multi-function output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output (terminals M1-M2) 1:
ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminals P1-PC): 1: ON
0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminals P2-PC): 1: ON
0: OFF
Bit 3 to 15 Not used.
--- --- 002E to 0030 Not used.
00 31 0031 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1-07 (1-V units)
--- --- 0032 to 0037 Not used.
00 38 0038 PID feedback 1% = 10; 100% = Input corresponding to max. output
quantity frequency; without sign
00 39 0039 PID input 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
00 3A 003A PID output 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
00 3B 003B CPU software number
00 3C 003C Flash software number

10-45
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 3D 003D Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bit 7 to 15 Not used.
00 3E 003E kVA setting
00 3F 003F Control method
00 40 0040 Frequency ref- Monitors U1-01; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
erence with sign)
00 41 0041 Output fre- Monitors U1-02; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
quency with sign)
00 42 0042 Output current Monitors U1-03; Percentage units: 8192 at rated
output current
00 43 0043 Control Monitors U1-04; set in A1-02
method
00 44 0044 Motor speed Monitors U1-05; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
with sign)
00 45 0045 Output voltage Monitors U1-06; 0.1-V units
00 46 0046 Main circuit Monitors U1-07; 1-V units
DC voltage
00 47 0047 Output power Monitors U1-08; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
00 48 0048 Torque refer- Monitors U1-09; 0.1%-kW units (100% = motor's
ence rated torque; with sign)
00 49 0049 Input terminal Monitors U1-10; 1: ON. Bits 0 to 6 correspond to ter-
status minals S1 to S7.
00 4A 004A Output termi- Monitors U1-11
nal status Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2; 1: ON
Bit 1 Terminals P1 and PC; 1: ON
Bit 2 Terminals P2 and PC; 1: ON
Bit 3 to Not used.
6
Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC; 1: ON
Bit 8 to Not used.
15

10-46
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register Content

Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 4B 004B Operating sta- Monitors U1-12
tus Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation
Bit 3 during fault reset input
Bit 4 Frequency agree
Bit 5 Operation ready
Bit 6 Alarm (Minor fault)
Bit 7 Fault
Bit 8 to Not used.
15
00 4C 004C Cumulative Monitors U1-13; 1-hr units
operation time
00 4D 004D FLASH ID Monitors U1-14
software No.
00 4E 004E Frequency ref- Monitors U1-15; 0.1% units (100% = 10 V; with sign
erence (volt- for ± voltage setting)
age): Terminal
A1 input value
00 4F 004F Multi-function Monitors U1-16; 0.1% units (100% = 10 V; with sign
analog input: for ± voltage setting)
Terminal A2
input value
00 51 0051 Motor second- Monitors U1-18; 0.1% units (motor's rated secondary
ary current current = 100%; with sign)
00 52 0052 Motor excita- Monitors U1-19; 0.1% units (motor's rated secondary
tion current current = 100%; with sign)
00 53 0053 Output fre- Monitors U1-20; 0.01-Hz units (with sign)
quency after a
soft start
00 54 0054 Input to speed Monitors U1-21; 0.01% (max. frequency = 100%; with
control loop sign)
00 55 0055 Output from Monitors U1-22; 0.01% units (motor's rated second-
speed control ary current = 100%; with sign)
loop
00 57 0057 PID feedback Monitors U1-24; 0.01% units (input corresponding to
max. frequency = 100%; with sign)
00 59 0059 Voltage refer- Monitors U1-26; 0.1-V units (200 (400) VAC = 100%;
ence for sec- with sign)
ondary current
00 5A 005A Voltage refer- Monitors U1-27; 0.1-V units (200 (400) VAC = 100%;
ence for exci- with sign)
tation current
00 5B 005B CPU ID Monitors U1-28
00 5F 005F q-axis ACR Monitors U1-32; 0.1% units (motor's rated secondary
output current = 100%; with sign)
00 60 0060 d-axis ACR Monitors U1-33; 0.1% units (motor's rated secondary
output current = 100%; with sign)

10-47
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 61 0061 OPE error Monitors U1-34; outputs parameter
parameter
00 63 0063 PID input Monitors U1-36; 0.01% units (max. frequency =
quantity 100%; with sign)
00 64 0064 PID output Monitors U1-37; 0.01% units (max. frequency =
quantity 100%; with sign)
00 65 0065 PID reference Monitors U1-38; 0.01% units (max. frequency =
100%)
00 66 0066 RS-422A/485 Monitors U1-39
communica- Bit 0 CRC error
tions error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bit 7 to Not used.
15
00 68 0068 Fan operating Monitors U1-40; 1-hr units
time
00 80 0080 Current fault Monitors U2-01
Code Error Code Error Code Error
dis- dis- dis-
play play play
01 PUF 0E OL4 1C LF
02 UV1 0F RR 1D OH3
03 UV2 10 RH 1E OPR
04 UV3 11 EF3 1F ERR
06 GF 12 EF4 20 OH4
07 OC 13 EF5 22 BUS
08 OV 14 EF6 25 CF
09 OH 15 EF7 27 EF0
0A OH1 18 OS 28 FBL
0B OL1 19 DEV 29 UL3
0C OL2 1A PGO 2A UL4
0D OL3 1B PF 2B OL7
00 81 0081 Last fault Monitors U2-02 (same codes as U2-01)
00 82 0082 Fault fre- Monitors U2-03; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
quency refer- with sign)
ence
00 83 0083 Fault output Monitors U2-04; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
reference with sign)
00 84 0084 Fault output Monitors U2-05; 0.1-A units
current
00 85 0085 Fault motor Monitors U2-06; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03;
speed with sign)

10-48
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register Content

Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 86 0086 Fault output Monitors U2-07; 0.1-V units
voltage refer-
ence
00 87 0087 Fault main cir- Monitors U2-08; 1-V units
cuit DC volt-
age
00 88 0088 Fault output Monitors U2-09; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
power
00 89 0089 Fault torque Monitors U2-10; 0.1% units (100% = motor's rated
reference torque; with sign)
00 8A 008A Fault input ter- Monitors U2-11 (same contents as U1-10)
minal status
00 8B 008B Fault output Monitors U2-12 (same contents as U1-11)
terminal status
00 8C 008C Fault operating Monitors U2-13 (same contents as U1-12)
status
00 8D 008D Fault cumula- Monitors U2-14; 1-hr units
tive operation
time
00 (08) 90 (00) 0090 (0800) Content of last Monitors U3-01 (same codes as U2-01)
fault
00 (08) 91 (01) 0091 (0801) Content of 2nd Monitors U3-02 (same codes as U2-01)
prior fault
00 (08) 92 (02) 0092 (0802) Content of 3rd Monitors U3-03 (same codes as U2-01)
prior fault
00 (08) 93 (03) 0093 (0803) Content of 4th Monitors U3-04 (same codes as U2-01)
prior fault
00 (08) 94 (0A) 0094 (080A) Cumulative Monitors U3-05; 1-hr units
operation time
since last fault
00 (08) 95 (0B) 0095 (080B) Cumulative Monitors U3-06; 1-hr units
operation time
since 2nd prior
fault
00 (08) 96 (0C) 0096 (080C) Cumulative Monitors U3-07; 1-hr units
operation time
since 3rd prior
fault
00 (08) 97 (0D) 0097 (080D) Cumulative Monitors U3-08; 1-hr units
operation time
since 4th prior
fault
08 04 0804 Connect of 5th Monitors U3-09 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
prior fault
08 05 0805 Connect of 6th Monitors U3-10 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
prior fault
08 06 0806 Connect of 7th Monitors U3-11 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
prior fault
08 07 0807 Connect of 8th Monitors U3-12 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
prior fault

10-49
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
08 08 0808 Connect of 9th Monitors U3-13 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
prior fault
08 09 0809 Connect of Monitors U3-14 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
10th prior fault
08 0E 080E Cumulative Monitors U3-15; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 5th prior
fault
08 0F 080F Cumulative Monitors U3-16; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 6th prior
fault
08 10 0810 Cumulative Monitors U3-17; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 7th prior
fault
08 11 0811 Cumulative Monitors U3-18; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 8th prior
fault
08 12 0812 Cumulative Monitors U3-19; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 9th prior
fault
08 13 0813 Cumulative Monitors U3-20; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation time
since 10th
prior fault

Note U3-09 to U3-20 are not supported for Asian models. Register No. 0800 Hex to 0813 Hex are
not supported for Asian models.

10-5-3 Parameter Reading and Writing

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV Inverter parameters and the corresponding regis-
ter numbers. Write and read the various parameters with “1" as the minimum setting unit. Negative
numbers are expressed as two's complement. If the setting unit is in hexadecimal, there is no need to
convert it.
When writing data in parameters, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data.
Unless the enter command is transmitted, the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start.

10-50
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Parameters for Initialize Mode
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
A1-00 0100 01 00 Language selection for Digital Operator 0 to 6 1 1 Yes
display
A1-01 0101 01 01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 1 2 Yes
A1-02 0102 01 02 Control method selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
A1-03 0103 01 03 Initialize 0 to 3330 1 0 No
A1-04 0104 01 04 Password 0 to 9999 1 0 No
A1-05 0105 01 05 Password setting 0 to 9999 1 0 No
A2-01 0106 to 01 06 to User-parameter settings 0180 to 1 --- No
to 0125 25 050C
A2-32 Set the
register
numbers
for b1-01
to o2-11.

■ Application Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
b1-01 0180 01 80 Reference selection 0 to 4 1 1 No
b1-02 0181 01 81 Operation method selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-03 0182 01 82 Stopping method selection 0 to 3 1 0 No
b1-04 0183 01 83 Prohibition of reverse operation 0 to 2 1 0 No
(See
note 6.)
b1-06 0185 01 85 Read sequence input twice 0, 1 1 1 No
b1-07 0186 01 86 Operation selection after switching to 0, 1 1 0 No
remote mode
b1-08 0187 01 87 Run command selection in program- 0, 1 1 0 No
ming modes
b2-01 0189 01 89 Zero speed level (DC injection braking 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
starting frequency) 10.0
b2-02 018A 01 8A DC injection braking current 0 to 100 1% 50 No
b2-03 018B 01 8B DC injection braking time at start 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
10.00
b2-04 018C 01 8C DC Injection braking time at stop 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.50 No
10.00
b3-01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection (current detec- 0 to 3 1 2 (See No
tion or speed calculation) note 1.)
b3-02 0192 01 92 Speed search operating current (cur- 0 to 200 1% 120 (See No
rent detection) note 1.)
b3-03 0193 01 93 Speed search deceleration time (cur- 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
rent detection) 10.0
b3-05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time (current detec- 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.2 No
tion or speed calculation) 20.0
b4-01 01A3 01 A3 Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
3000.0
(See
note 5.)

10-51
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
b4-02 01A4 01 A4 Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
3000.0
(See
note 5.)
b5-01 01A5 01 A5 PID control mode selection 0 to 4 1 0 No
b5-02 01A6 01 A6 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
25.00
b5-03 01A7 01 A7 Integral (I) time 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
360.0
b5-04 01A8 01 A8 Integral (I) limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
b5-05 01A9 01 A9 Derivative (D) time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
10.00
b5-06 01AA 01 AA PID limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
b5-07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
b5-08 01AC 01 AC PID primary delay time constant 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
10.00
b5-09 01AD 01 AD PID output characteristics selection 0, 1 1 0 No
b5-10 01AE 01 AE PID output gain 0.0 to 0.1 1.0 No
25.0
b5-11 01AF 01 AF PID reverse output selection 0, 1 1 0 No
b5-12 01B0 01 B0 Selection of PID feedback command 0 to 2 1 0 No
loss detection
b5-13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command loss detection 0 to 100 1% 0 No
level
b5-14 01B2 01 B2 PID feedback command loss detection 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 No
time 25.5
b5-15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function operation level 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b5-16 01B4 01 B4 PID sleep operation delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
25.5
b5-17 01B5 01 B5 Accel/decel time for PID reference 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
25.5
b6-01 01B6 01 B6 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b6-02 01B7 01 B7 Dwell time at start 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
10.0
b6-03 01B8 01 B8 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b6-04 01B9 01 B9 Dwell time at stop 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
10.0
b8-01 01CC 01 CC Energy-saving mode selection 0, 1 1 0 No
b8-02 01CD 01 CD Energy-saving gain 0.0 to 0.1 0.7 (See Yes
10.0 note 2.)
b8-03 01CE 01 CE Energy-saving filter time constant 0.0 to 0.01 s 0.50 Yes
10.0 (See
note 3.)
b8-04 01CF 01 CF Energy-saving coefficient 0.00 to 0.01 Depends No
655.00 on
(See capacity.
note 4.)
b8-05 01D0 01 D0 Power detection filter time constant 0 to 2000 1 ms 20 No
b8-06 01D1 01 D1 Search operation voltage limiter 0 to 100 1% 0 No

10-52
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/F con-
trol default setting is given above.)
Note 2. The default setting is 0.1 for V/f control with PG.
Note 3. The default setting is 2.00 s for Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more.
Note 4. The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter.
Note 5. The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 300.0
Note 6. The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 1.

■ Tuning Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
C1-01 0200 02 00 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 10.0 Yes
6000.0 (Set with
C1-02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 (Set with C1-10.) Yes
C1-03 0202 02 02 Acceleration time 2 C1-10.) Yes
C1-04 0203 02 03 Deceleration time 2 Yes
C1-05 0204 02 04 Acceleration time 3 No
C1-06 0205 02 05 Deceleration time 3 No
C1-07 0206 02 06 Acceleration time 4 No
C1-08 0207 02 07 Deceleration time 4 No
C1-09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time No
C1-10 0209 02 09 Accel/decel time setting unit 0, 1 1 1 No
C1-11 020A 02 0A Accel/decel time switching frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
C2-01 020B 02 0B S-curve characteristic time at accelera- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion start 2.50
C2-02 020C 02 0C S-curve characteristic time at accelera- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion end 2.50
C2-03 020D 02 0D S-curve characteristic time at decelera- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion start 2.50
C2-04 020E 02 0E S-curve characteristic time at decelera- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
tion end 2.50
C3-01 020F 02 0F Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 (See Yes
note 1.)
C3-02 0210 02 10 Slip compensation primary delay time 0 to 1 ms 2000 No
10000 (See
note 1.)
C3-03 0211 02 11 Slip compensation limit 0 to 250 1% 200 No
C3-04 0212 02 12 Slip compensation selection during 0, 1 1 0 No
regeneration
C3-05 0213 02 13 Output voltage limit operation selection 0, 1 1 0 No
C4-01 0215 02 15 Torque compensation gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
C4-02 0216 02 16 Torque compensation primary delay 0 to 1 ms 200 (See No
time constant 10000 note 1.)
C4-03 0217 02 17 Starting torque value (forward) (See 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
note 4.) 200.0
C4-04 0218 02 18 Starting torque value (reverse) (See −200.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
note 4.) 0.0
C4-05 0219 02 19 Starting torque time constant (See note 0 to 200 1 ms 10 No
4.)

10-53
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
C5-01 021B 02 1B ASR proportional (P) gain 1 0.00 to 0.01 0.20 Yes
300.00
C5-02 021C 02 1C ASR integral (I) time 1 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.200 Yes
10.000
C5-03 021D 02 1D ASR proportional (P) gain 2 0.00 to 0.01 0.02 Yes
300.00
C5-04 021E 02 1E ASR integral (I) time 2 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.050 Yes
10.000
C5-05 021F 02 1F ASR limit 0.0 to 0.1% 5.0 No
20.0
C6-01 0223 02 23 CT/VT selection 0, 1 1 1 No
C6-02 0224 02 24 Carrier frequency selection 0 to F 1 Depends No
on
capacity.
C6-03 0225 02 25 Carrier frequency upper limit 2.0 to 0.1 kHz Depends No
15.0 on
(See capacity.
note 2
and 3.)
C6-04 0226 02 26 Carrier frequency lower limit 0.4 to 0.1 kHz Depends No
15.0 on
(See capacity.
note 2
and 3.)
C6-05 0227 02 27 Carrier frequency proportional gain 00 to 99 1 00 No
(See
note 3.)

Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/f control
default setting is given above.)
Note 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
Note 3. These parameters can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-
02.

10-54
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Reference Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
d1-01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 0 to max. 0.01 Hz 0.00 Yes
output (Set with
d1-02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 fre- o1-03.) 0.00 Yes
d1-03 0282 02 82 Frequency reference 3 quency 0.00 Yes
(See
d1-04 0283 02 83 Frequency reference 4 note.) 0.00 Yes
d1-05 0284 02 84 Frequency reference 5 0.00 Yes
d1-06 0285 02 85 Frequency reference 6 0.00 Yes
d1-07 0286 02 86 Frequency reference 7 0.00 Yes
d1-08 0287 02 87 Frequency reference 8 0.00 Yes
d1-09 0288 02 88 Frequency reference 9 0.00 Yes
d1-10 028B 02 8B Frequency reference 10 0.00 Yes
d1-11 028C 02 8C Frequency reference 11 0.00 Yes
d1-12 028D 02 8D Frequency reference 12 0.00 Yes
d1-13 028E 02 8E Frequency reference 13 0.00 Yes
d1-14 028F 02 8F Frequency reference 14 0.00 Yes
d1-15 0290 02 90 Frequency reference 15 0.00 Yes
d1-16 0291 02 91 Frequency reference 16 0.00 Yes
d1-17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Yes
d2-01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference upper limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 No
110.0
d2-02 028A 02 8A Frequency reference lower limit 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
110.0
d2-03 0293 02 93 Master speed reference lower limit 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
110.0
d3-01 0294 02 94 Jump frequency 1 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
d3-02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-03 0296 02 96 Jump frequency 3 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-04 0297 02 97 Jump frequency width 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.0 No
20.0
d4-01 0298 02 98 Frequency reference hold function 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
d4-02 0299 02 99 + − Speed limits 0 to 100 1% 10 No
d6-01 02A0 02 A0 Field weakening level 0 to 100 1% 80 No
d6-02 02A1 02 A1 Field frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0

Note Values exceeding the max. output frequency (E1-04 and E3-02) cannot be set. Set the motor
constant parameters first.

10-55
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Motor Constant Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
E1-01 0300 03 00 Input voltage setting 155 to 1V 200 No
255 (155 (400)
to 510) (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)
E1-03 0302 03 02 V/f pattern selection 0 to F 1 F No
E1-04 0303 03 03 Max. output frequency 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 No
400.0 (60.0)
(See (See
note 5.) notes 3
and 8.)
E1-05 0304 03 04 Max. voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-06 0305 03 05 Base frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 No
400.0 (60.0)
(See
notes 3
and 8.)
E1-07 0306 03 06 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
400.0 note 3.)
E1-08 0307 03 07 Mid. output frequency voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 15.0 No
255.0 (30.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
(See and 3.)
note 1.)
E1-09 0308 03 08 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 (See No
400.0 note 3.)
E1-10 0309 03 09 Min. output frequency voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 9.0 No
255.0 (18.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
(See and 3.)
note 1.)
E1-11 030A 03 0A Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 (See No
400.0 note 6.)
E1-12 030B 03 0B Mid. output frequency voltage 2 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 (See No
255.0 note 6.)
(0.0 to
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E1-13 030C 03 0C Base voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 (See No
255.0 note 4.)
(0.0 to
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E2-01 030E 03 0E Motor rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A Depends No
6.40 on
(See capacity.
note 2.)
E2-02 030F 03 0F Motor rated slip 0.00 to 0.01 Hz Depends No
20.00 on
capacity.

10-56
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
E2-03 0310 03 10 Motor no-load current Depends 0.01 A Depends No
on on
capacity. capacity.
E2-04 0311 03 11 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
E2-05 0312 03 12 Motor line-to-line resistance 0.000 to 0.001 Ω Depends No
65.000 on
capacity.
E2-06 0313 03 13 Motor leak inductance 0.0 to 0.1% Depends No
40.0 on
capacity.
E2-07 0314 03 14 Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0.00 o 0.01 0.50 No
0.50
E2-08 0315 03 15 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0.00 o 0.01 0.75 No
0.75
E2-10 0317 03 17 Motor iron loss for torque compensa- 0 to 1W Depends No
tion 65535 on
capacity.
E2-11 0318 03 18 Motor rated output 0.00 to 0.01 kW Depends No
650.00 on
capacity.
E3-01 0319 03 19 Motor 2 control method selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
E3-02 031A 03 1A Motor 2 max. output frequency (FMAX) 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
(See
note 5.)
E3-03 031B 03 1B Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX) 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
and 3.)
E3-04 031C 03 1C Motor 2 max. voltage frequency (FA) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
E3-05 031D 03 1D Motor 2 mid. output frequency (FB) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
400.0 notes 1
and 3.)
E3-06 031E 03 1E Motor 2 mid. output frequency voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 11.0 No
1 (VC) 255.0 (22.0)
(0.0 to
510.0)
E3-07 031F 03 1F Motor 2 min. output frequency (FMIN) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 (See No
400.0 note 3.)
E3-08 0320 03 20 Motor 2 min. output frequency voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 9.0 No
(VMIN) 255.0 (18.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
and 3.)
E4-01 0321 03 21 Motor 2 rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A Depends No
6.40 on
(See capacity.
note 2.)
E4-02 0322 03 22 Motor 2 rated slip 0.00 to 0.01 Hz Depends No
20.00 on
capacity.

10-57
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
E4-03 0323 03 23 Motor 2 no-load current 0.00 to 0.01 A Depends No
1.89 on
(See capacity.
note 7.)
E4-04 0324 03 24 Motor 2 number of poles (number of 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
poles)
E4-05 0325 03 25 Motor 2 line-to-line resistance 0.000 to 0.01 Ω Depends No
65.000 on
capacity.
E4-06 0326 03 26 Motor 2 leak inductance 0.0 to 0.1% Depends No
40.0 on
capacity.
E4-07 0327 03 27 Motor 2 rated capacity 0.40 to 0.01 kW Depends No
650.00 on
capacity.

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200-
V-class 0.4-kW Inverter are given above.
Note 3. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/f control
default settings are given above.)
Note 4. E1-13 will be the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
Note 5. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
Note 6. The settings of E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored if set to 0.0.
Note 7. If multi-function input H1-@@ is set to 16 (motor 2), the default setting will depend upon the
Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given.
Note 8. Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.

■ Option Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
F1-01 0380 03 80 PG constant 0 to 1 1024 No
60000 (600)
(See
note.)
F1-02 0381 03 81 Operation selection at PG open circuit 0 to 3 1 1 No
(PGO)
F1-03 0382 03 82 Operation selection at overspeed (OS) 0 to 3 1 1 No
F1-04 0383 03 83 Operation selection at deviation 0 to 3 1 3 No
F1-05 0384 03 84 PG rotation 0, 1 1 0 No
F1-06 0385 03 85 PG division rate (PG pulse monitor) 0 to 132 1 1 No
F1-07 0386 03 86 Integral value during accel/decel 0, 1 1 0 No
enable/disable
F1-08 0387 03 87 Overspeed detection level 0 to 120 1% 115 No
F1-09 0388 03 88 Overspeed detection delay time 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 1.0 No
F1-10 0389 03 89 Excessive speed deviation detection 0 to 50 1% 10 No
level
F1-11 038A 03 8A Excessive speed deviation detection 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.5 No
delay time 10.0

10-58
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
F1-12 038B 03 8B Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 to 1000 1 0 No
F1-13 038C 03 8C Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1000 1 0 No
F1-14 038D 03 8D PG open-circuit detection time 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
10.0
F4-01 0391 03 91 Channel 1 monitor selection 1 to 40 1 2 No
F4-02 0392 03 92 Channel 1 gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
F4-03 0393 03 93 Channel 2 monitor selection 1 to 40 1 3 No
F4-04 0394 03 94 Channel 2 gain 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 Yes
2.50
F4-05 0395 03 95 Channel 1 output monitor bias −10.0 to 0.1 0.0 Yes
10.0
F4-06 0396 03 96 Channel 2 output monitor bias −10.0 to 0.1 0.0 Yes
10.0
F4-07 0397 03 97 Analog output signal level for channel 1 0, 1 1 0 No
F4-08 0398 03 98 Analog output signal level for channel 2 0, 1 1 0 No
F5-01 0399 03 99 Not used. --- --- 0 No
F5-02 039A 03 9A Not used. --- --- 1 No
F5-03 039B 03 9B Not used. --- --- 2 No
F5-04 039C 03 9C Not used. --- --- 4 No
F5-05 039D 03 9D Not used. --- --- 6 No
F5-06 039E 03 9E Not used. --- --- 37 No
F5-07 039F 03 9F Not used. --- --- 0F No
F5-08 03A0 03 A0 Not used. --- --- 0F No
F5-09 03A1 03 A1 Not used. --- --- 0 No
F6-01 03A2 03 A2 DeviceNet fault operation selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
F6-02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external fault input 0, 1 1 0 No
detection method selection
F6-03 03A4 03 A4 Communications external fault input 0 to 3 1 1 No
operation selection
F6-04 03A5 03 A5 Not used. --- --- 0 No

Note Values in parentheses are Asian model Inverters

■ External Terminal Function Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
H1-01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function selection 0 to 68 1 24 No
H1-02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function selection 0 to 68 1 14 No
H1-03 0402 04 02 Terminal S5 function selection 0 to 68 1 3 (0) No
(See
note 1.)
H1-04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function selection 0 to 68 1 4 (3) No
(See
note 1.)
H1-05 0404 04 04 Terminal S7 function selection 0 to 68 1 6 (4) No
(See
note 1.)
H2-01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1-M2 Select 0 to 37 1 0 No

10-59
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
H2-02 040C 04 0C Terminal P1 function select (open col- 0 to 37 1 1 No
lector)
H2-03 040D 04 0D Terminal P2 function select (open col- 0 to 37 1 2 No
lector)
H3-01 0410 04 10 Signal select terminal A1 (voltage) 0 or 1 1 0 No
(See note 4.)
H3-02 0411 04 11 Frequency reference (voltage) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
gain (terminal A1) 1000.0
H3-03 0412 04 12 Frequency reference (voltage) −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
bias (terminal A1) 100.0
H3-08 0417 04 17 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 0 to 2 1 2 No
signal level selection
H3-09 0418 04 18 Multi-function analog input terminal A2 0 to 1F 1 0 No
function selection
H3-10 0419 04 19 Frequency reference (current) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
gain (terminal A2) 1000.0
H3-11 041A 04 1A Frequency reference (current) −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
bias (terminal A2) 100.0
H3-12 041B 04 1B Analog input filter time constant 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
2.00
H3-13 041C 04 1C Terminal A1/A2 switching 0, 1 1 0 No
H4-01 041D 04 1D Multi-function analog output 1 monitor 1 to 40 1 2 No
selection (terminal FM)
H4-02 041E 04 1E Multi-function analog output 1gain (ter- 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
minal FM) 1000.0 (0.01) (1.00)
(0.00 to (See (See
2.50) note 3.) note 3.)
(see
note 3.)
H4-03 041F 04 1F Multi-function analog output 1 bias (ter- −110.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
minal FM) 110.0
(−10.0 to
10.0)
(See
note 3.)
H4-04 0420 04 20 Multi-function analog output 2 monitor 1 to 40 1 3 No
selection (terminal AM)
H4-05 0421 04 21 Multi-function analog output 2 gain (ter- 0.0 to 0.1% 50 (0.50) Yes
minal AM) 1000.0 (0.01) (See
(0.00 to (See note 3.)
2.50) note 3.)
H4-06 0422 04 22 Multi-function analog output 2 −110.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
bias (terminal AM) 110.0
(−10.0 to
10.0)
(See
note 3)
H4-07 0423 04 23 Multi-function analog output 1 signal 0, 1, 2 1 0 No
level selection (0, 1)
(See
note 3.)
H4-08 0424 04 24 Multi-function analog output 2 signal 0, 1 1 0 No
level selection
H5-01 0425 04 25 Slave address 0 to 20 1 1F No
(See
note 2.)
H5-02 0426 04 26 Communication speed selection 0 to 4 1 3 No
H5-03 0427 04 27 Communication parity selection 0 to 2 1 0 No

10-60
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
H5-04 0428 04 28 Stopping method after communication 0 to 3 1 3 No
error
H5-05 0429 04 29 Communication error detection selec- 0, 1 1 1 No
tion
H5-06 042A 04 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1 ms 5 No
H5-07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON/OFF 0, 1 1 1 No
H6-01 042C 04 2C Pulse train input function selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
H6-02 042D 04 2D Pulse train input scaling 1000 to 1 Hz 1440 Yes
32000
H6-03 042E 04 2E Pulse train input gain 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1000.0
H6-04 042F 04 2F Pulse train input bias −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
H6-05 0430 04 30 Pulse train input filter time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.10 Yes
2.00
H6-06 0431 04 31 Pulse train monitor selection 1, 2, 5, 1 2 Yes
20, 24,
36
H6-07 0432 04 32 Pulse train monitor scaling 0 to 1 Hz 1440 Yes
32000

Note 1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Note 2. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.
Note 3. Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.
Note 4. This parameter is not supported by the Asian model Inverters.

■ Protective Function Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
L1-01 0480 04 80 Motor protection selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
L1-02 0481 04 81 Motor protection time constant 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 min 1.0 No
L1-03 0482 04 82 Alarm operation selection during motor 0 to 3 1 3 No
overheating
L1-04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating operation selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
L1-05 0484 04 84 Motor temperature input filter time con- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
stant 10.00
L2-01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss detection 0 to 2 1 0 No
L2-02 0486 04 86 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s Depends No
on
capacity.
L2-03 0487 04 87 Min. baseblock time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends No
on
capacity.
L2-04 0488 04 88 Voltage recovery time 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends No
on
capacity.
L2-05 0489 04 89 Undervoltage detection level 150 to 1V 190 No
210 (150 (380)
to 420) (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)

10-61
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
L2-06 048A 04 8A KEB deceleration time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
200.0
L2-07 048B 04 8B Momentary recovery time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 (See No
25.5 note 2.)
L2-08 048C 04 8C Frequency reduction gain at KEB start 0 to 300 1 100 No
L3-01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection during accel 0 to 2 1 1 No
L3-02 0490 04 90 Stall prevention level during accel 0 to 200 1% 120 (See No
note 3.)
L3-03 0491 04 91 Stall prevention limit during accel 0 to 100 1% 50 No
L3-04 0492 04 92 Stall prevention selection during decel 0 to 3 1 1 No
L3-05 0493 04 93 Stall prevention selection during run- 0 to 2 1 1 No
ning
L3-06 0494 04 94 Stall prevention level during running 30 to 200 1% 120 (See No
note 3.)
L4-01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement detection level 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
L4-02 049A 04 9A Speed agreement detection width 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
20.0
L4-03 049B 04 9B Speed agreement detection level (+/−) −400.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
L4-04 049C 04 9C Speed agreement detection width (+/−) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
20.0
L4-05 049D 04 9D Operation when frequency reference is 0, 1 1 0 No
lost
L4-06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for loss of fre- 0.0 to 0.1% 80.0 No
quency reference 100.0
L5-01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 1 0 No
L5-02 049F 04 9F Auto restart operation selection 0, 1 1 0 No
L6-01 04A1 04 A1 Torque detection selection 1 0 to 8 1 0 No
L6-02 04A2 04 A2 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-03 04A3 04 A3 Torque detection time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0
L6-04 04A4 04 A4 Torque detection selection 2 0 to 8 1 0 No
L6-05 04A5 04 A5 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-06 04A6 04 A6 Torque detection time 2 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0
L7-01 04A7 04 A7 Forward drive torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L7-02 04A8 04 A8 Reverse drive torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L7-03 04A9 04 A9 Forward regenerative torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L7-04 04AA 04 AA Reverse regenerative torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L8-01 04AD 04 AD Protect selection for internal DB resis- 0, 1 1 0 No
tor
L8-02 04AE 04 AE Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 130 1°C Depends No
on
capacity.
L8-03 04AF 04 AF Operation selection after overheat pre- 0 to 3 1 3 No
alarm
L8-05 04B1 04 B1 Input open-phase protection selection 0, 1 1 1 (0) No
(See
note 4.)
L8-07 04B3 04 B3 Output open-phase protection selec- 0, 1 1 0 No
tion
L8-09 04B5 04 B5 Ground protection selection 0, 1 1 1 No

10-62
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
L8-10 04B6 04 B6 Cooling fan control selection 0, 1 1 0 No
L8-11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay time 0 to 300 1s 60 No
L8-12 04B8 04 B8 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 1°C 45 No
L8-15 04BB 04 BB OL2 characteristics selection at low 0, 1 1 1 No
speeds
L8-18 04BE 04 BE Soft CLA selection 0, 1 1 1 No

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceler-
ation time (C1-01 to C1-08).
Note 3. The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be
150%.
Note 4. Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.

■ Special Adjustment Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
N1-01 0580 05 80 Hunting-prevention function selection 0, 1 1 1 No
N1-02 0581 05 81 Hunting-prevention gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 No
2.50
N2-01 0584 05 84 Speed feedback detection control 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 No
(AFR) gain 10.00
N2-02 0585 05 85 Speed feedback detection control 0 to 2000 1 ms 50 No
(AFR) time constant
N2-03 0586 05 86 Speed feedback detection control 0 to 2000 1 ms 750 No
(AFR) time constant 2
N3-01 0588 05 88 High-slip braking deceleration fre- 1 to 20 1% 5 No
quency width
N3-02 0589 05 89 High-slip braking current limit 100 to 1% 150 No
200
N3-03 058A 05 8A High-slip braking stop dwell time 0.1 to 0.1 s 1.0 No
10.0
N3-04 058B 05 8B High-slip braking OL time 30 to 1s 40 No
1200

■ Operator Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
o1-01 0500 05 00 Monitor selection 4 to 33 1 6 Yes
o1-02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after power up 1 to 4 1 1 Yes
o1-03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of reference setting 0 to 1 0 No
and monitor 39999
o1-05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness 0 to 5 1 3 Yes
o2-01 0505 05 05 LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable 0, 1 1 1 No
o2-02 0506 05 06 STOP key during control circuit termi- 0, 1 1 1 No
nal operation

10-63
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
o2-03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value 0 to 2 1 0 No
o2-04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 Depends No
on
capacity.
o2-05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference setting method 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
o2-06 050A 05 0A Operation selection when digital opera- 0, 1 1 0 No
tor is disconnected
o2-07 050B 05 0B Cumulative operation time setting 0 to 1 hr 0 No
65535
o2-08 050C 05 0C Cumulative operation time selection 0, 1 1 1 (0) No
(See
note 1.)
o2-09 050D 05 0D Initialize mode Do not change. --- --- --- No
o2-10 050E 05 0E Fan operation time setting 0 to 1 hr 0 No
65535
o2-11 0510 05 10 Fault trace/fault history initialization 0, 1 1 0 No
(See note 2.)

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.

Note 2. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when T1-01 is set to 2. This setting (2) is only possible for V/f control
or V/f control with PG.

■ Motor Autotuning Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
T1-00 0700 07 00 Motor 1/2 selection 1, 2 1 1 No
T1-01 0701 07 01 Autotuning mode selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
(See
note 2.)
T1-02 0702 07 02 Motor output power 0.00 to 0.01 kW 0.40 No
650.00
T1-03 0703 07 03 Motor rated voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
T1-04 0704 07 04 Motor rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A Depends No
6.40 on
(See capacity.
note 3.)
T1-05 0705 07 05 Motor base frequency 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 60.00 No
400.00
(See
note 4.)
T1-06 0706 07 06 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 4 No
T1-07 0707 07 07 Motor base speed 0 to 1 r/min 1750 No
24000

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when T1-01 is set to 2. This setting (2) is only possible for V/f control
or V/f control with PG.

10-64
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 3. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a
200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given.)
Note 4. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.

10-65
Appendices Chapter 10

10-6 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes

10-6-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write)

Class 64 Register No. Contents
In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
--- --- 0000 Reserved
00 01 0001 Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Reverse/stop command 1: Reverse 0: Stop
Bit 2 Multi-function input command 3
Bit 3 Multi-function input command 4
Bit 4 Multi-function input command 5
Bit 5 Multi-function input command 6
Bit 6 Multi-function input command 7
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit 8 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 9 Error reset 1: Reset command
Bits 10 to 15 Not used.
00 02 0002 Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03.)
--- --- 0003 to 0005 Not used.
00 06 0006 PID target value
00 07 0007 Analog output 1 setting (−11 V/−726 Dec. to 11 V/726 Dec.)
00 08 0008 Not used.
00 09 0009 Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Contact output (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 2 to 5 Not used.
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7.
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to 15 Not used.
--- --- 000A to 000E Not used.
00 0F 000F Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used.
Bit 1 PID target value (register 0006H) 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 2 to 15 Not used.

Note Set all unused bits to 0.

10-66
Appendices Chapter 10

10-6-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read)

Class 64 Register No. Contents
In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 20 0020 Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward opera-
tion or stopped
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0:
OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact output (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0:
OFF
Bits 7 to 15 Not used.
00 21 0021 Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC), ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1)
Bit 4 Not used.
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit 10 Not used.
Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error
(UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3)
Bit 13 Not used.
Bit 14 RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit 15 Operator disconnected (OPR)
00 22 0022 Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bits 1 and 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to 15 Not used.
00 23 0023 Frequency Monitors U1-01 (Unit set with o1-03.)
reference
00 24 0024 Output fre- Monitors U1-02 (Unit set with o1-03.)
quency
00 25 0025 Output volt- Monitors U1-06 (0.1-V units)
age refer-
ence

10-67
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register No. Contents
In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 26 0026 Output cur- Monitors U1-03 (Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
rent Inverters of 11 kW or more: 0.1-A units)
00 27 0027 Output Monitors U1-08 (0.1-kW units)
power
--- --- 0028 to 002A Not used.
00 2B 002B Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3 Multi-function input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Multi-function input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F Not used.
00 2C 002C Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Com-
munications
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communi-
cations
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E fault (including RS-422A/485 communications time-out) 1:
fault occurred
Bit F Communications time-out 1: Timed out
00 2D 002D Multi-function output status
Bit 0 Multi-function output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function output (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 2 to F Not used.
--- --- 002E to 0030 Not used.
00 31 0031 Main circuit Monitors U1-07 (1-V units)
DC voltage
--- --- 0032 to 0037 Not used.
00 38 0038 PID feed- 1% = 10; 100% = Input corresponding to max. output fre-
back quantity quency; without sign

10-68
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register No. Contents

In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 39 0039 PID input 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
00 3A 003A PID output 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
00 3B 003B CPU software number
00 3C 003C Flash software number
00 3D 003D Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used.
00 3E 003E kVA setting
00 3F 003F Control method
00 40 0040 Frequency Monitors U1-01; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
reference
00 41 0041 Output fre- Monitors U1-02; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
quency
00 42 0042 Output cur- Monitors U1-03; % units: 8192 at rated current
rent
--- --- 0043 and Not used.
0044
00 45 0045 Output volt- Monitors U1-06; 0.1-V units
age
00 46 0046 Main circuit Monitors U1-07; 1-V units
DC voltage
00 47 0047 Output Monitors U1-08; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
power
--- --- 0048 Not used.
00 49 0049 Input termi- Monitors U1-10; 1: ON. Bits 0 to 6 correspond to terminals
nal status S1 to S7.
00 4A 004A Output termi- Monitors U1-11
nal status Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2; 1: ON
Bit 1 Terminals M3 and M4; 1: ON
Bits 2 to Not used.
6
Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC; 1: ON
Bits 8 to Not used.
F

10-69
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register No. Contents
In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 4B 004B Operating Monitors U1-12
status Bit 0 During RUN
Bit 1 Zero speed
Bit 2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
Bit 3 During fault reset input
Bit 4 Frequency agree
Bit 5 Operation ready
Bit 6 Alarm (minor fault)
Bit 7 Fault
Bits 8 to Not used.
F
00 4C 004C Cumulative Monitors U1-13; 1-hr units
operation
time
00 4D 004D FLASH ID Monitors U1-14
software No.
00 4E 004E Frequency Monitors U1-15; 0.1% units (100% = 10 V; with sign for +
reference voltage setting)
(voltage):
Terminal A1
input value
00 4F 004F Multi-func- Monitors U1-16; 0.1% units (100%=20 mA or 100% = 10 V;
tion analog with sign for ± voltage setting)
input: Termi-
nal A2 input
value
--- --- 0051 and Not used.
0052
00 53 0053 Output fre- Monitors U1-20; 0.01-Hz units (with sign)
quency after
a soft start
--- --- 0054 and Not used.
0055
00 57 0057 PID feed- Monitors U1-24; 0.01% units (input corresponding to max.
back frequency = 100%; with sign)
--- --- 0059 and Not used.
005A
00 5B 005B CPU ID Monitors U1-28
--- --- 005F and Not used.
0060
00 61 0061 OPE error Monitors U1-34; outputs parameter
parameter
00 63 0063 PID input Monitors U1-36; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with
quantity sign)
00 64 0064 PID output Monitors U1-37; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with
quantity sign)
00 65 0065 PID refer- Monitors U1-38; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%)
ence

10-70
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register No. Contents

In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 66 0066 RS-422A/ Monitors U1-39
485 commu- Bit 0 CRC error
nications
error Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bits 7 to Not used.
F
00 68 0068 Fan operat- Monitors U1-40; 1-hr units
ing time
00 80 0080 Current fault Monitors U2-01
Code Error Code Error Code Error
display display display
01 PUF 0E --- 1C ---
02 UV1 0F --- 1D OH3
03 UV2 10 --- 1E OPR
04 UV3 11 EF3 1F ERR
06 GF 12 EF4 20 OH4
07 OC 13 EF5 22 BUS
08 OV 14 EF6 25 CF
09 OH 15 EF7 27 EF0
0A OH1 18 --- 28 FBL
0B OL1 19 --- 29 IL3
0C OL2 1A --- 2A ---
0D OL3 1B --- 2B OL7
00 81 0081 Last fault Monitors U2-02 (same codes as U2-01)
00 82 0082 Fault fre- Monitors U2-03; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
quency refer-
ence
00 83 0083 Fault output Monitors U2-04; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
reference
00 84 0084 Fault output Monitors U2-05; Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
current Inverters of 11 kW or more: 0.1-A units
--- --- 0085 Not used.
00 86 0086 Fault output Monitors U2-07; 0.1-V units
voltage refer-
ence
00 87 0087 Fault main Monitors U2-08; 1-V units
circuit DC
voltage
00 88 0088 Fault output Monitors U2-09; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
power
--- --- 0089 Not used.

10-71
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register No. Contents
In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
00 8A 008A Fault input Monitors U2-11 (same contents as U1-10)
terminal sta-
tus
00 8B 008B Fault output Monitors U2-12 (same contents as U1-11)
terminal sta-
tus
00 8C 008C Fault operat- Monitors U2-13 (same contents as U1-12)
ing status
00 8D 008D Fault cumu- Monitors U2-14; 1-hr units
lative opera-
tion time
00 8D 008D Fault cumu- Monitors U2-14; 1-hr units
lative opera-
tion time
08 00 0090 (0800) Content of Monitors U3-01 (same codes as U2-01)
last fault
08 01 0091 (0801) Content of Monitors U3-02 (same codes as U2-01)
2nd prior
fault
08 02 0092 (0802) Content of Monitors U3-03 (same codes as U2-01)
3rd prior fault
08 03 0093 (0803) Content of Monitors U3-04 (same codes as U2-01)
4th prior fault
08 0A 0094 (080A) Cumulative Monitors U3-05; 1-hr units
operation
time since
last fault
08 0B 0095 (080B) Cumulative Monitors U3-06; 1-hr units
operation
time since
2nd prior
fault
08 0C 0096 (080C) Cumulative Monitors U3-07; 1-hr units
operation
time since
3rd prior fault
08 0D 0097 (080D) Cumulative Monitors U3-08; 1-hr units
operation
time since
4th prior fault
08 04 0804 Content of Monitors U3-09 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
5th prior fault
08 05 0805 Content of Monitors U3-10 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
6th prior fault
08 06 0806 Content of Monitors U3-11 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
7th prior fault
08 07 0807 Content of Monitors U3-12 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
8th prior fault
08 08 0808 Content of Monitors U3-13 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
9th prior fault

10-72
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register No. Contents

In- At- (Hex)
stance tribute
08 09 0809 Content of Monitors U3-14 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
10th prior
fault
08 0E 080E Cumulative Monitors U3-15; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
5th prior fault
08 0F 080F Cumulative Monitors U3-16; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
6th prior fault
08 10 0810 Cumulative Monitors U3-17; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
7th prior fault
08 11 0811 Cumulative Monitors U3-18; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
8th prior fault
08 12 0812 Cumulative Monitors U3-19; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
9th prior fault
08 13 0813 Cumulative Monitors U3-20; 1-hr units (See note.)
operation
time since
10th prior
fault

10-6-3 Parameter Reading and Writing

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3PV Inverter parameter and the corresponding register
numbers. Write and read the various parameters with “1" as the minimum setting unit. Negative num-
bers are expressed as two's complement. If the setting unit is in hexadecimal, there is no need to
convert it.
When writing data in parameters, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data.
Unless the enter command is transmitted, the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start.

10-73
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Parameters for Initialize Mode
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
A1-01 0101 01 01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 1 2 Yes
A1-03 0103 01 03 Initialize 0 to 1 0 No
3,330
A1-04 0104 01 04 Password 0 to 1 0 No
9,999
A1-05 0105 01 05 Password setting 0 to 1 0 No
9,999

■ Application Parameters
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
b1-01 0180 01 80 Reference selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-02 0181 01 81 Operation method selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-03 0182 01 82 Stopping method selection 0 to 3 1 0 No
b1-07 0183 01 86 Operation selection after 0 or 1 1 0 No
switching to remote mode
b1-08 0187 01 87 Run command selection in 0 or 1 1 0 No
programming modes
b2-01 0189 01 89 Zero speed level (DC injec- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
tion braking starting fre- 10.0
quency)
b2-02 018A 01 8A DC injection braking current 0 to100 1% 50 No
b2-03 018B 01 93 DC injection braking time at 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
start 10.00
b2-04 018C 01 8C DC Injection braking time at 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.50 No
stop 10.00
b3-01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection 2 or 3 1 2 No
(current detection or speed
calculation)
b3-02 0192 01 92 Speed search operating 0 to 200 1% 120 No
current (current detection)
b3-03 0193 01 93 Speed search deceleration 0.1 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
time (current detection) 10.0
b3-05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.2 No
(current detection or speed 20.0
calculation)
b5-01 01A5 01 A5 PID control mode selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
b5-02 01A6 01 A6 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
25.00
b5-03 01A7 01 A7 Integral (I) time 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
360.0
b5-04 01A8 01 A8 Integral (I) limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0

10-74
Appendices Chapter 10

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes

eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
b5-06 01AA 01 AA PID limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
b5-07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment −100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
to 100.0
b5-08 01AC 01 AC PID primary delay time con- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
stant 10.00
b5-12 01B0 01 B0 Selection of PID feedback 0 to 2 1 0 No
command loss detection
b5-13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command 0 to 100 1% 0 No
loss detection level
b5-14 01B2 01 B2 PID feedback command 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 No
loss detection time 25.5
b5-15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function opera- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
tion level 400.0
b5-16 01B4 01 B4 PID sleep operation delay 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
time 25.5
b5-17 01B5 01 B5 Accel/decel time for PID ref- 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
erence 25.5
b8-01 01CC 01 CC Energy-saving mode selec- 0 or 1 1 0 No
tion
b8-04 01CF 01 CF Energy-saving coefficient 0.00 to 0.01 De- No
655.00 pends
(See on ca-
note.) pacity.
b8-05 01D0 01 D0 Power detection filter time 0 to 1 ms 20 No
constant 2,000
b8-06 01D1 01 D1 Search operation voltage 0 to 100 1% 0 No
limiter

Note The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter.

■ Tuning Parameters
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
C1-01 0200 02 00 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 10.0 Yes
C1-02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 600.0 Yes
C1-03 0202 02 02 Acceleration time 2 Yes
C1-04 0203 02 03 Deceleration time 2 Yes
C1-09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time No
C1-11 020A 02 0A Accel/decel time switching 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
frequency 400.0
C2-01 020B 02 0B S-curve characteristic time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
at acceleration start 2.50
C2-02 020C 02 0C S-curve characteristic time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
at acceleration end 2.50

10-75
Appendices Chapter 10
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
C4-01 0215 02 15 Torque compensation gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
C4-02 0216 02 16 Torque compensation pri- 0 to 1 ms 200 No
mary delay time constant 10,000 (See
note 1.)
C6-02 0224 02 24 Carrier frequency selection 1 to F 1 De- No
pends
on ca-
pacity.
C6-03 0225 02 25 Carrier frequency upper 2.0 to 0.1 kHz De- No
limit 15.0 pends
(See on ca-
notes 2 pacity.
and 3.)
C6-04 0226 02 26 Carrier frequency lower limit 0.4 to 0.1 kHz De- No
15.0 pends
(See on ca-
notes 2 pacity.
and 3.)
C6-05 0227 02 27 Carrier frequency propor- 00 to 99 1 00 No
tional gain (See
note 3.)

Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/f control
default setting is given above.)
Note 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
Note 3. These parameters can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.

■ Reference Parameters
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
d1-01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 0 to 0.01 Hz 0.00 Yes
d1-02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 max. (Set 0.00 Yes
output with o1-
d1-03 0282 02 82 Frequency reference 3 fre- 03.) 0.00 Yes
d1-04 0283 02 83 Frequency reference 4 quency 0.00 Yes
d1-17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Yes
d2-01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference upper 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 No
limit 110.0
d2-02 028A 02 8A Frequency reference lower 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
limit 110.0
d2-03 0293 02 93 Master speed reference 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
lower limit 110.0

10-76
Appendices Chapter 10

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes

eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
d3-01 0294 02 94 Jump frequency 1 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-03 0296 02 96 Jump frequency 3 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-04 0297 02 97 Jump frequency width 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.0 No
20.0
d6-01 02A0 02 A0 Field weakening level 0 to 100 1% 80 No
d6-02 02A1 02 A1 Field frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0

■ Motor Constant Parameters

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
E1-01 0300 03 00 Input voltage setting 155 to 1V 200 No
255 (400)
(155 to (See
510) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-03 0302 03 02 V/f pattern selection 0 to F 1 F No
E can-
not be
set.
E1-04 0303 03 03 Max. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 No
120.0
E1-05 0304 03 04 Max. voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-06 0305 03 05 Base frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 No
120.0
E1-07 0306 03 06 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 No
120.0
E1-08 0307 03 07 Mid. output frequency volt- 0.0 to 0.1 V 15.0 No
age 255 (0.0 (30.0)
to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-09 0308 03 08 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 No
120.0

10-77
Appendices Chapter 10
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
E1-10 0309 03 09 Min. output frequency volt- 0.0 to 0.1 V 9.0 No
age 255.0 (18.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-11 030A 03 0A Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
120.0 (See
note 2.)
E1-12 030B 03 0B Mid. output frequency volt- 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 No
age 2 255.0 (See
(0.0 to note 2.)
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E1-13 030C 03 0C Base voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 No
255.0 (See
(0.0 to note 3.)
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E2-01 030E 03 0E Motor rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A De- No
6.40 pends
(See on ca-
note 4.) pacity.
E2-05 0312 03 12 Motor line-to-line resistance 0.000 o 0.001 Ω De- No
65.000 pends
on ca-
pacity.

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. The settings of E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored if set to 0.0.
Note 3. E1-13 will be the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
Note 4. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200-
V-class 0.4-kW Inverter are given above.

10-78
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Option Parameters
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
F6-01 03A2 03 A2 DeviceNet fault operation 0 to 3 1 1 No
selection
F6-02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external 0 or 1 1 0 No
fault input detection method
selection
F6-03 03A4 03 A4 Communications external 0 to 3 1 1 No
fault input operation selec-
tion
F6-05 03A6 03 A6 Display unit selection for 0 or 1 1 0 No
current monitor

■ External Terminal Function Parameters

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
H1-01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function selec- 0 to 6A 1 24 No
tion
H1-02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function selec- 0 to 6A 1 14 No
tion
H1-03 0402 04 02 Terminal S5 function selec- 0 to 6A 1 3 (0) No
tion (See
note1.)
H1-04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function selec- 0 to 6A 1 4 (3) No
tion (See
note1.)
H1-05 0404 04 04 Terminal S7 function selec- 0 to 6A 1 6 (4) No
tion (See
note1.)
H2-01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1-M2 Select 0 to 38 1 0 No
H2-02 040C 04 0C Terminal M3-M4 select 0 to 38 1 1 No
H3-02 0411 04 11 Gain (terminal A1) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1,000.0
H3-03 0412 04 12 Bias (terminal A1) −100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
to 100.0
H3-08 0417 04 17 Multi-function analog input 0 or 2 1 2 No
terminal A2 signal level
selection
H3-09 0418 04 18 Multi-function analog input 0 to 1F 1 0 No
terminal A2 function selec-
tion
H3-10 0419 04 19 Gain (terminal A2) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1,000.0
H3-11 041A 04 1A Bias (terminal A2) −100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
to 100.0
H3-13 041C 04 1C Terminal A1/A2 switching 0 or 1 1 0 No

10-79
Appendices Chapter 10
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
H4-01 041D 04 1D Monitor selection (terminal 1 to 40 1 2 No
FM)
H4-02 041E 04 1E Gain (terminal FM) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1,000.0
H4-03 041F 04 1F Bias (terminal FM) −110.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
to 110.0
H4-04 0420 04 20 Monitor selection (terminal 1 to 40 1 3 No
AM)
H4-05 0421 04 21 Gain (terminal AM) 0.0 to 0.1% 50.0 Yes
1,000.0
H4-06 0422 04 22 Bias (terminal AM) −110.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
to 110.0
H4-07 0423 04 23 Analog output 1 signal level 0 or 2 1 0 No
selection
H4-08 0424 04 24 Analog output 2 signal level 0 or 2 1 0 No
selection
H5-01 0425 04 25 Slave address 0 to 20 1 1F No
(See
note 2.)
H5-02 0426 04 26 Communication speed 0 to 4 1 3 No
selection
H5-03 0427 04 27 Communication parity 0 to 2 1 0 No
selection
H5-04 0428 04 28 Stopping method after com- 0 to 3 1 3 No
munication error
H5-05 0429 04 29 Communication error detec- 0 or 1 1 1 No
tion selection
H5-06 042A 04 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1 ms 5 No
H5-07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON/OFF 0 or 1 1 1 No

Note 1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Note 2. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.

■ Protective Function Parameters

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
L1-01 0480 04 80 Motor protection selection 0 or 1 1 1 No
L1-02 0481 04 81 Motor protection time con- 0.1 to 0.1 min 1.0 No
stant 5.0
L1-03 0482 04 82 Alarm operation selection 0 to 3 1 3 No
during motor overheating
L1-04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating opera- 0 to 2 1 1 No
tion selection
L1-05 0484 04 84 Motor temperature input fil- 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
ter time constant 10.00

10-80
Appendices Chapter 10

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes

eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
L2-01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss 0 to 2 1 0 No
detection
L2-02 0486 04 86 Momentary power loss ride- 0 to 2.0 0.1 s De- No
thru time pends
on ca-
pacity.
L2-03 0487 04 87 Min. baseblock time 0.1 to 0.1 s De- No
5.0 pends
on ca-
pacity.
L2-04 0488 04 88 Voltage recovery time 0.0 to 0.1 s De- No
5.0 pends
on ca-
pacity.
L2-05 0489 04 89 Undervoltage detection 150 to 1V 190 No
level 210 (380)
(150 to (See
420) note.)
(See
note.)
L3-01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
during accel
L3-02 0490 04 90 Stall prevention level during 0 to 200 1% 120 No
accel
L3-04 0492 04 92 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
during decel
L3-05 0493 04 93 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
during running
L3-06 0494 04 94 Stall prevention level during 30 to 1% 120 No
running 200
L4-01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement detec- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
tion level 400.0
L4-02 049A 04 9A Speed agreement detec- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
tion width 20.0
L4-05 049D 04 9D Operation when frequency 0 or 1 1 0 No
reference is lost
L4-06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for 0.0 to 0.1% 80.0 No
loss of frequency reference 100.0
L5-01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No
attempts
L5-02 049F 04 9F Auto restart operation 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
L6-01 04A1 04 A1 Torque detection selection 1 0 to 8 1 0 No
L6-02 04A2 04 A2 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-03 04A3 04 A3 Torque detection time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0

10-81
Appendices Chapter 10
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
L8-02 04AE 04 AE Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 1°C De- No
130 pends
on ca-
pacity.
L8-03 04AF 04 AF Operation selection after 0 to 3 1 3 No
overheat pre-alarm
L8-09 04B5 04 B5 Ground protection selection 0 or 1 1 1 No
L8-11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay 0 to 300 1 s 60 No
time
L8-12 04B8 04 B8 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 1°C 45 No
L8-15 04BB 04 BB OL2 characteristics selec- 0 or 1 1 1 No
tion at low speeds

Note Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

■ Special Adjustment Parameters

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
N1-01 0580 05 80 Hunting-prevention func- 0 or 1 1 1 No
tion selection
N1-02 0581 05 81 Hunting-prevention gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 No
2.50
N3-01 0588 05 88 High-slip braking decelera- 1 to 20 1% 5 No
tion frequency width
N3-02 0589 05 89 High-slip braking current 100 to 1% 150 No
limit 200
N3-03 058A 05 8A High-slip braking stop dwell 0.1 to 0.1 s 1.0 No
time 10.0
N3-04 058B 05 8B High-slip braking OL time 30 to 1s 40 No
1200

■ Operator Parameters
Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
o1-01 0500 05 00 Monitor selection 4 to 40 1 6 Yes
o1-02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after 1 to 4 1 1 Yes
power up
o1-03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of refer- 0 to 1 0 No
ence setting and monitor 39,999
o1-05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness 0 to 5 1 3 Yes
o2-01 0505 05 05 LOCAL/REMOTE key 0 or 1 1 1 No
enable/disable

10-82
Appendices Chapter 10

Param- Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes

eter No. In- At- range unit setting during
(Hex) stance tribute opera-
tion
o2-02 0506 05 06 STOP key during control 0 or 1 1 1 No
circuit terminal operation
o2-03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value 0 to 2 1 0 No
o2-04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 De- No
pends
on ca-
pacity.
o2-05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference setting 0 or 1 1 0 No
method selection
o2-06 050A 05 0A Operation selection when 0 or 1 1 0 No
digital operator is discon-
nected
o2-07 050B 05 0B Cumulative operation time 0 to 1 hr 0 No
setting 65,535
o2-08 050C 05 0C Cumulative operation time 0 or 1 1 1 No
selection
o2-09 050D 05 0D Initialize mode --- --- --- No
o2-10 050E 05 0E Fan operation time setting 0 to 1 hr 0 No
65,535
o2-12 0510 05 10 Fault history initialization 0 or 1 1 0 No

10-83
Appendices Chapter 10

10-7 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes

10-7-1 Inputting Control/Frequency

The Inverter's various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table. For
example, to set the frequency reference and begin operation, first set the reference value to the fre-
quency reference register “0001,” and then write the run command to the Inverter's run command
register “0000."
Note 1. Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation.
Note 2. The following registers are in RAM, so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter's power
supply is turned OFF.
Class 64 Register Function Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 00 0000 Inverter run command (Refer to table below.)
00 01 0001 Frequency reference Sets frequency reference value. (See note
1.)
--- --- 0002 to 0006 Not used. ---
00 07 0007 Multi-function analog +11 V = 02D6 hex
output 1 (See note 2.)
00 08 0008 Multi-function analog +11 V = 02D6 hex
output 2 (See note 2.)
00 09 0009 Inverter output (See (Refer to table below.)
note 3.)
--- --- 000A to 000F Not used. ---

● Inverter Run Commands: Register Number 0000 Hex

Bit Content
0 Forward/stop (1: Forward operation)
1 Reverse/stop (1: Reverse operation)
2 Multi-function input 1
3 Multi-function input 2
4 Multi-function input 3
5 Multi-function input 4
6 Multi-function input 5
7 Multi-function input 6
8 to 15 Not used.

● Inverter Outputs: Register Number 0009 Hex

Bit Content
0 Multi-function contact output (1: ON)
1 Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)
2 Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)
3 to 15 Not used.

10-84
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 1. The setting unit of the frequency reference can be changed in o1-03 (frequency reference
setting and display units). The default setting is 0.01 Hz.
Note 2. The multi-function analog output 1 and 2 registers can be used to set the Inverter's analog
outputs by means of communications. To do that, set “31 (1F hex)” for H4-01 (multi-function
analog output terminal 21 monitor selection) and H4-04 (multi-function analog output termi-
nal 23 monitor selection).
Note 3. The Inverter's multi-function outputs can be turned from ON to OFF by means of communi-
cations. To do that, set “F” for multi-function output parameters H2-01 (multi-function contact
output: terminals 9-10 function selection), H2-02 (multi-function output 1: terminal 25 func-
tion selection), and H2-03 (multi-function output 2: terminal 26 function selection).

10-7-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions

All Inverter monitoring can be accessed. To read Inverter status, fault monitoring, alarm monitoring, I/
O status monitoring, error log, etc., specify the register number from the following table and read the
data.
Class 64 Register Function Content
Instance Attribute number (hex)
00 10 0010 Inverter status (Refer to table below.)
00 11 0011 Operator status (Refer to table below.)
00 12 0012 Operator setting error OPE error number
number
--- --- 0013 Not used. ---
00 14 0014 Fault 1 (Refer to table below.)
00 15 0015 Fault 2 (Refer to table below.)
00 16 0016 Fault 3 (Refer to table below.)
00 17 0017 CPF error 1 (Refer to table below.)
00 18 0018 CPF error 2 (Refer to table below.)
00 19 0019 Alarm 1 (Refer to table below.)
00 1A 001A Alarm 2 (Refer to table below.)
--- --- 001B to 001F Not used. ---

● Inverter Status: Register Number 0010 Hex

Bit Content
0 During Run
1 Zero speed
2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
3 during Fault Reset input
4 Frequency agree 1
5 Inverter operation ready
6 Alarm
7 Fault
8 to 15 Not used.

10-85
Appendices Chapter 10
● Operator Status: Register Number 0011 Hex
Bit Content
0 1: Operation fault
1 1: EEPROM error
2 1: Program mode
3 00: Operator connecting
4 11: Operator disconnecting
5 to 15 Not used.

● Fault 1: Register Number 0014 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 PUF Fuse open
1 UV1 Undervoltage (main)
2 UV2 Undervoltage (CTL)
3 UV3 Undervoltage (MC)
4 SC Short-circuit
5 GF Ground fault
6 OC Overcurrent
7 OV Overvoltage
8 OH Overheat (See note 1.)
9 OH1 Overheat (See note 2.)
10 OL1 Motor overload
11 OL2 Inverter overload
12 OL3 Overtorque detection 1
13 OL4 Overtorque detection 2
14 RR Braking transistor
15 RH Braking resistor

Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.

Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.

● Fault 2: Register Number 0015 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 EF3 External fault (terminal 3)
1 EF4 External fault (terminal 4)
2 EF5 External fault (terminal 5)
3 EF6 External fault (terminal 6)
4 EF7 External fault (terminal 7)
5 EF8 External fault (terminal 8)
6 --- Not used.
7 OS Overspeed
8 DEV Speed deviation
9 PGO PG is disconnected
10 PF Input phase loss
11 LF Output phase loss

10-86
Appendices Chapter 10

Bit Display Content

12 --- Not used.
13 OPR OPR disconnected
14 ERR EEPROM error
15 --- Not used.

● Fault 3: Register Number 0016 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 --- Not used.
1 BUS Communications error

● CPF Error 1: Register Number 0017 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 --- Not used.
1 --- Not used.
2 CPF02 Baseblock circuit error
3 CPF03 EEPROM error
4 CPF04 Internal A/D error (See note 1.)
5 CPF05 External A/D error (See note 2.)
6 CPF06 Option connect error
7 to 15 --- Not used.

Note 1. CPU internal A/D converter error

Note 2. CPU external A/D converter error

● CPF Error 2: Register Number 0018 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 CPF20 Optional Card A/D error
1 to 15 --- Not used.

● Alarm 1: Register Number 0019 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 UV Undervoltage (main)
1 OV Overvoltage
2 OH Overheat
3 OH2 External overheat
4 OL3 Overtorque detection 1
5 OL4 Overtorque detection 2
6 EF Forward/reverse simultaneous input
7 BB Baseblock
8 EF3 External fault (terminal 3)
9 EF4 External fault (terminal 4)
10 EF5 External fault (terminal 5)
11 EF6 External fault (terminal 6)

10-87
Appendices Chapter 10
Bit Display Content
12 EF7 External fault (terminal 7)
13 EF8 External fault (terminal 8)
14 --- Not used.
15 OS Overspeed

● Alarm 2: Register Number 001A Hex

Bit Display Content
0 DEV Speed deviation
1 PGO PG is disconnected
2 to 15 --- Not used.

■ Inverter Monitoring: U1-@@

Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit
Instance Attribute number number
00 20 0020 U1-01 Frequency reference Set in o1-03
00 21 0021 U1-02 Output frequency Set in o1-03
00 22 0022 U1-03 Output current 8192 decimal = Inverter
rated current
00 23 0023 U1-04 Control method Set in A1-02
00 24 0024 U1-05 Motor speed Set in o1-03
00 25 0025 U1-06 Output voltage 0.1 V
00 26 0026 U1-07 Main circuit DC voltage 1V
00 27 0027 U1-08 Output power 0.1 kW
00 28 0028 U1-09 Torque reference 0.1%
00 29 0029 U1-10 Input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to 8
00 2A 002A U1-11 Output terminal status (Refer to table below.)
00 2B 002B U1-12 Operating status (Refer to table below.)
00 2C 002C U1-13 Elapsed time 1 hour
00 2D 002D U1-14 FLASH ID software No. ---
00 2E 002E U1-15 Terminal 13 level 0.1% (100% = 10 V)
00 2F 002F U1-16 Terminal 14 level 0.1% (100% = 20 mA)
00 30 0030 U1-17 Terminal 16 level 0.1% (100% = 10 V)
00 31 0031 U1-18 Motor secondary current 0.1% (100%: Motor rated
current)
00 32 0032 U1-19 Motor excitation current 0.1% (100%: Motor rated
current)
00 33 0033 U1-20 Output frequency after a soft Set in o1-03
start
00 34 0034 U1-21 Input to speed control loop 0.01% (100%: Maximum fre-
quency)
00 35 0035 U1-22 Output from speed control 0.1% (100%: Motor rated
loop current)

10-88
Appendices Chapter 10

Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit

Instance Attribute number number
00 36 0036 U1-23 Speed deviation 0.01% (100%: Maximum fre-
quency)
00 37 0037 U1-24 PID feedback 0.01% (100%: Maximum fre-
quency)
00 39 0039 U1-26 Voltage reference for sec- 0.1 V
ondary current
00 3A 003A U1-27 Voltage reference for excita- 0.1 V
tion current
00 3B 003B U1-28 CPU ID ---

● Output Terminal Status: Register Number 002A Hex

Bit Content
0 1: Terminal 9 and 10 short
1 1: Terminal 25 and 27 short
2 1: Terminal 26 and 27 short
3 Not used.
4
5
6
7 1: Terminal 18 and 20 short
8 to 15 Not used.

● Operating Status: Register Number 002B Hex

Bit Content
0 During Run
1 Zero speed
2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
3 during Fault Reset input
4 Frequency agree 1
5 Operation ready
6 Alarm
7 Fault
8 to 15 Not used.

■ Inverter Monitoring: U2-@@, U3-@@

Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit
Instance Attribute number number
00 80 0080 U2-01 Current fault (Refer to table below.)
00 81 0081 U2-02 Last fault (Refer to table below.)
00 82 0082 U2-03 Fault frequency reference Set in o1-03.
00 83 0083 U2-04 Fault output reference Set in o1-03.
00 84 0084 U2-05 Fault output current 8192 decimal = Inverter
rated current

10-89
Appendices Chapter 10
Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit
Instance Attribute number number
00 85 0085 U2-06 Fault motor speed Set in o1-03.
00 86 0086 U2-07 Fault output voltage refer- 0.1 V
ence
00 87 0087 U2-08 Fault main circuit DC voltage 1V
00 88 0088 U2-09 Fault output power 0.1 kW
00 89 0089 U2-10 Fault torque reference 0.1%
00 8A 008A U2-11 Fault input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to 8
00 8B 008B U2-12 Fault output terminal status (Same as for U1-11 on previ-
ous page.)
00 8C 008C U2-13 Fault operating status (Same as for U1-12 on previ-
ous page.)
00 8D 008D U2-14 Fault elapsed time 1 hour
00 90 0090 U3-01 Content of last fault (Refer to table below.)
00 91 0091 U3-02 Content of 2nd prior fault (Refer to table below.)
00 92 0092 U3-03 Content of 3rd prior fault (Refer to table below.)
00 93 0093 U3-04 Content of 4th prior fault (Refer to table below.)
00 94 0094 U3-05 Elapsed time since last fault 1 hour
00 95 0095 U3-06 Elapsed time since 2nd prior 1 hour
fault
00 96 0096 U3-07 Elapsed time since 3rd prior 1 hour
fault
00 97 0097 U3-08 Elapsed time since 4th prior 1 hour
fault

● Error Codes
Code Display Content
01 PUF Fuse open
02 UV1 Undervoltage (main)
03 UV2 Undervoltage (CTL)
04 UV3 Undervoltage (MC)
05 SC Short-circuit
06 GF Ground fault
07 OC Overcurrent
08 OV Overvoltage
09 OH Overheat (See note 1.)
0A OH1 Overheat (See note 2.)
0B OL1 Motor overload
0C OL2 Inverter overload
0D OL3 Overtorque detection 1
0E OL4 Overtorque detection 2
0F RR Braking transistor
10 RH Braking resistor
11 EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
12 EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
13 EF5 External fault (Terminal 5)

10-90
Appendices Chapter 10

Code Display Content

14 EF6 External fault (Terminal 6)
15 EF7 External fault (Terminal 7)
16 EF8 External fault (Terminal 8)
17 --- Not used.
18 OS Overspeed
19 DEV Speed deviation
1A PGO PG is disconnected
1B PF Input phase loss
1C LF Output phase loss
1D --- Not used.
1E OPR OPR disconnected
1F ERR EEPROM error
21 to FF --- Not used.

Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.

Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.

10-7-3 Parameter Reading and Writing

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter parameters and the corresponding regis-
ter numbers. Write and read the various parameters with “1" as the minimum setting unit. Negative
numbers are expressed as two's complement. If the setting unit is in hexadecimal, there is no need to
convert it.
When writing data in parameters, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data.
Unless the enter command is transmitted, the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start.

■ Parameters for Initialize Mode

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
A1-00 0100 --- --- Display Language 0 to 6 1 1 Yes
A1-01 0101 01 01 Access Level 0 to 4 1 2 Yes
A1-02 0102 01 02 Select Control Method 0 to 3 1 2 No
A1-03 0103 --- --- Initialize 0 to 3330 1 0 No
A1-04 0104 --- --- Password 0 to 9999 1 0 No
A1-05 0105 --- --- Setting the Password 0 to 9999 1 0 No
A2-01 0106 to --- --- User-parameter settings 0180 to --- --- No
to 0125 050C
A2-32 Set the
register
numbers
for b1-01
to o2-08.

10-91
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Application Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
b1-01 0180 01 03 Frequency reference selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-02 0181 01 04 Run source selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-03 0182 01 05 Stopping method selection 0 to 3 1 0 No
b1-04 0183 01 06 Disabling reverse operation 0, 1 1 0 No
b1-05 0184 01 07 Operation selection for minimum fre- 0 to 3 1 0 No
quency (E1-09 or less)
b1-06 0185 --- --- Setting control input responsiveness 0, 1 1 1 No
b1-07 0186 --- --- Operation selection after switching to 0, 1 1 0 No
remote mode
b1-08 01A6 --- --- Run source selection when not in drive 0, 1 1 0 No
mode
b2-01 0187 01 08 Excitation level (DC injection starting 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
frequency) 10.0
b2-02 0188 01 09 DC injection braking current 0 to 100 1% 50 No
b2-03 0189 01 0A DC injection braking time at start 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
10.00
b2-04 018A 01 0B DC injection braking time at stop 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.50 No
10.00
b2-08 01AB --- --- Magnetic flux compensation amount 0 to 500 1% 0 No
b3-01 018E 01 0C Speed search selection at start 0, 1 1 0 (See No
note.)
b3-02 018F 01 0D Speed search operation current 0 to 200 1% 100 No
b3-03 0190 01 0E Speed search deceleration time 0.1 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
10.0
b4-01 0192 --- --- Timer function ON-delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
300.0
b4-02 0193 --- --- Timer function OFF-delay time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
300.0
b5-01 0194 01 0F PID control selection 0 to 4 1 0 No
b5-02 0195 01 10 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
25.00
b5-03 0196 01 11 Integral time (I) 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
360.0
b5-04 0197 01 12 Integral limit (I) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
b5-05 0198 01 13 Differential time (D) 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
10.00
b5-06 0199 01 14 PID limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
b5-07 019A 01 15 PID offset adjustment −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
b5-08 019B 01 16 PID primary delay time constant 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
10.00
b5-09 01A7 --- --- PID output characteristic selection 0, 1 1 0 No
b5-10 01A8 --- --- PID output gain 0.0 to 0.1 1.0 No
25.0
b5-11 01A9 --- --- PID output reverse selection 0, 1 1 0 No
b5-12 01AF --- --- Feedback loss detection selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
b5-13 01B0 --- --- Feedback loss detection level 0 to 100 1% 0 No
b5-14 01B1 --- --- Feedback loss detection time 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.00 No
25.0

10-92
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
b6-01 019C 01 17 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b6-02 019D 01 18 Dwell time at start 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
10.0
b6-03 019E 01 19 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b6-04 019F 01 1A Dwell time at stop 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
10.0
b7-01 01A0 01 1B Droop control gain 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
b7-02 01A1 01 1C Droop control delay time 0.03 to 0.01 s 0.05 Yes
2.00
b8-01 01A2 01 1D Energy-saving gain 0 to 100 1% 80 No
b8-02 01A3 01 1E Energy-saving frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
b9-01 01A4 01 1F Zero-servo gain 0 to 100 1 5 No
b9-02 01A5 01 20 Zero-servo completion width 0 to 1 pulse 10 No
16383

Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default setting is given above.)

■ Tuning Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
C1-01 0200 01 21 Acceleration time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 10 Yes
6000.0
C1-02 0201 01 22 Deceleration time 1 (See Yes
C1-03 0202 01 23 Acceleration time 2 note 1.) Yes
C1-04 0203 01 24 Deceleration time 2 Yes
C1-05 0204 01 25 Acceleration time 3 No
C1-06 0205 01 26 Deceleration time 3 No
C1-07 0206 01 27 Acceleration time 4 No
C1-08 0207 01 28 Deceleration time 4 No
C1-09 0208 01 29 Emergency stop time No
C1-10 0209 --- --- Acceleration/deceleration time units 0, 1 1 1 No
C1-11 020A --- --- Acceleration/deceleration switching fre- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
quency 400.0
C2-01 020B 01 2A S-curve characteristic time at accelera- 0.0 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion start. 2.50
C2-02 020C 01 2B S-curve characteristic time at accelera- 0.0 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion end. 2.50
C2-03 020D 01 2C S-curve characteristic time at decelera- 0.0 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
tion start. 2.50
C2-04 020E 01 2D S-curve characteristic time at decelera- 0.0 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
tion end. 2.50
C3-01 020F 01 2E Slip compensation gain. 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 1.0 (See Yes
note 2.)
C3-02 0210 01 2F Slip compensation primary delay time. 0 to 1 ms 200 (See No
10000 note 2.)

10-93
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
C3-03 0211 01 30 Slip compensation limit. 0 to 250 1% 200 No
C3-04 0212 01 31 Slip compensation during regeneration. 0, 1 1 0 No
C3-05 0242 01 32 Flux Calculation Method 0, 1 1 0 No
C3-06 0243 --- --- Output voltage limiting action selection 0, 1 1 0 No
C4-01 0213 01 33 Torque compensation gain. 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
C4-02 0214 01 34 Torque compensation delay time. 0 to 1 ms 20 (See No
10000 note 2.)
C4-03 0244 --- --- Startup torque (forward operation) 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
200.0
C4-04 0245 --- --- Startup torque (reverse operation) −200.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
0.0
C4-05 0246 --- --- Startup torque compensation time 0 to 200 1 ms 10 No
C5-01 0215 01 35 ASR Proportional (P) gain 1 0.00 to 0.01 20.00 Yes
300.00 (See
note 2.)
C5-02 0216 01 36 ASR Integral (I) time 1 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.500 Yes
10.000 (See
note 2.)
C5-03 0217 01 37 ASR Proportional Gain (P) 2 0.00 to 0.01 20.00 Yes
300.00 (See
note 2.)
C5-04 0218 01 38 ASR Integral (I) time 2 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.500 Yes
10.000 (See
note 2.)
C5-05 0219 01 39 ASR Limit 0.0 to 0.1% 5.0 No
20.0
C5-06 021A 01 3A ASR Primary delay time 0.000 o 0.001 s 0.004 No
0.500
C5-07 021B 01 3B ASR Switching frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
C5-08 0241 01 3C ASR Integral (I) Limit 0 to 400 1% 400 No
C6-01 021C 01 3D Carrier frequency upper limit. 2.0 to 0.1 kHz 15.0 No
15.0 (See
(See note 3.)
note 4.)
C6-02 021D 01 3E Carrier frequency lower limit. 0.4 to 0.1 kHz 15.0 No
15.0 (See
note 3.)
C6-03 021E 01 3F Carrier frequency proportional gain. 0 to 99 1 0 No
C7-01 021F 01 40 Hunting prevention selection 0, 1 1 1 No
C7-02 0220 01 41 Hunting prevention gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 No
2.50
C8-08 022A 01 42 AFR Gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 No
10.00
C8-09 022B --- --- AFR primary delay time 0 to 2000 1 ms 50 No
C8-30 0240 --- --- Carrier Frequency Selection during 1 to 2 1 2 No
Auto-tuning

Note 1. The setting range and setting unit for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to
the setting for C1-10 (the unit for acceleration/deceleration time). If C1-10 is set to 0, the set-
ting range for acceleration/deceleration times is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default settings are given above.)

10-94
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 3. The default setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity. (The value for the 200-
V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given above.)
Note 4. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to the setting range. (The open
loop vector control setting range is given above.)

■ Reference Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
d1-01 0280 01 43 Frequency reference 1 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 6.00 Yes
max. fre- (Set
d1-02 0281 01 44 Frequency reference 2 quency using o1- 0.00 Yes
d1-03 0282 01 45 Frequency reference 3 03.) 0.00 Yes
d1-04 0283 01 46 Frequency reference 4 0.00 Yes
d1-05 0284 01 47 Frequency reference 5 0.00 Yes
d1-06 0285 01 48 Frequency reference 6 0.00 Yes
d1-07 0286 01 49 Frequency reference 7 0.00 Yes
d1-08 0287 01 4A Frequency reference 8 0.00 Yes
d1-09 0288 01 4B Jog frequency reference 6.00 Yes
d2-01 0289 01 4C Reference frequency upper limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 No
110.0
d2-02 028A 01 4D Reference frequency lower limit 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
109.0
d3-01 028B 01 4E Jump frequency 1 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
d3-02 028C 01 4F Jump frequency 2 400.0 0.0 No
d3-03 028D 01 50 Jump frequency 3 0.0 No
d3-04 028E 01 51 Jump frequency width 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.0 No
20.0
d4-01 028F 01 52 Reference frequency hold function 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
d4-02 0290 01 53 Trim control level 0 to 100 1% 25 No
d5-01 0291 01 54 Torque control selection 0, 1 1 0 No
d5-02 0292 01 55 Torque reference delay time 0 to 1000 1 ms 0 No
d5-03 0293 01 56 Speed limit selection 1, 2 1 1 No
d5-04 0294 01 57 Speed limit −120 to 1% 0 No
120
d5-05 0295 01 58 Speed limit bias 0 to 120 1% 10 No
d5-06 0296 01 59 Speed/torque control switching timer. 0 to 1000 1 ms 0 No

10-95
Appendices Chapter 10
■ Motor Constant Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
E1-01 0300 01 5A Input voltage setting 155 to 1V 200 No
255 (155 (400)
to 510) (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)
E1-02 0300 01 5B Motor selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
E1-03 0302 01 5C V/f pattern selection 0 to F 1 F No
E1-04 0303 01 5D Maximum frequency (FMAX) 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
E1-05 0304 01 5E Maximum voltage (VMAX) 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-06 0305 01 5F Maximum voltage frequency (FA) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
E1-07 0306 01 60 Intermediate frequency (FB) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
400.0 note 2.)
E1-08 0307 01 61 Intermediate voltage (VC) 0.0 to 0.1 V 11.0 No
255.0 (22.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
(See and 2.)
note 1.)
E1-09 0308 01 62 Minimum frequency (FMIN) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.5 (See No
400.0 note 2.)
E1-10 0309 01 63 Minimum voltage (VMIN) 0.0 to 0.1 V 2.0 (4.0) No
255.0 (See
(0.0 to notes 1
510.0) and 2.)
(See
note 1.)
E1-11 030A 01 64 Mid. output frequency B 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
E1-12 030B 01 65 Mid. output frequency voltage B 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 No
255.0
(0.0 to
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E1-13 030C 01 66 Base voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 No
255.0
(0.0 to
510.0)
(See
note 1.)
E2-01 030E 01 67 Motor rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A 1.90 No
6.40 (See
(See note 3.)
note 4.)
E2-02 030F 01 68 Motor rated slip 0.00 o 0.01 Hz 2.90 No
20.00 (See
note 3.)
E2-03 0310 01 69 Motor no-load current 0.00 to 0.01 A 1.20 No
2.90 (See
(See note 3.)
note 5.)
E2-04 0311 01 6A Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 4 No

10-96
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
E2-05 0312 01 6B Motor phase-to-phase resistance 0.000 to 0.001 Ω 9.842 No
65.000 (See
note 3.)
E2-06 0313 01 6C Motor leakage inductance 0.0 to 0.1% 18.2 No
40.0 (See
note 3.)
E2-07 0314 01 6D Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 1 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 No
0.50
E2-08 0315 01 6E Motor iron-core saturation coefficient 2 0.00 to 0.01 0.75 No
0.75
E2-09 0316 01 6F Mechanical loss 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
10.0
E2-10 0325 --- ---- Torque compensation motor iron loss 0 to 1W 14 (See No
65535 note 3.)
E3-01 0317 --- ---- Select control method of motor 2 0 to 3 1 2 No
E4-01 0318 --- ---- Motor 2 maximum frequency 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
E4-02 0319 --- ---- Motor 2 maximum voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (400.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) note 1.)
(See
note 1.)
E4-03 031A --- ---- Motor 2 maximum voltage frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
400.0
E4-04 031B --- ---- Motor 2 intermediate frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
400.0 note 2.)
E4-05 031C --- ---- Motor 2 intermediate voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 11.0 No
255.0 (22.0)
(0.0 to (See
510.0) notes 1
(See and 2.)
note 1.)
E4-06 031D --- ---- Motor 2 minimum frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.5 (See No
400.0 note 2.)
E4-07 031E --- ---- Motor 2 minimum voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 2.0 (4.0) No
255.0 (See
(0.0 to notes 1
510.0) and 2.)
(See
note 1.)
E5-01 031F --- ---- Motor 2 rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A 1.90 No
6.40 (See
(See note 3.)
note 4.)
E5-02 0320 --- ---- Motor 2 rated slip 0.00 to 0.01 Hz 2.90 No
20.00 (See
note 3.)
E5-03 0321 --- ---- Motor 2 no-load current 0.00 to 0.01 A 1.20 No
2.90 (See
(See note 3.)
note 5.)
E5-04 0322 --- ---- Motor 2 number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
E5-05 0323 --- ---- Motor 2 phase-to-phase resistance 0.000 to 0.001 Ω 9.842 No
65.000 (See
note 3.)
E5-06 0324 --- ---- Motor 2 leakage inductance 0.0 to 0.1% 18.2 No
40.0 (See
note 3.)

10-97
Appendices Chapter 10
Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default settings are given above.)
Note 3. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
Inverter is given above.
Note 4. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter's rated output current. The values for a 200-
V-class 0.4-kW Inverter are given above.
Note 5. The setting range is 0.00 to (motor's rated current -0.1 A). The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-
kW Inverter is given above.

■ Option Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
F1-01 0380 01 70 Number of PG pulses 0 to 1 p/r 1000 No
60000
F1-02 0381 01 71 PG disconnection stopping method 0 to 3 1 1 No
(PGO)
F1-03 0382 01 72 PG overspeed stopping method 0 to 3 1 1 No
F1-04 0383 01 73 PG speed deviation stopping method 0 to 3 1 3 No
F1-05 0384 01 74 PG rotation setting 0, 1 1 0 No
F1-06 0385 01 75 PG output ratio 0 to 132 1 1 No
F1-07 0386 01 76 Selecting integral control during accel/ 0, 1 1 0 No
decel.
F1-08 0387 01 77 Overspeed (OS) detection level. 0 to 120 1% 115 No
F1-09 0388 01 78 Overspeed (OS) detection time 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 0.0 (See No
note 1.)
F1-10 0389 01 79 PG speed deviation detection level 0 to 50 1% 10 No
(DEV)
F1-11 038A 01 7A PG speed deviation detection time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.5 No
(DEV) 10.0
F1-12 038B 01 7B Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 to 1000 1 0 No
F1-13 038C 01 7C Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1000 1 0 No
F1-14 0397 01 7D PG disconnection detection time 0.0 to 0.1 s 2.0 No
10.0
F2-01 038D --- --- Analog Reference Card selection 0, 1 1 0 No
F3-01 038E --- --- Digital Reference Card input selection 0 to 7 1 0 No
F4-01 038F --- --- Channel 1 output monitor selection 1 to 38 1 2 No
(See
note 2.)
F4-02 0390 --- --- Channel 1 gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
F4-03 0391 --- --- Channel 2 output monitor selection 1 to 38 1 3 No
(See
note 2.)
F4-04 0392 --- --- Channel 2 gain 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 Yes
2.50
F4-05 03A0 --- --- Channel 1 bias −10.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
10.0
F4-06 03A1 --- --- Channel 2 bias −10.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
10.0
F5-01 0393 --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
F5-02 0394 --- --- Not used. --- --- 1 ---

10-98
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
F6-01 0395 --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
F7-01 0396 --- --- Output pulse multiple selection 0 to 4 1 1 No
F8-01 0398 --- --- Operation selection (E-15) 0 to 3 1 1 No
F9-01 0399 --- --- Communications external fault input 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
F9-02 039A --- --- Communications external fault input 0, 1 1 0 No
detection selection
F9-03 039B --- --- Communications external fault input 0 to 3 1 1 No
operation selection
F9-04 039C --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
F9-05 039E --- --- Torque reference/Torque limit selection 0, 1 1 1 No
from communications
F9-06 039F --- --- DeviceNet operation selection 0 to 3 1 1 No

Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default settings are given above.)
Note 2. Within the setting range (1 to 38), 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35 cannot be set,
and 29 to 31 are not used.

■ External Terminal Function Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
H1-01 0400 01 7E Multi-function input 1: terminal 3 selec- 0 to 77 1 24 No
tion
H1-02 0401 01 7F Multi-function input 2: terminal 4 selec- 14 No
tion
H1-03 0402 01 80 Multi-function input 3: terminal 5 selec- 3 (0) No
tion (See
note 1.)
H1-04 0403 01 81 Multi-function input 4: terminal 6 selec- 4 (3) No
tion (See
note 1.)
H1-05 0404 01 82 Multi-function input 5: terminal 7 selec- 6 (4) No
tion (See
note 1.)
H1-06 0405 01 83 Multi-function input 6: terminal 8 selec- 8 (6) No
tion (See
note 1.)
H2-01 0406 01 84 Multi-function contact output: terminal 0 to 37 1 0 No
9 to 10.
H2-02 0407 01 85 Multi-function output 1: terminal 25. 1 No
H2-03 0408 01 86 Multi-function output 2: terminal 26. 2 No
H3-01 0409 01 87 Signal selection: terminal 13 (Voltage) 0, 1 1 0 No
H3-02 040A 01 88 Frequency reference (voltage) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
gain: terminal 13 1000.0
H3-03 040B 01 89 Frequency reference (voltage) −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
bias: terminal 13 100.0
H3-04 040C 01 8A Multi-function analog input signal 0, 1 1 0 No
selection: terminal 16
H3-05 040D 01 8B Multi-function analog input signal 0 to 1F 1 1F No
selection: terminal 16

10-99
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
H3-06 040E 01 8C Multi-function analog input signal gain: 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
terminal 16 1000.0
H3-07 040F 01 8D Multi-function analog input signal bias: −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
terminal 16 100.0
H3-08 0410 01 8E Frequency reference (current) signal 0 to 2 1 2 No
selection: terminal 14
H3-09 0411 01 8F Frequency reference (current) selec- 0 to 1F 1 1F No
tion: terminal 14
H3-10 0412 01 90 Frequency reference (current) gain: ter- 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
minal 14 1000.0
H3-11 0413 01 91 Frequency reference (current) bias: ter- −100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
minal 14 100.0
H3-12 0414 01 92 Analog input filter time constant 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
2.00
H4-01 0415 01 93 Multi-function analog output 1 selec- 1 to 38 1 2 No
tion: terminal 21 (See
note 2.)
H4-02 0416 01 94 Multi-function analog output 1 gain ter- 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
minal 21 2.50
H4-03 0417 01 95 Multi-function analog output 1 bias ter- −10.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
minal 21 10.0
H4-04 0418 01 96 Multi-function analog output 2 selec- 1 to 38 1 3 No
tion: terminal 23 (See
note 2.)
H4-05 0419 01 97 Multi-function analog output 2 gain ter- 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 Yes
minal 23 2.50
H4-06 041A 01 98 Multi-function analog output 2 bias ter- −10.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
minal 23 10.0
H4-07 041B 01 99 Multi-function analog output signal level 0, 1 1 0 No
selection
H5-01 041C --- --- Not used. --- --- 1F ---
H5-02 041D --- --- Not used. --- --- 3 ---
H5-03 041E --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
H5-04 041F --- --- Not used. --- --- 3 ---
H5-05 0420 --- --- Not used. --- --- 1 ---

Note 1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
Note 2. Within the setting range (1 to 38), 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35 cannot be set,
and 29 to 31 are not used.

■ Protective Function Parameters

Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
L1-01 0480 01 9A Motor protection selection 0, 1 1 1 No
L1-02 0481 01 9B Motor protection time constant 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 min 1.0 No
L2-01 0482 04 9C Momentary power loss selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
L2-02 0483 01 9D Momentary power loss ridethru 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 0.7 (See No
note 2.)
L2-03 0484 01 9E Minimum baseblock time (BB) 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s 0.5 (See No
note 2.)

10-100
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
L2-04 0485 01 9F Voltage restart time 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s 0.3 No
L2-05 0486 01 A0 Under voltage detection level (UV) 150 to 1V 190 No
210 (150 (380)
to 420) (See
(See note 1.)
note 1.)
L2-06 0487 01 A1 Not used. --- --- 0.0 ---
L3-01 0488 01 A2 Stall prevention during acceleration 0 to 2 1 1 No
L3-02 0489 01 A3 Stall prevention level during accelera- 0 to 200 1% 150 No
tion
L3-03 048A 01 A4 Stall prevention limit during accelera- 0 to 100 1% 50 No
tion
L3-04 048B 01 A5 Stall prevention during deceleration 0 to 3 1 1 No
L3-05 048C 01 A6 Stall prevention during run 0 to 2 1 1 No
L3-06 048D 01 A7 Stall prevention level during run 30 to 200 1% 160 No
L4-01 0490 01 A8 Frequency detection level 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
L4-02 0491 01 A9 Frequency detection width 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
20.0
L4-03 0492 01 AA Frequency detection level (+/−) −400.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400.0
L4-04 0493 01 AB Frequency detection width (+/−) 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
20.0
L4-05 0494 01 AC Operation when frequency reference is 0, 1 1 0 No
lost
L5-01 0495 01 AD Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 1 0 No
L5-02 0496 01 AE Auto restart operation selection 0, 1 1 0 No
L6-01 0498 01 AF Torque detection selection 1 0 to 4 1 0 No
L6-02 0499 01 B0 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-03 049A 01 B1 Torque detection time 1 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0
L6-04 049B 01 B2 Torque detection selection 2 0 to 4 1 0 No
L6-05 049C 01 B3 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-06 049D 01 B4 Torque detection time 2 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.1 No
10.0
L7-01 049E 01 B5 Forward torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L7-02 049F 01 B6 Reverse torque limit No
L7-03 04A0 01 B7 Forward regenerative torque limit No
L7-04 04A1 01 B8 Reverse regenerative torque limit No
L8-01 04A4 01 B9 DB resistor protection 0, 1 1 0 No
L8-02 04A5 01 BA Inverter overheat detection pre-alarm 50 to 130 1°C 95 No
level
L8-03 04A6 01 BB Operation after Inverter overheat pre- 0 to 3 1 3 No
alarm

10-101
Appendices Chapter 10
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- range unit setting during
ber In- At- opera-
(hex) stance tribute tion
L8-05 04A8 01 BC Input open-phase protection selection 0, 1 1 0 No
L8-07 04AA 01 BD Output open-phase protection selec- 0, 1 1 0 No
tion
L8-10 04AD 01 BE Ground fault protection operation 0, 1 1 1 No
selection
L8-17 04B4 --- --- Low-speed carrier frequency reduction 0 to 3 1 1 No
selection (2)
L8-19 04B6 --- --- Low-speed Inverter overload (OL2) 0, 1 1 0 No
characteristic selection

Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
Inverter is given above.

■ Operator Parameters
Con- Regis- Class 64 (hex) Name Setting Setting Default Write
stant ter num- In- At- range unit setting during
ber stance tribute opera-
(hex) tion
o1-01 0500 01 BF Monitor selection 4 to 38 1 6 Yes
o1-02 0501 01 C0 Monitor selection after power-on 1 to 4 1 1 Yes
o1-03 0502 01 C1 Frequency reference setting and dis- 0 to 1 0 No
play units 39999
o1-04 0503 01 C2 V/f pattern setting units 0, 1 1 0 No
o1-05 0504 01 C3 Not used. --- --- 0 ---
o2-01 0505 01 C4 Local/Remote Key 0, 1 1 1 No
o2-02 0506 01 C5 Stop Key 0, 1 1 1 No
o2-03 0507 --- --- User constant initial values 0 to 2 1 0 No
o2-04 0508 01 C6 Inverter capacity selection 0 to FF 1 0 (See No
(See note.)
note.)
o2-05 0509 01 C7 Frequency reference setting method 0, 1 1 0 No
o2-06 050A 01 C8 Operation selection when Digital Oper- 0, 1 1 0 No
ator is disconnected
o2-07 050B --- --- Cumulative operation time setting 0 to 1 hr 0 No
65535
o2-08 050C --- --- Cumulative operation time selection 0, 1 1 0 No
o2-09 050D 01 C9 Factory use --- --- 1 ---

Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
Inverter is given above.

10-102
 Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. I539-E1-02

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers
refer to the previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
01 May 2003 Original production
02 March 2005 Changes were made throughout the manual to add information, and make
minor corrections. These changes included adding information for new mod-
els (e.g., -V1 suffix), changing CS1/CJ1 to CS/CJ and PC to PLC. Precau-
tionary and warranty and liability information was also added to the
beginning of the manual. The following changes were also made.
Pages 1-10 and 8-3: Changed reference.
Pages 2-5 and 10-35: Changed note.
Page 2-11: Changed catalog number form W328 to W382.
Page 3-6: Added precaution.
Page 3-17: Added information on multi-drop connections with Thick Cables.
Page 5-28: Added note and diagrams.
Page 6-4: Added setting range for word S+2.
Page 6-6: Changed bit numbers for Network Communication Error Flag.
Page 6-16: Added information to Attribute 65.
Pages 6-17, 7-11, 7-59, 10-20, 10-35, and 10-64: Added note.
Pages 6-19 and 10-20: Added information to table.
Page 7-14: Corrected values in note 3.
Page 7-15: Changed information in table.
Page 8-6: Added 3G3PV to information on ENTER command.
Page 8-8: Changed information on special remote I/O in tables.
Pages 10-2 and 10-3: Added baud rate information.
Page 10-4: Added information on restarting communications.
Pages 10-8, 10-9, 10-18, 10-19, 10-25, 10-59, 10-61, 10-64, 10-95, 10-96,
10-98, and 10-99: Added note references to table.
Pages 10-12 and 10-13: Added Yes to Write column for Attribute 66.

R-1
 Revision History

R-2
 OMRON Corporation
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045

Authorized Distributor:

Cat. No. I539-E1-02 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan

This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.